Home

Main Power Generation and Distribution - Low Voltage

1. Formatert Tabulatorstopp Ikke p 15 cm Formatert Skrift Arial 10 pkt A where Formatert Ikke Hevet Senket Formatert Ikke Hevet Senket Formatert Normal Fmax is the maximum dynamic force at hook NORSOK standard Page 50 of 182199 L savy flEG F de 2 l ea The dynamic force in a single mass hoisting system equipped with a shock absorber may in principle be described as a function of time F t kx cv ma A 2 where k Stiffness of the hoisting system m F g tetal mass atheokof hoist load Yp j j j Xgisthe vericalc damping coefficient xX deflection at hook duete statictoad v velocity of hoist load a acceleration of hoist load During an excitation of a hoisting system equipped with a shock absorber which is designed to work efficiently in the actual load range the maximum dynamic force in the system will be reduced compared with a system without a shock absorber Figure A 1 Effect of shock absorber Z gt Z Z 2222 Formatert Skrift ArialMT 9 5 pkt Fet Formatert Skrift ArialMT 9 5 pkt Formatert kke juster avstand mellom asiatisk og latinsk tekst Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk tekst og F t Force at hook tall Fmaxt_ Maximum dynamic force at hook without shock absorber NORSOK standard Page 51 of 482199 Fmax2_ Maxim
2. 1 Vr 5 is g WLLrova Va O55 Vi Hy Vp Ve sHherelative velocity in m s between rescue boat A NORSOK standard Page 85 of 182199 Formatert Normal Formatert Normal Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp 1 5 cm Left Feltkode endret Formatert Listeavsnitt Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 1 92 cm Innrykk ved 2 55 cm Formatert Skrift Arial 10 pkt Engelsk Storbritannia Formatert Skrift Arial 10 pkt Engelsk Storbritannia Formatert Skrift Arial 10 pkt Engelsk Storbritannia Formatert Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk og latinsk tekst Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk tekst og tall Formatert Skrift ArialMT 9 5 pkt o Formatert Normal Formatert Innrykk Venstre 0 cm F rste linje 0 cm Formatert nnrykk F rste linje 1 27 cm a l one i Formatert Skrift 8 pkt NOTE Increasing the static safety factor contributes to increased operational risk when handling the elastic pennant in rough seas due lt to heavier equipment and larger dimensions A higher static safety factor also gives less elasticity i e increases the dynamic factor Formatert Normal Keeping the static safety factor as low as possible is therefore desirable although not less than 10 A 7 4 4 Calculation of minimum requ
3. Varmin Ko 4 Vp Ve A 11 where For group A 1 and A 2 e Lifeboats arranged for horizontal lifting with 2 point lifting o _Ko 0 5 for loads in the range 0 50 of rated capacity for groupAtandA2 lt e Lifeboats arranged to enable pivoting around a transverse axis during lifting o _K0 0 3 for loads in the range 0 50 of rated capacity For group A 6 e K 0 5 for loads in the range 0 100 of rated capacity for group A 6 4 Vp is given by equation A 6 Vc is given by equation A 7 A 1 7 Risk coefficient according to EN 13001 2 4 3 2 For the lifting of personnel all single critical load carrying structure and all machinery components including wire ropes means of connection and their anchorage in the life saving equipment shall be designed with a risk coefficient of NORSOK standard Page 55 of 182199 Formatert Skrift Calibri 11 pkt Formatert Mellomrom Etter 10 pkt Ikke legg til avstand mellom avsnitt med samme stil Linjeavstand Flere 1 15 li Punktmerket Niva 2 Justert ved 2 27 cm Innrykk ved 2 9 cm Tabulatorstopp Ikke pa 1 cm 13 69 cm Formatert Skrift Calibri 11 pkt Engelsk USA Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 63 cm Innrykk ved 1 27 cm Yn 1 5 in accordance with 5 9 For load combinations not related to lifting of persons the risk coefficient may be set to y 1 0 Reference is made to load combinations described in tables
4. 100 T 80 ao z gt 60 4 ij 2 8 40 a Simplified durv O 20 0 t 0 5 10 11 1 15 20 25 Elongation Figure l 1 Rope static stiffness curve For simplified calculations a linear force elongation curve crossing the real force elongation curve at 0 of MBL and 20 of MBL is drawn Elongation at crossing point is read off to be 11 1 The static stiffness is taken as the gradient of the simplified linear curve 20 Feltkode endret K 1 80 1 1 111 1 3 2 Selection of rope diameter The rope diameter is selected based on the required minimum breaking load with a minimum static safety factor of 10 taking into account a reduction factor of 10 for splices ref clause A 7 4 3 Required minimum breaking load from formula A 18 90 MBL Feltkode endret SF 210 l Ser WLLrooa 8 For WLLroo24 W 4 tonnes the required minimum breaking load MBLyeq is found to be we ee Feltkode endret 0 MBL SF 436kN 1 2 Stat 0 9 0 9 NORSOK standard Page 189 of 182199 Minimum rope diameter selected read off from Table I 1 52mm Actual minimum breaking load selected from rope manufacturers catalogue for rope diameter 52 mm MBL 480kN see table 1 1 Actual static safety factor from expression A 18 90 MBL _ 0 9 480 a Witter ee 4 981 11 01 Actual static stiffness from expression A 22
5. Formatert Skrift 11 pkt Formatert Skrift 11 pkt Formatert Skrift 11 pkt Formatert kke juster avstand mellom asiatisk og latinsk tekst Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk tekst og tall Formatert Skrift 11 pkt Formatert Skrift 11 pkt NORSOK standard Page 166 of 182199 Radial heek speed oe Fherna i i nt heok speed shall be fe mls Radial hook ee The minimum required radial hook speed shall be achieved under the following conditions eata raditi of 3 4 of the maximum radius or 30 m radius whichever is the longest radius and minimum shall be measured in both directions with and without load at rated capacity at running start measured between 5 meters before and 5 meters after that radius nae NOTE The rated capacity is to be taken as Rn according to EN 13852 1 The minimum required radial hook speed may be obtained from operating a single mechanism or a combination of any mechanisms with a speed component in the radial direction Lateral hook speed The minimum required lateral hook speed V_ shall be V K 4 V V mis where K is a velocity factor according to Table G 4 G 3 The minimum lateral hook speed shall be achieved when slewing at a radius of 3 4 of the maximum radius or 30m whichever is the longest radius Speed parameters Vp and Vg are to be taken form EN 13852 1 Table G 3
6. Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 __tara weight tonnes of the basket Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e pay load tonnes of the basket taken as at least payload n m Me a 0 75 cm where Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 n is the number of persons allowed on the platform and shall not be less than 2 ea ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved A cm Mp 20 090 tonnes is the minimum mass of each person Me 20 040 tonnes is the minimum mass of tools and other equipment for each person the risk coefficient given in Table F 4 shall be increased by multiplying with a factor of 5o0f2 0 Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm NORSOK standard Page 122 of 182199 The dynamic amplification factor DAF shall be as specified for inboardonboard onshore lifting in Annex F Work baskets shall have pockets for transport with fork lift trucks NOTE Lifting persons with fork lift trucks is not allowed Lifting sets shall have a working load limit corresponding to not less than twice the max gross mass of the work basket Work baskets shall have two dedicated lifting sets with independent lifting points in the work basket and with independent top links The lifting sets shall be permanently attached to the work basket with means requiring tools to remove The top link to be attached to the crane hook should have minimum internal dimensions 270 mm x 140 mm For lifting appliances wi
7. Strength requirements Rope strength shall be checked for 2 conditions e Running reeving systems and e Straight pull at end terminations For ropes in running reeving systems the characteristic resistance R shall be taken as their breaking force F For ropes at end terminations the characteristic resistance Rk shall be taken as Fu x v where y is the end termination factor with the following values e Ferrules and ferrule securing according to EN 13411 3 _v 0 9 lt e Metal and resin socketing according to EN 13411 4 ye 1 0 e Asymmetric wedge sockets according to EN 13411 6 ye 0 8 e Symmetric wedge sockets according to EN 13411 7 y 0 8 The minimum tensile strength for steel wire ropes shall be 1 770 N mm and the maximum tensile strength shall be 1 960 N mm according to EN 12385 4 Wire ropes shall be of rotation resistant construction with steel core according to EN 12385 1 EN 12385 2 EN 12385 3 and EN 12385 4 Limit states and proof of competence of ropes in running reeving systems shall be calculated according to CENASEN 13001 3 2 Note Friction forces in the reeving system need not be included for the lowering operation where it will function as an additional friction brake For recovery operation the friction forces shall be included where appropriate The design strain S4 for ropes is the rope force Fs resulting from the load actions The limit design resistance for ropes is the limit de
8. Bridge and Gantry Crane according to EN 15011 This Bridge crane is a part of the racking system and should be designed as specified in D 1 D 7 Horizontal to vertical HTV pipe handling machines Group D 4 NORSOK standard Page 135 of 182199 D 7 1 Dynamic factor For HTV machines the dynamic factor shall reflect the actual working condition of the handling machine and shall not be less than 1 3 independent of type of installation fixed or floating The dynamic factor to be used for each individual machine depends on the stiffness of the load handling system A machine with a flexible jib or a wire suspended load may be calculated using the minimum value of 1 3 When pipes are laid down onto the tubular feeding machine a dynamic factor of minimum 1 8 shall be used This applies for the TFM when at standstill in a loading operation D 7 2 Appliance group By way of guidance based on a study of typical HTV operations onboard a drilling rig Table D 11 Appliance groupesgroups Equipment description Particulars concerning nature of use Appliance group These machines are in operation to transport pipes from Horizontal to vertical HTV pipe handling the main crane landing area to pipe deck and further A4 machines from pipe deck to drill floor Q1 U5 Assumptions 20 years of operation drilling 5 wells per year water depth 1 500 m total depth 5 400 m Additional requirements for lifting accessories see Annex C
9. D 8 X mas tree BOP handling systems Group D 5 D 8 1 General Gantry type cranes in this group shall be designed according to G 4 D 8 2 Appliance group Estimated appliance groups Table D 12 Appliance groupesgroups Equipment description Particulars concerning nature of use Appliance group X mas tree BOP handling systems These machines are in operation when handling the A2 A3 BOP cranes BOP i e very seldom x mas tree BOP transporter The load is however often high relative to SWL D 8 3 Additional requirements Lifting equipment used for lifting BOPs or x mas trees shall have a rated capacity indicator in accordance with EN 12077 2 If the load is lifted by more than one independent lifting appliance the rated capacity indicator shall give information for each individual lifting appliance Guiding system to control possible horizontal movements shall be installed on floating installations NOTE This type of crane is defined as a complex lifting appliance D 9 Miscellaneous lifting equipment in the drilling area Group D 6 D 9 1 Manrider winch See Annex G 2 3 Group G7 D 9 2 Man riding harness NORSOK standard Page 136 of 182199 See Annex C 11 4 Group R11 D 9 3 Access basket See Drilling plant Ch 2 sec 5 Man riding equipment and relevant requirements in EN 280 D 9 4 Casing stabbing board See Drilling plant Ch 2 sec 5 Man riding equipment and relevant requirements in EN 280
10. EN 13889 and US Federal Spec RR C 271 Figure J 5 Lifting lug Type 1 geometry Single plate Shackle WLL tonnes Table J 1 Type 1 Single plate Type 2 Load angle 90 lt a lt 90 Cheek plate tbt a Weld throat thickness Figure J 6 Lifting lug Type 2 geometry Cheek plates each side Dimensions in mm dh 1 03 d 2 Minimum hole diameter 1 0 dh lt Rb lt 1 5 dh R Rp te 0 4 ws lt tp lt 0 6 ws 0 75 Ws lt tp 2 t lt 0 9 ws 3 2 2 dn lt hS 2 4 dh 2 4 h s LS 2 7 h d shackle bolt diameter Ws inside width of shackle at bolt section a load angle relative to vertical Maximum hole diameter shall not exceed dp 5 NORSOK standard Page 200 of 182199 Shackle WLL tonnes Metele Be oe ojo Table J 2 Type 2 Cheek plates each side Type 3 Load angle 90 lt a lt 90 Figure J 7 Lifting lug Type 3 geometry Boss welded partly to plate Shackle WLL tonnes Dimensions in mm dh 1 03 d 2 Minimum hole diameter 1 3 dh lt Rb lt 1 5 dh 0 4 Ws lt tp lt 0 6 Ws 0 75 ws lt tb lt 0 9 ws 3 2 2 dh lt h lt 2 4 dh 2 4 h SL lt 27 h tp boss thickness d shackle bolt diameter ws inside width of shackle at bolt section a load angle relative to vertical Max
11. 10 10 If special requirements Displace Check of set in this NORSOK R ment displacement 10 a SLS 1 0 o 1 0 10 002 else set by the manufacturer Fatigue calculations shall be carried out based on expected frequency of crane usage the Fatigue Check of the magnitude of actions check fatigue 1 0 1 0 FLS 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 dynamic effects from capacity wind loading and discharging of ships and if applicable from motions of the installation Proportion Check of the of strength structural Failure mode analysis Failure failure mode 1 0 1 25 ALS 1 0 1 0 1 25 due to gross overload mode Collapse analysis load Consequence factor to be muttisiedto all partiataction satety4oadtfactersselected in accordance with Table H 2 If intended for personnel lifting the consequence factor shall be multiplied by the risk coefficient of 1 5 as described in this NORSOK standard NORSOK standard Page 184 of 182199 For offshore crane foundations the consequence factor may be reduced to the level necessary to satisfy the failure mode analysis required by EN 13852 1 NORSOK standard Page 185 of 182199 H 8 2 Painting and marking Foundations shall be painted yellow RAL 1003 and permanently marked with a unique identification H 8 3 Documentation and testing The following documentation shall be available e drawings SS Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e calculations pe ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved A cm e manufact
12. DNV OS H101 Marine Operations General EN 81 1 Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts Part 1 Electric lifts EN 81 2 Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts Part 2 Hydraulic lifts EN 81 3 Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts Part 3 Electric and hydraulic service lifts EN 280 Mobile elevating work platforms Design calculations Stability criteria Construction Safety Examinations and tests NORSOK standard Page 5 of 182199 Formatert Skrift 10 pkt Formatert nnrykk Venstre 0 cm Hengende 0 25 cm EN 349 Safety of machinery Minimum gaps to avoid crushing of parts of the human body EN 614 1 Safety of machinery Ergonomic design principles Part 1 Terminology and general principles EN 614 2 Safety of machinery Ergonomic design principles Part 2 Interactions between the design of machinery and work tasks EN 818 1 Short link chain for lifting purposes Safety Part 1 General conditions of acceptance EN 818 2 Short link chain for lifting purposes Safety Part 2 Medium tolerance chain for chain slings Grade 8 EN 818 4 Short link chain for lifting purposes Safety Part 4 Chain slings Grade 8 EN 818 6 Short link chain for lifting purposes Safety Part 6 Chain slings Specification for information for use and maintenance to be provided by the manufacturer E
13. EU European Union FAT factory acceptance test FMECA failure mode effects and criticality analysis FPSO floating production storage and offshore loading HVAC heat ventilation and air conditioning IMO International Maritime Organization LS life saving NLS non life saving NMD Norwegian Maritime Directorate PSA Petroleum Safety Authority Norway RCM reliability centered maintenance SLS serviceability limit state SWL safe working load UHF ultra high frequency ULS ultimate limit state VHF very high frequency WLL working load limit 4 General safety requirements 4 1 Safety Lifting equipment shall be designed fabricated tested installed and maintained in such a way to reduce and minimise risks to humans the environment and material assets All forms of energy including lifting and moving objects represented or produced by lifting equipment shall be controlled at any time in a safe manner The lifting equipment shall be designed such that no common cause failure or a single technical failure results in an unacceptable risk 4 2 Fitness for use To minimise the risk of human error during all phases of use simplicity comprehensibility maintainability and recognisability shall be emphasised when designing the lifting equipment The selection of type and specification of requirements for lifting equipment shall be based on the specific conditions at the workplace the work itself and any risk that may arise during the work
14. For the purpose of proof calculations the mass of hoist load shall be taken as the weight of the fully equipped rescue boat with its full complement of persons crew and passengers The following load combinations shall be applied to rescue boats Load combination A Pick up from sea in the NLS condition e Dynamic factor Q 2 5 e Partial safety factor yp 1 34 e Risk coefficient Yn 1 5 Load combination C Pick up from sea in the LS condition e Dynamic factor 3 0 e Partial safety factor yp 1 1 e Risk coefficient Yn 1 5 The load combinations shall take into account fateraldeviation angles of loads as specified in A 1 4 4 A 7 6 3__Load testing Individual components of means of connection shall be subjected to a proof load test in accordance with A 1 8 3 3 The assembled rescue boat shall be subjected to prototype testing and production tests in accordance with the requirements of the LSA Code A 7 7 Instructions for use of offshore cranes The crane shall be equipped with a detailed instruction for rescue boat operations The instruction shall be summarised in a procedure for training and emergency operations The procedure shall be included in the emergency preparedness plan for the installation The procedure for rescue boat operations shall include but not be limited to e authority and responsibility for involved personnel e planning and precautions e announcement routines
15. Offshore cranes shall be capable of offboard lifting with relevant loads i in aecordancaccordance with crane study according to Annex B clause B 6 ats A Formatert Engelsk Storbritannia Formatert Engelsk Storbritannia Seco a ee apply Formatert Engelsk Storbritannia e__ The crane shall be able to lift a load of 15 tonnes from a supply vessel at a horizontal distance of 32 m Formatert Engelsk Storbritannia eS from the outside of the installation measured at sea level at a significant wave height Hs 0 m e __The crane shall be able to lift a load of 5 tonnes from a supply vessel at a horizontal distance of 25 m from the outside of the installation measured at sea level at significant wave height Hs 6 m The number location and size of offshore cranes at an installation shall be compatible with B 5 B 6 and B 7 The number of offshore cranes on each installation shall reflect any need of redundancy or overlap for crane coverage at normal operation and emergency operation of the installation if the cranes are part of the emergency preparedness plan The location of offshore cranes at the installation shall be selected to ensure optimal working conditions for the crane the crane operator and avoid blind zones The location shall be close to the outer edge of the deck area and such that the sight from the control station is unobstructed towards lay down areas and
16. The above mentioned parameters shall be listed in the manufacturer s certificate for the elastic pennant ref A 7 4 7 NORSOK standard Page 191 of 182199 Dynamic factor and dynamic safety factor SFdyn LCA 0 LCC SFstat 11 01 EP SFdyn LCA SFdyn LCC T 8 9 10 10 7111 12 13 14 15 16 Sling length L m gt A Figure 1 2 Dynamic factor and dynamic safety factor SFayn plotted against sling length 1 3 4 Other host installations t installations will give the following results for pennant length calculations are not shown NORSOK standard Page 192 of 182199 1 4 WLL variations for a specified elastic pennant An elastic pennant selected for a specific service may also be used for other services e g using an offshore crane located on another host installation with a different maximum steady state hoisting velocity By applying the acceptance criteria and rearranging the formulas in A 7 4 3 the maximum and minimum WLL for a specified elastic pennant can be calculated The curves in figure 3 show the variations in WLL for the elastic pennant selected in the previous example specified by the parameters listed in 1 3 3 i 2 4 E z 8 Figure 1 3 WLL variation Codes used e BF Bottom fixed installation e SEMI Semisubmersible installation e HULL M
17. Velocity factor Ky Single fall reeving Multiple fall reeving 0 40 0 28 No hook load 0 78 0 50 At rated capacity Table G 4 Velocity factor K and K Any hook load It shall be possible to operate vertical radial and lateral crane movements simultaneously When operating simultaneous movements any change in speed shall not result in sudden changes in other movements For the purpose of calculating the minimum required lateral and radial hook speeds the maximum G 11 17 Anti collision protection NORSOK standard Page 167 of 182199 Formatert Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk og latinsk tekst Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk tekst og tall Formatert Skrift 11 pkt Formatert Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp 1 5 cm Left Formatert Skrift 11 pkt Formatert nummerering Ingen punktmerking eller Formatert Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp 1 5 cm Left Where there is a risk of collision between movable parts of offshore cranes and stationary equipment or fixed structures system for detection adjustable motion limiters proximity warning and automatic ramp down and stop of relevant motions shall be installed Where there is a risk of collision between movable parts of offshore cranes and other cranes system for detection adjustable motion limiters proximity warning and automatic ramp d
18. e objects that can netcannot be lifted with the aid of a load carrier 0 75 cm e often unsymmetrical lifting sets due to defined location of the centrecenter of gravity COG or unsymmetrical configuration of lifted object e if a transport cradle is required the cradle is often designed with defined supports for the machine or equipment to be transported and sometimes bolted or locked to the equipment e in some special cases the lifting lugs may partly be located on the lifting cradle and partly on the equipment to be transported As an alternative to the requirements given in the subsequent clauses design and manufacturing according to DNV 2 7 3 may also be acceptable for types B C D and E defined in DNV 2 7 3 Only units designed for operational class R60 is acceptable for use on the Norwegian continental shelf even if their use is intended to less severe sea states Lifting sets intended for lifting objects onshore or isbeardonboard on an offshore installation shall comply with Annex C For the purpose of considering the use of such lifting sets for complex rigging the calculation method described in the subsequent sections should be used A lifting arrangement drawing in accordance with F 7 2 4 1 shall be prepared for complex rigging arrangements The marking requirements in F 7 4 do not apply for such lifting sets NOTE Complex rigging arrangement is understood as those having some of the characteristics listed above
19. installation test or both Prior to production testing or installation testing as applicable the equipment shall be inspected to document that it is identical to the equipment subjected to prototype tests During installation tests the lifeboat shall be tested in combination with its dedicated launching appliance All tests shall be documented with detailed test procedures with acceptance criteria and test reports confirming the results of the tests After production and installation tests involving testing with overload the equipment shall be examined by use of suitable NDE methods A 1 14 2 Tests for Group A 1 Free fall lifeboats and their launching and recovery appliances NORSOK standard Page 61 of 182199 Free fall lifeboats and their launching and recovery appliances shall be tested in accordance with Table A 13 NORSOK standard Page 62 of 182199 Formatert Venstre 2 5 cm H yre 2 5 cm Topp 2 5 cm Bunn 2 5 cm Bredde 21 59 cm Hayde 27 94 cm Topptekstavstand fra kant 1 25 cm Bunntekstavstand fra kant 1 25 cm NORSOK standard Page 63 of 182199 Page intentionally left blank NORSOK standard Page 64 of 182199 Table A 13 Tests for group A 1 Object System Test Phase Launchi
20. orbritannia NORSOK standard Page 2 of 182199 Foreword The NORSOK standards are developed by the Norwegian petroleum industry to ensure adequate safety value adding and cost effectiveness for petroleum industry developments and operations Furthermore NORSOK standards are as far as possible intended to replace oil company specifications and serve as references in the authorities regulations The NORSOK standards are normally based on recognised international standards adding the provisions deemed necessary to fill the broad needs of the Norwegian petroleum industry Where relevant NORSOK standards will be used to provide the Norwegian industry input to the international standardisation process Subject to development and publication of international standards the relevant NORSOK standard will be withdrawn The NORSOK standards are developed according to the consensus principle generally applicable for most standards work and according to established procedures defined in NORSOK A 001 The NORSOK standards are prepared and published with support byof The Norwegian Oil Iadustryand Gas Association OLF The Federation of Norwegian Industryindusiries Norwegian Shipowners Association and The Petroleum Safety Authority Norway Annexes A B C D E F G and H are normative Annexes J and K are informative NORSOK standards are administered and published by Standards Norway Introduction environment and
21. 0 25 cm Innrykk ved A cm The following requirements from NMD Regulation 4 July 2007 No 853 apply for means of connection and release systems that form integral part of the rescue boat e section 9 2 paragraph including subclauses c and d aia Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved The dynamic coefficient gt shall not exceed 3 in any load combination for launching and recovery 0 75 cm appliances of group A 6 A 7 2 Functional and safety requirements for the launching and recovery appliances A 7 2 1 General The requirements listed in A 7 2 2 to A 7 2 8 describe an acceptable design Alternative designs are acceptable if the risk assessment see 4 11 proves that the alternative design results in an equal or better safety fitness for use reliability and availability than the requirements in this annex A 7 2 2 Motion limiters Motion limiters for the upper and lower position of the lifeboat shall be provided in accordance with A 1 9 The motion limiter for the upper position shall stop the movement at the level for boarding the lifeboat Prior to reaching the upper stop position the hoisting speed shall be automatically reduced by at least 50 A 7 2 3 Control station A control station shall be located on the host installation The following control devices shall be arranged at the control station a start device to enable power supply to the launching and recovery a
22. 4 3 Reliability and availability Lifting equipment shall be designed and constructed using well proven components and safety principles to ensure reliability by withstanding e the operating stresses and loadings Formatert Nummerert Niv 1 e the environmental influences Nummereringsstil Punkt Start pa 1 e other relevant influences i A E aaa Lifting equipment shall be designed to ensure high availability and a minimum of down time during the design life In case of conflict between reliability availability and or safety safety shall always prevail NORSOK standard Page 15 of 182199 4 4 Principle of safety integration The designer shall aim to eliminate any risk throughout the design lifetime of the lifting equipment including the phases of transport assembly disabling scrapping and dismantling In selecting the most appropriate methods the manufacturer shall apply the following principles of safety integration in the order given 1 Eliminate and reduce risks as far as possible by implementation of inherently safe design measures 2 Safeguarding and complementary protection measures in relation to risks that cannot be eliminated 3 Inform the users of the residual risks due to any shortcomings of the protection measures adopted etc The basic terminology methodology and technical principles are given in ISO 12100 A documented risk assessment shall be worked out for all lifting appliances The do
23. 5 1 1 and 5 9 Bulk hose transfer stations on offshore installations shall be designed with hoses on power driven hose reels or similar solution The hose end should have an automatic connection system for connection to the supply vessel B 2 General requirements Projects for development of new installations shall establish the following documents e general material handling philosophy in accordance with B 5 Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e offshore crane study in accordance with B 6 eae ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved gt cm e material handling plan in accordance with B 7 NORSOK standard Page 92 of 482199 NOTE Offshore crane study is not relevant for onshore petroleum installations Formatert Skrift 8 pkt j n Formatert Skrift 8 pkt The above mentioned documents shall be used as basis for general design of the installation with respect to optimised material handling detailed engineering of material handling purchase specificaitersspecifications of equipment planning of material handling during operation maintenance and decommissioning of the installation The project shall ensure that necessary documentation from suppliers is incorporated into the documents Modification projects shall update existing philosophies studies and plans if relevant If the installation consists of more than one deck elevation and is permanently manned it shall be equipped with a sufficient numb
24. F 7 2 Design F 7 2 1 General design requirements Objects to be lifted between installation and vessel should be designed with fixed lifting points If two 2 legged slings are selected to function as a four legged sling the lift shall be calculated as for a four legged sling The lifting arrangement shall be designed in accordance with the following design principles e for offshore lifts the top link shall be easily accessible by the slinger without climbing on the load The top link shall be located at a maximum height of 1 3 m above deck e all offshore lifts with weight above 25 tonnes should have two separate top links For loads with weight of more than 25 tonnes the top links shall be laid down together along the deck at least 1 5 m from the e gad2 or 3 lifting points if possible More than 4 should be avoided e working angle from vertical should be between 15 degrees and 45 degrees If the sling angle is less than 15 degrees special considerations shall be given to the sling length tolerances and tolerances of the CoG location Otherwise all loads shall be considered to be taken by one sling e hook to be positioned vertically above COG to give a steady lift e equal length slings to be used as far as possible NORSOK standard Page 145 of 182199 e large differences in sling lengths shall be avoided e wire rope for lifting slings shall have a minimum diameter of 13 mm e lifting chains shall have a minimum diameter of
25. General requirements Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 32 Requirements for hoisting machines Dependability management Part 3 11 Application guide Reliability centred maintenance Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP Code Analysis techniques for system reliability Procedure for failure mode and effects analysis FMEA Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 6 2 Generic standards Immunity for industrial environments Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 6 4 Generic standards Emission standard for industrial environments Mobile and fixed offshore units Electrical installations all parts International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code Symbols related to Life Saving Appliances and Arrangements Amendments to Resolution A 760 18 Fibre ropes Determination of certain physical and mechanical properties Mechanical vibration and shock Evaluation of human exposure to whole body vibration Part 1 General requirements Graphical symbols Safety colours and safety signs Part 1 Design principles for safety signs and safety markings Graphical symbols Safety colours and safety signs Part 2 Design principles for product safety labels Graphical symbols Safety colours and safety signs Part 3 Design principles for graphical symbols for use in safety signs Ergonomic principles in the design of work systems Graphical symbols Safety co
26. Safety Non fixed load lifting attachments C 12 4 3 Complementary requirements for vacuum lifters Vacuum attachments shall be dimensioned to hold at least a load corresponding to 3 times the working load limit for each attachment at the end of the working range and the beginning of the danger range respectively at all intended angles of tilt Non self priming vacuum lifters shall have an indicator that confirms sufficient vacuum for safe lifting Safety related parts of control systems for operation of vacuum attachments e g indicators warning devices or devices for two action control shall fulfil a required performance level C in accordance with ISO 13849 1 For the purpose of complying with this NORSOK standard any exceptions for no go areas given in EN 13155 are not allowed C 12 5 Mechanical gripper for pipe handling C 12 5 1 Introduction Mechanical grippers are normally part of lifting beams or a lifting appliance Reference is made to C 12 1 for requirements for the lifting beam The following subclauses describe the requirements for mechanical grippers used in lifting beams or as permanent load holding devices on lifting appliances C 12 5 2 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply DNV OS E101 Drilling Plant C 12 5 3 Complementary requirements for mechanical grippers for pipe handling C 12 5 3 1 Design Safety related parts of control systems for operation of mechanical grip
27. lt Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e For outdoor located equioment naturally ventilated areas and wash down areas Grade IP56 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved according to IEC 60529 0 75 cm other areas IP 44 according to IEC 60529 5 12 Non electrotechnical equipment Non electrotechnical equipment of lifting equipment shall be in accordance with EN 13135 2 5 13 Conirols control stations and control systems Controls and control stations including any cableless controls if relevant shall be in accordance with EN 13557 Control systems shall as a general rule be designed so that a fault in the control systems does not lead to a hazardous situation Safety principles in IEC 60204 32 shall be applied Safety related parts of control systems for complex lifting appliances shall be in accordance with ISO 13849 1 Unless otherwise stated in this NORSOK standard or references made in the annexes the required performance levels PLr for safety related parts of control systems shall be in accordance with Table 1 For definition of symbols see ISO 13849 1 Table 1 Safety functions required performance levels Safety functions hazard of malfunction Possibility Frequency time of of exposure avoiding the hazard Limiters and indicators s2 m P1 c If the lifting appliance has safety related parts in control systems and safety functions not detailed in this NORSOK standard the manufacturer shal
28. the lowest operational level For emergency braking the elevation of the means of connection should be taken to be not lower than 3 m below the upper position NOTE 2 Equation A 9 is based on single fall For multiple falls the number of falls must be taken into account Ew isthe modulus of elasticity as specified by the rope manufacturer for steel wire ropes in N mm Area of rope mm 2 mT D i 4 where A Cs A 10 Dw isthe nominal rope diameter in mm Cr isthe fill factor of the actual nominal rope construction NORSOK standard Page 54 of 182199 A 1 6 Hoisting and lowering velocities shall be in accordance with Table A 12 Hoisting and lowering velocities Table A 12 Hoisting and lowering velocities for launching and recovery appliances Lowering Hoisting NLS condition Sec means of launching VHmin Means of retrieval VHmin VHmin As for LS condition As for LS conditon LS condition Sec means of launching Means of retrieval 1 0 m s 10 Vitmin For group A 1 and A 2 Vimin 0 2 m s for the transport phase between stowed position and sea level up or down For the phase where the ife savinglifesaving appliance is lifted out of sea or landed at sea Vumin Shall be calculated in accordance with formula A 11 For group A 6 Vimin Shall be calculated in accordance with formula A 11 both for the transport phase and for lift off landing at sea
29. 2 Cranes General design Part 3 2 Limit states and proof of competence of wire ropes in reeving systems prEN 13001 3 3 Cranes General design Part 3 3 Limit states and proof of competence of wheel railcontacts ee es seses i i i Formatert Skriftfarge Svart EN 13135 1 Cranes Equipment Part 1 Electrotechnical equipment EN 13135 2 Cranes Equipment Part 2 Non electrotechnical equipment EN 13155 Cranes Safety Non fixed load lifting attachments EN 13157 Cranes Safety Hand powered cranes EN 13411 1 Terminations for steel wire ropes Safety Part 1 Thimbles for steel wire rope slings EN 13411 3 Terminations for steel wire ropes Safety Part 3 Ferrules and ferrule securing EN 13411 4 Terminations for steel wire ropes Safety Part 4 Metal and resin socketing EN 13411 6 Terminations for steel wire ropes Safety Part 6 AsymemitricAsymmetric wedge socket EN 13411 7 Terminations for steel wire ropes Safety Part 7 Symmetric wedge socket EN 13414 1 Steel wire rope slings Safety Part 1 Slings for general lifting service EN 13414 2 Steel wire rope slings Safety Part 2 Specification for information for use and maintenance to be provided by the manufacturer EN 13414 3 Steel wire rope slings Safety Part 3 Grommets and cable laid slings EN 13463 Non electrical equipment for use in potentially explosive atmospheres EN 13478
30. 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Manually operated actuators shall have a manual operating device e g hydraulic hand pump or manual jacking system for each actuator and an enabling device e g hydraulic by pass valve or mechanical coupling device placed out of reach for the operator of the manual operating device The enabling device shall need a continuous manual force to be kept in the enable position The number of required strokes for the manual operating device shall be in the range of 5 to 25 The maximum manual force required to operate the enabling device or the manual operating device shall not exceed 250 N Each powered actuator shall have its own source of stored energy and its own control system incorporating two manually operated control devices named launch which are required to be activated simultaneously to start moving the release mechanism The control devices shall be protected against inadvertent operation and shall be placed such that one operator can Aetcannot activate both control devices simultaneously The control devices shall return to neutral position when released The energy sources shall have a capacity of twice the amount of energy needed to open the release mechanism It shall be possible to visually control the amount of stored energy Each actuator shall be designed to produce a force exceeding two times the force required to open the release mechanism with the fully loaded lifeboat A 2 4
31. 3 3 Centre of gravity COG envelope factor Wcoa For weighed objects or objects with a simple weight pattern Wcog 1 0 For unweighed objects or objects with a complex weight pattern Woe 1 1 Examples of structures with simple weight pattern are single elements pipes or equipment simple trusses or deck sections or packages where weight and centre of gravity COG can be accurately calculated F 7 2 3 4 Skew load factor SKL Skew loads are additional loads from redistribution due to equipment and fabrication tolerances and other uncertainties with respect to force distribution in the rigging arrangement The following SKL values should be used when the rigging fulfils the following criteriascriteria e sling lengths within fabrication tolerances e approximately symmetrical sling configuration with a working angle not more than 45 degrees from the vertical Tabell F 34 Skew load factor usual rigging design and slings within tolerances LIFTING CONFIGURATION Single hook 4 point lift without spreader bar statically indeterminate Single hook 4 point lift with 1 or 2 floating spreader bars Tandem lift and 4 point lifts statically determinate 3 point lift or less statically determinate If the rigging has a less optimal design or geometry an increased SKL shall be considered Reference is made to DNV s Rules for planning and execution of marine operations Pt 2 Ch 5 Section 2 3 NOTE With a rigi
32. 5 3 00 23 3 3 10 105 11 115 12 125 B 135 14 145 15 155 16 Pennant length between splices m Figure 1 4 WLL variation for a specific rope to be used on a bottom fixed unit NORSOK standard Page 195 of 482199 WLLyin Semi Submersible Unit s 8 V 1 6 m s V 18 m s V 2 0 m s V 2 2 m s V 2 4 m s WLLmax 3 5 3 00 N 8 105 1 115 12 125 B 135 14 145 15 155 16 Pennant length between splices m WLL yy Hull Shaped Unit FPSO a 8 3 00 7 E 4 N 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Pennant length between splices m Figure 1 6 WLL variation for a specific rope to be used on a monohull shaped unit FPSO eae Formatert Engelsk Storbritannia NORSOK standard Page 196 of 482199 Annex J Informative Lifting lugs and mating shackles J 1 General Design of lifting lugs and mating sha
33. 8 mm NOTE Normal fabrication tolerances in sling lengths and shift in COG may lead to all load transferred in one sling leg if sling angle from vertical is less than 15 degrees Slings should be protected from edges friction and abrasion whether from the load or the lifting appliance As a general rule the lifting lugs attachment points should be located higher than the COG of the load to be sure the lift do not tip over If the requirements in F 1 could not be fully met risk reducing measures to protect the lifting set from damage should be described in instructions for lifting Instructions should be provided to ensure that portable units with protruding parts are placed with some open space gt 1 5 m around the load on the supply vessel to minimize risk for entanglement to other load or openings in cargo rail In cases where the lifting set may be damaged by catching its lifted object the lifting set should be designed or equipped to enable securing the lifting set Such securing may be temporary such as e g plastic strips The instructions shall describe proper securing F 7 2 2 Lifting set terminology lt _______ TOP LINK MASTER LINK ASSEMBLY FORERUNNER PENDANT MASTER LINK lt 4 INTERMEDIATE LINKS SLING LEGS NORSOK standard Page 146 of 182199 Figure F 3 Terminology F 7 2 3 Lifting design load factors F 7 2 3 1 Summary of design load factors and resistance factors The factors
34. Clamps 1 Lifting forks 1 R5 Spreader Spreader beam lifting beam lifting frames 1 20r4 and Pad eye flange 2o0r4 special designs Magnet lifter 1 Vacuun lifter 1 Mechanical gripper 1 R6 Load carrier Baskets for use on shore and internally offshore 2 Big pengoara s for multiple lifting and single lifts 1 Note NOTE Offshore load carriers se Annex F Portable units R7 Forerunner Single and double legs 2o0r3 pennant offshore crane NORSOK standard Page 100 of 482199 R8 Elastic See A 7 4 forerunner pennant for MOB Fast rescue craft R9 Lifting Chains 1 components Wire ropes 1 Hooks 1 Links and joining devices 1 Open closed spelter socket N A see C 16 5 Wedge socket 1 Swivels 1 Turnbuckle 1 Pulley blocks and hook blocks single and multiple sheaves manually operated 1 used with powered lifting appliance 2 Deflection pulleys 1 Wire rope grips N A R10 Special Lifting nipple caps adaptors subs pup joints 2 40r5 designed Lifting handling running hanger tools used for lifting 5 lifting z Elevators 5 accessories in drilling Bails Elevator links bails 2 4o0r5 area Handling tunning pangertoocls used for lifting 5 5 R11 Carriers for Suspended work platform for internal use work basket 2 lifting Stretcher intended for lifting of personnel using lifting appliances N A persons i Personnel transfer carrier 3 x Gross Mass Man ri
35. Code ISO 16467 Packaging Transport packaging for dangerous goods Test methods for IBCs The requirements for certification and marking according to ISO 21989 shall also be complied with for IBCs used for transportation of dangerous goods All IBCs for transport of dangerous goods must be certified according to Chapter 6 5 in the IMDG Code C 13 2 2 Marking Marking signs shall be permanently attached to the equipment with adequate means to prevent the sign from loosening C 14 Forerunner pennant for offshore crane Group R7 C 14 1 Introduction Forerunners pennants for offshore cranes are intended both for onboard and offboard lifting C 14 2 General requirements The general requirements given for group R3 also apply for Group R7 C 14 3 Complementary requirements for forerunners pennants C 14 3 1 Design Steel wire ropes used in forerunners pennants shall be of construction 6 36a construction suitable for this application and be compatible with thimbles hooks links and other components that are used in the forerunner pennant Spliced eyes shall not be used for termination of steel wire ropes used in forerunners pennants Ferrule secured eyes shall be fitted with thimbles according to EN 13411 3 Ferrule terminations shall be tapered in the wire end Mechanical joining devices of hinged type shall not be used in steel wire rope sling assemblies Hooks with latch according to EN 1677 2 shall not be used Hooks sh
36. Cranes safety Requirements for health and safety Part 2 Limiting __ Formatert Skriftfarge Automatisk indicating devices eee p ie f EN 12079 1 Offshore containers and associated lifting sets Part 1 Offshore Formatert Skriftfarge Automatisk _ container Design manufacture and marking EN 12079 2 Offshore containers and associated lifting sets Part 2 Lifting sets Design manufacture and marking EN 12198 2 Safety of machinery Assessment and reduction of risks arising from radiation emitted by machinery Part 2 Radiation emission measurement procedure EN 12385 1 Steel wire ropes Safety Part 1 General requirements EN 12385 2 Steel wire ropes Safety Part 2 Definitions designation and classification EN 12385 3 Steel wire ropes Safety Part 3 Information for use and maintenance EN 12385 4 Steel wire ropes Safety Part 4 Stranded ropes for general lifting applications EN 12644 1 Cranes Information for use and testing Part 1 Instructions EN 12644 2 Cranes Information for use and testing Part 2 Marking EN 12999 Cranes Loader cranes EN 13000 Cranes Mobile cranes EN 13001 1 Cranes General design Part 1 General principles and requirements EN 13001 2 Cranes General design Part 2 Load actions EN 13001 3 1 Cranes General design Part 3 1 Limit states and proof of competence of steel structures EN 13001 3
37. D 9 5 Utility winch See Annex G Z Group G7 D 9 6 Guideline winches See Annex G 44 Group G7 D 9 7 Wireline equipment See Annex G4 Group G7 or G20 unless used for lifting solely within casings and risers in well centre D 9 8 Tong lift system See Lifting appliances 2 22 D 9 9 Escape line See Annex A Group E5 D 9 10 Miscellaneous slings See Annex C Group R1 and R3 D 10 Drilling lifting accessories Group D 7 D 10 1 One component miscellaneous lifting tools See Annex C Group R10 D 10 2 Miscellaneous lifting tools See Annex C Group R10 D 10 3 Miscellaneous slings 3Elevator DAMH See Annex C Group R10 D 10 54 Elevator links See Annex C Group R10 NORSOK standard Page 137 of 182199 Annex E Normative Lifts E 1 General This annex applies to lifts on offshore petroleum installations and lifts in the process areas at petroleum installations on shore The requirements of this annex apply in addition to the relevant requirements stated in Clause 1 to Clause 5 and Annex B E 2 Group overview Different types of lifts are grouped as presented in Table E 1 Table E 1 Lift groups Group No Group Sub groups Relevant standard ma Lifts for transportation of persons and p E1 Electric lifts goods EN 81 1 E2 Hydraulic lifts Lifts for transportation of persons and EN 81 2 goods E3 Service lifts Goods lift up to 300 kg EN 81 3 A Safety measures shall E4 Rack a
38. Design and operation of subsea production systems Part 7 Completion workover riser systems Where ISO API references are given the standard with the latest revision shall apply NORSOK standard Page 8 of 182199 ISO 13702 ISO 13849 1 ISO 13850 ISO 13857 ISO TR 14121 2 ISO 16467 ISO 17894 ISO 19901 6 ISO 21898 LSA Code NMD Regulation 4 July 2007 No 853 NORSOK E 001 NORSOK M 501 NORSOK N 004 NOKSOK R 003 NORSOK R 005 NORSOK S 001 NORSOK S 002 NORSOK Z 007 NORSOK Z 008 Petroleum and natural gas industries Control and mitigation of fires and explosions on offshore production installations Requirements and guidelines Safety of machinery Safety related parts of control systems Part 1 General principles for design Safety of machinery Emergency stop Principles for design Safety of machinery Safety distances to prevent hazard zones being reached by upper and lower limbs Safety of machinery Risk assessment Part 2 Practical guidance and examples of methods Packaging Transport packages for dangerous goods Test methods for IBCs Ships and marine technology Computer applications General principles for the development and use of programmable electronic systems in marine applications Petroleum and natural gas industries Specific requirements for offshore structures Part 6 Marine operations Packaging Flexible intermediate bulk con
39. Formatert C 17 3 7 Marking All SDLAs shall be marked with their WLL For SDLAs with one 1 WLL the marking shall indicate the WLL for the most unfavourable direction for which the load is possible to be applied For SDLAs with more than one WLL for different directions the WLL for each direction shall be marked with a clear indication for which direction the different WLLs apply _ Formatert Skrift Ikke Fet Engelsk EREN Storbritannia SDLA solely intended for being lifted by the derrick drilling machine DDM may be marked with load rating Formatert Skrift 10 pkt Engelsk only in accordance with ISO 13535 API Spec 8C USA Formatert Mellomrom F r 0 pkt Etter 0 pkt Tabulatorstopp Ikke p 1 5 cm C 18 Carriers for lifting persons Group R11 C 18 1 Suspended work platform work basket for use onshore and onboard on offshore installations C 18 1 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply e EN 14502 1 Cranes Equipment for lifting persons Suspended basket e Annex F of this standard C 18 1 2 Complementary requirements for suspended work baskets C 18 1 2 1 Design The proof of competence for work baskets shall be performed in accordance with Annex F as described for group F 5 taking into account the following e the weight W specified in Annex F is the maximum gross mass tonnes corresponding to the sum of lt
40. General Lifting lugs shallshould be designed in accordance with Annex J The design shall be based on the loads and loads effects which are described by the manufacturer of the specified lifting equipment that are to be suspended by the lifting lug The design shall be compatible with the shackle dimensions corresponding to the SWL of the lifting equipment H 6 2 Design loads NORSOK standard Page 179 of 182199 Unless otherwise agreed or stated by the manufacturer of the lifting equipment the following design criteria shall be used e dynamic amplification factor DAF shall be taken as 1 5 for SWL up to and including 3 tonnes and 1 3 Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 for SWL above 5 tonnes For SWL between 3 tonnes and 5 tonnes DAF is to be found by linear Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved interpolation 0 75 cm e lifting lugs should not normally be designed with a SWL of less than 1 tonn e the horizontal load in any direction shall be taken as minimum 10 of Pp acting in the center of the suspension point e g the center of the shackle bow H 6 3 Painting and marking Lifting lugs shall be painted yellow RAL 1003 and permanently marked with a unique identification and SWL visible from floor level recommended size of letters are minimum 50 mm H 6 4 Documentation and testing H 6 4 1 Load test requirements Each lifting lug shall be subjected to a proof load test according to Table H 4 When testing
41. Lifeboat in the stowed position suspended in primary means of launching in combination with loads due to external excitation of the foundation NORSOK standard Page 40 of 182199 Table A 4 Load combinations for Group A 1 Launching appliances for free fall lifeboats Lowering by secondary means of launching and hoisting by means of retrieval Categorie Loads Reference Load combinations A Load combinations B Load combinations C Formatert tabell s of loads EN NORSO Partial A1 A3 Partial B1 B3 Partial C3 C6 13001 2 K safety safety safety R 002 factor factors factors S Yp Yp Yp Regular Gravitation Mass of the on acceleration launching NOTE 4 appliance Impacts Mass of the hoist S load NOTE 1 Inertia forces due to acceleration from hoist drives Displacements Occasiona Environmental Wind loads Table A 2 actions Snow and ice 3 NOTE 6 loads Temperature variations Exception Static and dynamic test load al NOTE 1 Mass of the hoist load NOTE 1 during emergency braking Risk coefficient yn NOTE 3 and 5 See EN 13001 2 clause 4 3 3 4 3 4 and Table 7 See EN 13001 2 4 3 5 NOTE 1 Mass of the hoist load shall be taken as rated capacity from A 2 3 for load combinations A1 A3 B1 and B3 For load combination C3 mass of the hoist load shall be taken as the test load For load combination C6 mass of the hoist load s
42. Q 1 1 1 n launching NOTE accelerati appliance 4 on Mass of the A 1 5 3 1 34 Do 1 1 1 22 DM 1 1 1 1 1 Impacts hoist load NOTE 1 Inertia forces due to 4 2 2 4 1 34 1 22 Os acceleration from hoist 5 drives Displacements 4 2 2 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Occasional Environment Wind loads 4 2 3 1 Table 1 22 1 1 1 16 1 al actions A 2 Wave 1 22 1 1 induced accelerations Snow andice 4 2 3 2 1 22 1 1 loads Temperature 4 2 3 3 1 16 1 1 1 05 1 variations Exceptiona Re entry Mass of the A 1 5 3 1 1 D2 during hoist load lowering NOTE 1 Extreme wind stowed 4 2 4 2 A 1 4 3 1 0 1 position Static and dynamic test 4 2 43 A1 14 1 1 De loads NOTE 1 NOTE 2 Mass of the hoist load A 1 5 4 1 1 D2 NOTE 1 during emergency braking Test load for release A 1 5 5 1 1 Q2 mechanism NORSOK standard Page 43 of 182199 Excitation of the foundation 4 248 A1 4 3 1 0 1 NOTE 3 Risk coefficient yn 4 3 2 5 9 1 5 7 1 5 1 0 1 1 0 1 5 1 0 1 0 0 See EN 13001 2 clause 4 3 3 4 3 4 and Table 7 See EN 13001 2 4 3 5 Formatert tabell NOTE 1 Mass of the hoist load is to be ta
43. Safety of machinery Fire prevention and protection EN 13557 Cranes Controls and control stations EN 13586 Cranes Access EN 13852 1 Cranes Offshore cranes Part 1 General purpose offshore cranes EN 13852 2 Cranes Offshore cranes Part 2 Floating cranes EN 13889 Forged steel shackles for general lifting purposes Dee shackles and bow shackles Grade 6 Safety EN 14492 1 Cranes Power driven winches and hoists Part 1 Power driven winches EN 14492 2 Cranes Power driven winches and hoists Part 2 Power driven hoists To be published NORSOK standard Page 7 of 182199 EN 14502 1 EN 15011 EN 22915 1 Cranes Equipment for the lifting of persons Part 1 Suspended basReases bridge and gantry cranes Industrial trucks Verification of stability Part 1 General FEM 1 001 3 edition 1998 IEC 60034 IEC 60079 all parts IEC 60204 1 IEC 60204 32 IEC 60300 3 11 IEC 60529 IEC 60812 IEC 61000 6 2 IEC 61000 6 4 IEC 61892 all parts IMDG Code IMO Resolution A 760 18 IMO Resolution MSC 82 70 ISO 2307 ISO 2631 1 ISO 3864 1 ISO 3864 2 ISO 3864 3 ISO 6385 ISO 7010 ISO 9001 ISO 10423 API Spec 64 ISO TR 11688 1 ISO TR 11688 2 Rules for the design of hoisting appliances Rotating electrical machines Explosive atmospheres all parts Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1
44. The HVAC system shall have capacity for keeping all windows clear for moist and the noise limits inside the cabin shall not be exceeded when running on full capacity e The control philosophy must allow for the cabin ventilation and the AC unit to run separately e Supply air to engine room and cabin shall be taken from unclassified area e Supply and extract duct s to the engine room and the crane cabin shall be equipped with fire damper if considered necessary because fire evaluation has concluded that there is a risk for escalation reduction by means of fire dampers unless the use of shut off dampers are considered sufficient 5 3 4 Fire and gas detection ComplectiftingLifting appliances with control cabins and or engine rooms shall be equipped with fire and gas detection in accordance with NORSOK S 001 as applicable Requirements additional to NORSOK S 001 shall be specified by customer 5 3 5 Fire and gas alarms Lifting appliances with control cabins shall be equipped with fire and gas alarms from the installation which enable the operator to terminate any lifting operations and bring the crane and the load to a safe position before activating a manual shut down Reference is made to ISO 13702 5 3 6 Shut down system Lifting appliances which represent a hazard if operated in an explosive atmosphere shall be equisped withprotected by an automatic shut down system which is activated upon confirmed gas detection non the era
45. a diameter of minimum 10 mm The wire rope shall be of rotation resistance construction b the guidance note in Ch 2 Sec 5 404 1is not acceptable c the guidance note in Ch 2 Sec 5 207 is not acceptable d man riding winches shall have independent backup motion limiters in addition to those required by Ch 2 Sec 5 310 for both lowering and hoisting e ashackle shall be used for connection of wire rope to the man riding harness The shackle shall have means of double locking f an emergency operation system EOS shall be provided in accordance with 5 15 3 and G 4 for immediate operation at power failure or failure in control system A system operated only by hand power e g crank system may be acceptable if the requirements are fulfilled g emergency stop devices shall be provided at the operator positions For remote operated winches an additional emergency stop device shall be located at the winch h the hoisting and lowering speed shall be stepless variable not exceeding 1 m s i manrider winches for operation in areas where there may be relative motions between the surroundings and the person being lifted shall have an automatic overload protection device to protect the person lifted from being exposed to pull forces exceeding 2 25 kN j an overspeed protection device shall be implemented to prevent free fall or excessive lowering speed without exposing persons or equipment to unacceptable accelerations Reference is al
46. avoid any part of the tool to disconnect e g unscrew from the load or the lifting appliance NOTE For screwed connections a verified torque in accordance with the manufacturersmanufacturer s instructions may be regarded as the second barrier Means shall be provided for the operator to verify that these types of SDLAs with non threaded connections are correctly connected to the load and the lifting appliance For SDLAs where the load holding elements interfacing with the profiles of the load are not visible from the outside of the SDLA indicating devices visible from the outside shall be provided Indicating devices shall be visible from all sides of the SDLA The indicating devices shall give a clear and unambiguous indication that the load holding elements are in correct locked position and secured The indicating devices must be designed to prevent indication of locked and secured if the SDLA is not locked and secured All SDLAs shall be provided means for connection of standardised lifting accessories for safe handling the SDLA without load C 17 3 4 Testing SDLAs shall be proof tested in accordance with Table C 1 For SDLAs with WLL specified for different directions e g vertical and horizontal the SDLA shall be proof load tested in each specified direction with a test load corresponding the specified WLL for each direction C 17 3 5 Information for use The working load limit WLL of the SDLA must be clearly shown i
47. connections such as hydraulic flanges gear hydraulic motor connections boom flange bolts etc If bolts and nuts are galvanized galvanizing shall be performed by the bolt nut manufacturer or by a company approved by the bolt nut manufacturer 5 25 Technical construction file 5 25 1 General A technical construction file shall be compiled by the manufacturer of lifting equipment The technical construction file shall address all requirements of this NORSOK standard as applicable When 3 party verification in accordance with 4 14 is agreed the technical construction file shall be submitted to the 3 party to the extent relevant for the agreed verification The technical construction file shall be prepared and presented in such detail that a third party is able to perform a verification of the product according to the requirements of this NORSOK standard 5 25 2 Content The technical file shall contain as a minimum e unique identification details of the lifting equipment Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e design specification including design parameters Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e risk assessments including resulting risk reduction measures and residual risk level Daem e applicable requirements for the lifting appliance e standards and codes used e technical information such as GA drawings detailed drawings with dimensions and cross sections relevant for strength analysis material specification
48. construction phase hence verifying the suitability and the safety of the lifting equipment Facilities including safe access for maintenance inspection and testing of essential elements and functions shall be provided NORSOK standard Page 96 of 182199 B 5 General material handling philosophy Concept phase A general philosophy for material handling in the project module installation shall be developed and approved by the company early in the concept phase It shall be revised as the design changes and finally issued as an as built version The material handling philosophy shall as a minimum describe the following a main material handling equipment e g main cranes goods lift mobile lifting beams forklift truck mobile cranes lorries with cranes etc including sizes and capacities b main material handling routes to and from warehouse to and from workshops to and from pipe deck to and from drill floor to and from kitchen to and from supply vessel to and from quay to and from c dategn criteria for all transport routes roads and parking spaces for mobile cranes e g minimum axle load free width and free height d lifting restriction charts for the installation including philosophy for lifting across process areas e maximum allowable lifting heights coverage and restrictions for the main cranes f lay down and storage areas including function size and location also covering lay down storage areas f
49. containers intended for transport of dangerous goods shall also be certified in accordance with the IMDG code F 4 Offshore service containers Group F2 Offshore service containers shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with DNV standard for certification No 2 7 2 December 1995 Lifting sets shall be in accordance with group F 1 NOTE Certification requirements given in DNV standard for certification No 2 7 2 are not mandatory requirements of this Formatert Skrift 8 pkt NORSOK i ORSOK standard Formatert Skrift 8 pkt The offshore service container shall also comply with applicable requirements of NORSOK Z 015 and local installation specific additional requirements F 5 Offshore portable units Group F3 Offshore portable units and their dedicated lifting sets shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with DNV standard for certification No 2 7 3 May 2011 Only units designed for operational class R60 is acceptable for use on the Norwegian continental shelf even if their use is intended to less severe sea states NOTES Certification requirements given in DNV standard for certification No 2 7 3 are not mandatory requirements of this Formatert Skrift 8 pkt NORSOK l ORSOK standard Formatert Skrift 8 pkt For the purpose of this NORSOK standard only portable offshore units of type A according to DNV Standard for Certification No 2 7 3 isare included in group F 3 Typ
50. determined by the risk assessment or described in the annexes or references given in the annexes of this NORSOK standard 5 4 85 4 7___ Crushing hazard For both operation and regular maintenance activities exposed areas of lifting equipment shall be designed with safety zones and distances to prevent personnel being harmed or injured by moving parts Reference is made to ISO 13857 and EN 349 NORSOK standard Page 23 of 182199 5 4 95 4 8 _ Falling objects Any components fitted externally on lifting equipment and which may be subjected to vibrations or impacts from contact with other objects during operation shall be analysed with respect to the hazard of falling objects If such hazard is unacceptable the components shall be secured with a double physical barrier against detachment NOTE An example of such mechanical component with a double physical barrier is a shackle pin secured in a shackle bow using a threaded nut locked by a split pin Another example is an additional wire strap or a chain that is capable of catching and holding the falling object without damage Formatert Note Bolts used in lifting equipment shall normally be secured Exceptions are bolts which represent no hazard The following methods products are considered to be properly secured e centreleddocumented pretension to 70 of yield used for bolts where the clamping length is at least Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 times the diameter
51. e opening closing the door s engaging disengaging the locking element s and engaging disengaging the securing device The sequence shall not be influenced by the operator The control system for powered elevators shall be integrated with the control system for the drilling hoisting machine Reliable signals shall be provided to the control system for the hoisting machinery when the elevator is in the closed locked and secured condition Hoisting movements shall be prevented until the secured indication signal is given In the case of power loss in locked and secured position the elevator shall remain locked and secured Means shall be provided to unsecure and unlock the elevator manually when unloaded only The safety related parts of the control system shall fulfill ISO 13849 1 performance level d Bs weniaidwontrol cable hoses shall be provided with quick couplings for their connection to the drilling hoisting machine Means shall be provided to prevent incorrect connection The connections and their arrangement shall prevent ingress of moisture and contaminations that may influence the power and signal transmission when they are disconnected For hydraulic elevators means shall be provided to enable pressure relief prior to maintenance operations C 17 3 3 Lifting subs caps nipples and tools handling running and hanger tools used for lifting according to Group D 7 of Table D 8 These types of SDLAs shall be secured with double barriers to
52. endret Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret l Formatert Formatert eltkode endret Formatert Formatert Annex E Normative Lifts Annex F Normative Portable units Annex G Normative Cranes Annex H Normative Foundations and suspensions Annex J Informative Lifting lugs and mating shackles Annex K Informative High risk application 206206 Formatert Enge orbritannia Feltkode endret Formatert Enge S orbritannia Feltkode endret Feltkode endret Formatert Enge orbritannia Formatert Enge orbritannia Feltkode endret Formatert Enge orbritannia Formatert Enge
53. equipped with brakes primary brake in accordance with 5 7 6 A 2 4 2 2 3 Winch brakes backup brakes Winches shall also be equipped with backup brakes in accordance with A 1 10 A 2 4 2 2 4 Control station A control station for the secondary means of launching shall be located outside the lifeboat with the following control devices start device to enable power supply to the launching and recovery appliance Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 stop device to disable power supply to the launching and recovery appliance Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved emergency stop for emergency purposes to stop all motions 0 75 cm movement control device for starting stopping and variable speed control of the lowering motion either stepless variable speed or variable speed in 2 or more defined steps The movement control device must be of the hold to run type i e return to neutral position when released NORSOK standard Page 74 of 182199 The control station for the secondary means of launching shall not influence on the primary means of launching and shall be located so that the operator has a clear view to the life boat in all positions A 2 4 2 3 Motion limiter A motion limiter for the lowering motion shall be installed to prevent ropes from running off the drum or be winded on the drum in the wrong direction when the lifeboat is seaborne The setting point of the motion limiter shall take into account the most unfavourable situ
54. factor shall be increased to minimum 1 6 unless measured or proved otherwise When entering pipe joints into the mouse hole the mobile bottom to receive the vertical pipe is normally not visible A dynamic factor of 2 0 is thus often applied for the calculations A reduced dynamic factor may be used if verified by the design e g installed shock absorbers D 6 2 Appliance group As a guidance based on a study of typical VPH operations onboard a drilling rig Table D 9 Appliance groupegroup Equipment description Particulars concerning nature of use Appliance group These machines are in operation when building stands Racking equipment storing stands in the set back area tripping out and A5 Q1 U6 tripping in stands Assumptions 20 years of operation drilling 5 wells per year water depth 1 500 m total depth 5 400 m Further estimated appliance groups Table D 10 Appliance groupesgroups Equipment description Particulars concerning nature of use Appliance group These machines are in operation when tubulars are A4 Q1 U5 Manipulator arms entering the drill floor area and or the set back area or A5 Q1 U6 Mouse hole These machines are in operation when building stands A2 Q1 U3 i e a reduced number of operating cycles NOTE Standard for Bridge and Gantry Cranes EN 15011 is referred to in Annex G4 The typical name Bridge crane as listed in Table D 4 Subgroup 1 should not be regarded as a
55. given in the following references apply EN 1677 1 Components for slings Safety Part 1 Forged steel components Grade 8 C 11 2 2 Complementary requirements for eye bolts nuts C 11 2 2 1 Design The working load limit WLL for eye bolts and nuts shall apply in the most unfavourable direction The breaking load and proof load stated in the references listed in general requirements shall be tested with the test load acting both in the direction of the bolt nut axis and in the most unfavourable direction transverse to the bolt axis C 11 2 2 2 Information for use and maintenance For eye nuts information regarding the necessary grade of mating bolt material shall be stated Measures for tightening the eye bolt or eye nut shall be stated Measures to prevent unscrewing the eye bolt or eye nut shall be stated C 11 2 2 3 Marking The eye bolt nut shall be marked with WLL for the load acting in the most unfavourable direction C 11 3 Clamps C 11 3 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply EN 13155 Cranes Safety Non fixed load lifting attachments C 11 3 2 Complementary requirements for clamps C 11 3 2 1 Design Clamps intended to be used as suspensions on beams shall be designed in accordance with the additional requirements in Annex H C 11 3 2 2 Materials Materials shall be selected with steel quality and maximum thickness for resistance to brittle fracture for lowest work
56. installation for which the foundations or suspensions are designed shall be taken into account in the design loads and stated in the material handling plan see B 7 b H 5 Runway beams Group H 1 H 5 1 General The design shall be based on the loads and loads effects which are described by the manufacturer of the specific lifting equipment that are to be suspended by the runway beams The design shall be compatible with the design of the trolleys and wheels with regards to wheel rail contact etc Reference is made to EN TS 13001 3 3 Runway beams should preferably be of HEB profile steel beam H 5 2 Design loads Unless otherwise agreed or stated by the manufacturer of the lifting equipment the following design criteria shall be used e the runway beam SWL shall be designed equal to or larger than the selected hoist SWL and preferably Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 according to table in section H 5 8 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved M cm e dynamic amplification factor DAF shall be taken as 1 5 for SWL up to and including 3 tonnes and 1 3 for SWL above 5 tonnes For SWL between 3 tonnes and 5 tonnes DAF is to be found by linear interpolation e runway beams should not be designed with a SWL of less than 0 5 tonn e the horizontal load in any direction shall be taken as minimum 10 of Pp acting in the lowest suspension point Any bending moments due to the low suspension point shall be included H 5 3
57. lifeboat The two operational modes shall have separate functional characteristics as described in A 3 3 and A 3 4 such that the functions of each mode can etcannot influence or affect the other A summary of the functional characteristics of the two operational modes is given in Table A 14 NORSOK standard Page 77 of 182199 Table A 14 Modes and functional characteristics overview Launching appliance functional Mode for installation Mode for emergency characteristics and maintenance evacuation Start Launch Stop No Emergency stop No Power hoisting and power No lowering by variable speed control Gravity lowering by two Yes independent constant speed controls Re entry overload Yes protection Primary brake No Backup brake No Motion limiter up No Motion limiter down No Secondary independent No power and control system 33 fe Ko D ne D Q n 3 n o Q fe 2 0 2 D Cc J Primary release system seaborne During lifeboat Back up release system Yes Yes Protection system Aeedneeds not to be de activated in mode for installation and maintenance Z O 4 m dp A 3 3 Mode for installation and maintenance A 3 3 1 General When the mode selector is in the position for installation and maintenance the requirements in A 3 3 2 to A 3 3 6 applies A 3 3 2 Control station A control station shall be located outsi
58. means of retrieval secondary means of launching and hang off relief arrangement this load combination shall be applied for stowed position in the NLS condition B2 ULS Sudden release of load drop of lifeboat as result of activating the release function of the primary means of launching in the LS condition 3 1 0 to be applied for calculating the peak reaction load effects in the main structure caused by drop of lifeboat B4 ULS Travelling on an uneven surface or track in the LS condition if part of the launching sequence for primary means of launching B5 ULS Travelling on an uneven surface and skewing in the LS condition if part of the launching sequence for primary means of launching C2 ALS Lifeboat in the stowed position suspended in primary means of launching in combination with loads from extreme wind conditions corresponding to wind speed with 10000 year return period C3 ULS For Primary means of launching Static overload testing in NLS conditions with test load of 2 2 times the rated oad for the particular mechanismcapacity see A 2 3 e primary means oHaunching and For hang off relief arrangement Static overload testing in NLS conditions with test load of 2 times the rated capacity see A 2 3 C7 _ULS Dynamic impact in hang off relief arrangement in case of testing the function of release mechanism for primary or secondary means of launching by dropping the lifeboat into the hang off relief arrangement C8 ALS
59. not more than 35 e portable units shall be designed to prevent the lifting set from being entangled to the underside or outer corners of the unit e avoid elements on top of the portable unit that create a risk of entangling The top of all open portable units with permanent internal fittings machinery or other installations where crane hooks or forerunners pendants or lifting set may snag shall be protected with grating plates or canvas cover This may be fixed hinged or removable Top protection shall be capable of being secured e stacking points on top of portable units shall not be located at corners outside the shackle attachment point to avoid entanglement with cargo rails openings surrounding structures other portable units etc see Figure F 1 and Figure F 2 e pad eyes for connection to lifting set should be oriented to ensure that the resulting sling force on each pad eye acts in the plane of the pad eye 2 e the lever arm effect in bolted connections causing tension load in bolts and bending stresses in flanges shall be taken into accounted in the design calculatioscalculations NORSOK standard Page 141 of 182199 Envelope No protruding elements outside envelope Figure F 1 Envelope of unit represented by frame and sling arrangement Figure F 2 Example of unacceptable stacking pins representing a risk for entanglement to vessel structure sling set or other load F 1 1 Testing and docume
60. persons to risk a purpose built system for remote operation of the activation systems may be utilised Test No B2 Function test release system manually operated actuator Function tests No A6 shall be performed using the installed activation system intended to be used in a real evacuation situation Test No B3 Function test release system powered actuator Function tests No A7 shall be performed using the installed activation system intended to be used in a real evacuation situation Test No B4 Means of launch testing by simulation Test No A9 shall be performed Test No B5 Static overload test primary means of launching The test described in test No A10 shall be performed as installation test but may upon agreement be omitted if proof of competence calculations for primary means of launching including interface to host installation are performed by an independent gr party and verified by an Enterprise of Competence Test No B6 Static overload test hang off relief arrangement Test No A11 shall be performed as production test Test No B7 Proof load tests for means of connection Means of connection both those forming part of the lifeboat and those forming part of the launching appliance shall be subjected to a static overload test with a force corresponding to the following values for the applicable mechanisms see A 2 3 e primary means of launching 220 of the rated capacity e secondary
61. precedence in case of conflict between similar but not identical requirements 1 Group specific requirements in annexes 2 General requirements in annexes 3 Common requirements Clause 5 NORSOK standard Page 3 of 482199 Formatert Skrift Arial Formatert Skrift Arial Formatert Skrift Arial Formatert Skrift Arial For lifting equipment not specifically addressed in this standard the requirements described in Clauses 4 5 still apply in addition to the general requirements in the applicable annexes NORSOK standard Page 4 of 182199 1 Scope This NORSOK standard is valid for technical requirements to lifting appliances and lifting accessories on all fixed and floating installations mobile offshore units barges and vessels as well as on land based plants where petroleum activities are performed This standard is also valid for material handling and the following equipment e Launching and recovery appliances for life saving equipment with and without lifting function e Means of connection and release systems that are integrated parts of life saving equipment as well as their anchorage in the life saving equipment e Portable units e Foundations and suspensions for lifting appliances e Lifts This standard may also be used for lifting equipment not specifically described in the annexes NOTE 1 For the safe use of lifting equipment reference is made to NORSOK R 00
62. relevant for lifting design are summarized in Table F 12 Table F 42 Factors relevant for lifting design Load factors Resistance factor DF Yp Yo APPLICATION TO FIND 1 Ye a Formatert Venstre Sling design Shackle selection Master link Forerunner Check of Design structure capacity capacity Lifting lug design Design capacity F 7 2 3 2 Working load limit WLL The working load limit WLL for the complete sling set for group F 5 is defined as follows WLL W Wer F 1 where WLL weight of the lifted object W including weight contingency and excluding the lifting sling set W estimated weight of the lifted object Wcr weight contingency factor as defined in the table below The weight of the lifted object shall be multiplied with a contingency factor according to Table F 23 based on the method used defining the weight NORSOK standard Page 147 of 182199 Table F 23 Determination of weight contingency factor METHOD TO DETERMINE THE COMMENT WEIGHT Weighing Incl weighing by platform crane with calibrated loadcell within 3 accuracy Detailed calculation based on up to NOTE Possibility of significant weight development date drawings during construction and fabrication Detailed calculation based on less Wc to be assessed specifically updated drawings info A factor of 1 5 or more should be considered for demolition lift F 7 2
63. required dynamic safety factor and dynamic factors given in A 7 4 3 Key factors for determining the static stiffness are the pennant length and force elongation curve documented by type testing in accordance with A 7 4 5 for the particular rope construction and rope diameter The pennant length used in the calculations shall be the length between splices For the purpose of this NORSOK standard the static stiffness is based on a simplified linear force elongation curve crossing the real force elongation curve at 0 of MBL and 20 of MBL When force elongation curves are presented by rope manufacturers as dimensionless curves showing force strain normalized to MBL the static stiffness K is determined from the dimensionless static stiffness K read from such curves as follows K K x MBL L A 22 NORSOK standard Page 87 of 182199 where L is the length between splices of the particular pennant measured at reference tension according to IS02307 NOTE Reference is made to the calculation example in Annex for a more detailed description of the static stiffness A 7 4 56 Testing z Test requirements given in EN 1492 4 shall apply with the following additional requirements The manufacturer of elastic pennants shall perform type tests in accordance with EN 1492 4 6 3 on each nominal rope size NOTE This requirement is complementary to the requirement for general purpose slings for which representative type test are l
64. rescue operation A 8 Personnel transfer carriers Group A 7 Personnel transfer carriers shall be designed to be picked up from a supply vessel to a fixed or floating offshore installation in a sea state corresponding to significant wave height Hs of at least 3m The proof of competence for personnel transfer carriers and its dedicated lifting sets shall be performed in accordance with Annex F as described for group F 5 taking into account e The weight W specified in Annex F is the Maximum Gross Mass tonnes corresponding to the sum of o Tara weight tonnes of the basketcarrier and NORSOK standard Page 90 of 182199 o Pay load tonnes of the basketcarrier taken as at least Payload n mp me where n is the number of persons allowed in the carrier and shall not be less than 2 mp 20 100 tonnes is the minimum mass of each person me 20 040 tonnes is the minimum mass of luggage or other equipment for each person o The design factor DF given in clause F 7 2 3 8 of Annex F shall be increased by multiplying with a factor of 1 5 e Unless detailed calculations of the dynamic amplification factor DAF justifies other values when the carrier is lifted from a supply vessel to the intended installation at the intended sea states DAF shall be as specified for offboard lifting in section F 7 2 3 5 of Annex F e Ifthe weight W is less than 2 tonnes the proof of competence shall be made for W 2 tonnes e The cra
65. shall be taken into account in the design loads and shall be stated in the information for use G 3 4 Horizontal loads due to operational motions For cranes mounted on floating units or vessels horizontal loads due to operational motions are inertia forces due to acceleration or deceleration of horizontal motions centrifugal forces forces transverse to rail resulting from reeling and skew motion a b c d buffer loads The horizontal loads shall be taken into account in the design loads G 3 5 Wind loads Cranes located outdoor in exposed areas shall be designed for loads due to wind in accordance with EN 13001 2 The wind velocities shall unless otherwise agreed between the buyer and the manufacturer be taken as follows a 25 m s for in service b 63 m s for out of service NOTE These wind velocities are to be understood as a 3 s gust wind Wind velocities are often given as 10 min mean wind velocity A 3 s gust wind velocity of 25 m s will correspond to about 17 m s 10 min mean wind velocity but may depend on surrounding structures on the platform G 3 6 Fixed load lifting attachments Fixed load lifting attachments such as wire rope terminations shackles swivels hooks and similar components shall be designed and equipped to minimize the risk of unintended entanglement NOTE This requirement can be met by a slim and rounded geometry avoiding sharp edges protruding extended parts or installing
66. shall be permanently marked at both e463 Hooks for slings C 16 3 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm e EN 1677 1 Components for slings Safety Part 1 Forged steel components Grade 8 Fi e EN 1677 3 Components for slings Safety Part 3 Forged steel self locking hooks Grade 8 C 16 4 Links and joining devices C 16 4 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply e EN 1677 1 Components for slings Safety Part 1 Forged steel components Grade 8 ee Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 e EN 1677 4 Components for slings Safety Part 4 Links Grade 8 kani ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved A cm C 16 4 2 Complementary requirements for links and joining devices Mechanical joining devices of the hinged type shall not be used C 16 5 Open close spelter sockets C 16 5 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply e EN 13411 4 Terminations for steel wire ropes Safety Part 4 Metal and resin socketing Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved C 16 5 2 Complementary requirements for open close spelter sockets 0 75 cm C 16 5 2 1 Design The socket shall have a minimum breaking load greater than the minimum breaking load of the steel wire rope C 16 5 2 2 Man
67. shall not be used on lifting equipment Wire rope grips should be designed to prevent incorrect assembly C 16 11 2 2 Instructions for use and maintenance The user manual shall state the reduction of steel wire rope braking load resulting from the use of wire rope grips The user manual shall give assembly instructions with respect to e correct number of grips and distance between grips Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 e required bolting torque and preparation of bolts e g lubrication requirements Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e type size of grips svs different rope constructions agen C 17 Special designed lifting accessories in drilling area SDLA Group R10 NORSOK standard Page 118 of 182199 C 17 1 Introduction Special designed lifting accessories in the drilling area hereafter referred to as SDLA comprises but is not limited to the following equipment _listed in Table D 8 Group D 7 LOLS e elevator links hails Formatert ngen punktmerking eller nummerering NOTE As a reminder reference is made to C 1 regarding application of this NORSOK standard in its entirety Formatert Engelsk Storbritannia Reference is also given to Annex D clause D 1 for interpretation of the term Lifting accessories in the drilling area C 17 2 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply e ISO 13535 API Spec 8C Petrole
68. slings See group R9 Lifting components C 10 2 Complementary requirements for steel wire rope slings C 10 2 1 Design Ferrule terminations shall be tapered in the wire end Mechanical joining devices of hinged type shall not be used in steel wire rope sling assemblies NOTE Mechanical joining devices are often referred to as connecting links Wire rope grips shall not be used as terminations for steel wire rope slings NORSOK standard Page 105 of 182199 Single leg and two leg slings used as forerunners pennants on offshore cranes when lifting to and from supply vessels sealift offshore are not covered by this group R3 Forerunners pennants shall be group R7 The safety factor SF for casing slings shall not be less than 6 0 For casing sling the following wire type should be used 20mm_ 6x36 1FC length 8 m 300 mm soft eyes C 10 2 2 Materials _ All components for upper and lower terminal fittings e g links hooks on steel wire rope slings shalishould be of grade 8 Other grades of similar or better quality may be used if they satisfy requirements of a recognized standard applicable for lifting equipment and with documented Charpy values 42J at 20 C 27J at 20 C in fusion line C 10 2 3 Marking The marking tag and its means of attachment to the sling assembly required by EN 13414 1 clause 7 shall be made of corrosion resistant material The total weight of the tag and its mean
69. the most severe method e g sudden application of both winch brakes by emergency stop immediately after the lowering speed has reached its maximum The maximum dynamic peak force on the test load corresponding to Fra in equation A 2 shall be recorded during the stop The test is considered successful if the recorded peak force is equal to or less than the force Fpra used in equation A 2 to calculate the dynamic coefficient Msc as defined in A 1 5 4 for load combination C6 NORSOK standard Page 69 of 182199 The test shall be repeated with the application of each brake separately i e e stopping by sudden application of primary brake when secondary brake is disabled and Sos Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 e stopping by sudden application of secondary brake when primary brake is disabled Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved These tests are considered successful if both brakes are able to bring the lowering motion to a complete 0 75 cm stop Test No A15 Release test means of connection for secondary means of launching A test shall be performed to verify that the release mechanism can notcannot be opened when loaded with a force greater than 10 of the rated capacity of the means of connection In addition the functionality requirements in A 2 4 2 5 shall be demonstrated Test No A16 Ice test release mechanism primary means of launching The release mechanism for primary means of launching shall be arranged i
70. the required motions all motions can be stopped and held in position by their respective braking systems and there is no damage or permanent deformation after the tests Test No B13 Function testing Secondary means of launching and means for retrieval The following functions shall be tested for secondary means of launching and means of retrieval e Emergency stop ref 5 15 1 e Emergency operation ref A 2 4 2 4 and A 2 4 3 4 e Motion limiters ref A 2 4 2 3 and A 2 4 3 3 e Control station ref A 2 4 2 2 4 and A 2 4 3 2 4 Test No B14 Release test Secondary means of launching Tes No A15 shall also be performed as a production test A 1 15 Fabrication Structures shall be fabricated in accordance with a recognized standard For the purpose of complying with this standard the following fabrication standards are considered recognized e NORSOK M 101 NORSOK standard Page 71 of 182199 e DNV OS C401 Load bearing components covered by Annex C of this standard shall follow the fabrication requirements given in Annex C Other load bearing components shall follow the fabrication requirements given in clause 5 22 of this standard A 2 Appliances for free fall lifeboats Group A 1 A 2 1 General The requirements in this subclause apply in addition to the requirements in A 1 for launching and recovery appliances of Group A 1 Relevant requirements in DNV OS E406 apply in addition to the requirement
71. 1 1 Occasion Environment Wind loads 4 2 3 1 Table 1 22 1 1 1 16 1 al al actions A 2 Wave induced 1 22 1 1 accelerations Snow and ice 4 2 3 2 1 22 1 1 loads Temperature 4 2 3 3 1 16 1 1 1 05 1 variations Exception Re entry Mass of the A 1 5 3 1 1 D2 al during hoist load hoisting NOTE 1 Extreme wind stowed 4 2 4 2 A 1 4 3 1 0 1 position Static and dynamic test loads 4 2 4 3 A1 15 1 1 De NOTE 1 NOTE 2 Mass of the hoist load NOTE A 1 5 4 1 1 P2 1 during emergency braking Excitation of the foundation 4 2 4 8 A 1 4 3 1 0 1 NOTE 3 Risk coefficient yn 4 3 2 5 9 1 5 1 5 1 0 1 1 0 1 5 1 0 0 See NS EN 13001 2 clause 4 3 3 4 3 4 and Table 7 See EN 13001 2 4 3 5 lt Formatert tabell NOTE 1 Mass of the hoist load is to be taken as the rated capacity as defined in A 1 4 2 for load combinations A1 A11 A3 B1 B3 and C1 For load combination C6 mass of NORSOK standard Page 46 of 182199 the hoist load shall be taken as the test load of 1 1 times the rated capacity For load combinations C2 and C8 mass of the hoist load may be taken as mass of the empty rescue boat NOTE 2 For the dynamic load test coefficient s is to be calculated according to equation A 3 with Va 0 5VHmax For the static load test Dg 1 0
72. 1 Sight Lifting appliances which have an enclosed control station shall have permanent means for window cleaning operated from inside the control station In addition access means shall be provided for replacement of windshield wipers and manual cleaning of the windows from the outside 5 21 2 Ventilation Indoor climate of lifting appliances shall be in accordance with NORSOK S 002 5 7 5 21 3 Utility supplies Lifting appliances shall have permanent arrangements for utility supplies e g water fuel service air and electrical connections as applicable Details to be agreed upon Lifting appliances containing fuel oil grease etc which represent a hazard to the environment shall have permanent arrangements for enclosed drainage to tank 5 22 Fabrication Lifting appliancesequipment shall be fabricated in accordance with DNV Standard for certification of lifting appliances No 2 22 Ch 2 Section 2 Materialsrelevant sections regarding materials and fabrication unless stated otherwise in the annexes of this standard This includes e g material selection unless selected in accordance with 5 7 4 material certificates material quality welding forming hot or cold inspection and testing For fabrication of foundations and suspensions see requirements in Annex H 5 23 Installation and assembly Lifting appliances and launching appliances for life saving equipment shall be installed and assembled in accordanc
73. 1 min from standstill of the normal operation system and the crane operator has initiated the EOS With reference to the schematic representation of EOS in Figure G 1 the EOS shall as a minimum comprise emergency manual controls emergency power control elements and an emergency power supply These elements including their means of connections shall be additional to and independent of the main power and control system Duplication of elements in the normal operating system will fulfil the requirement of an EOS if it can be documented and proven that the normal operating system is fully redundant of any single failure in these elements During operation of the EOS limiting and indicating devices as well as protective systems need not be available However emergency stop shall be available during operation of EOS The aim of the EOS shall be to operate the crane at reduced speed in an emergency situation regardless of any single failure of the main functions of the crane except for failures in working parts power transmission elements and machine actuators where it is beyond state of the art to provide an EOS Examples are winches brakes and hydraulic cylinders d Formatert Mellomrom Etter 10 pkt Linjeavstand Flere 1 15 li NORSOK standard Page 161 of 482199 Control system incl Signalling display warning Power Machine Manual controls control devices control actuators Data storage and logic or analogical e
74. 12100 clause 6 4 4 8 Strength proportion For lifting appliances where external influences may cause accidental overloading the strength elements structural and mechanical of the lifting appliance shall be designed such that the consequences of such overloading which causes break down are known and minimised During the risk assessment the possibility for accidental overloading must be evaluated and a strategy to which element should fail first must be established This requirement does not apply for lifting accessories and portable units For cranes and launching appliances for life saving equipment this requirement should be fulfilled by ensuring that the first element to fail is not the foundation or any other element which is essential for the structural integrity of the entire crane or launching appliance 4 9 Maintenance Lifting equipment shall be designed and arranged with means for efficient maintenance which ensure that the safe condition can be maintained for the specified design life Critical areas subject to regular inspection or inspection after overload testing shall be accessible for inspection with the required inspection methods A high level of maintainability shall be ensured i e that the maintenance can easily be performed Facilities including safe access for maintenance inspection and testing of essential elements and functions shall be provided NORSOK standard Page 16 of 182199 The maintenance shal
75. 182199 e WLL for the complete lifting set Note that this particular WLL shall not include DAF Thus it will express the maximum allowed weight of lifted object WLL and MBL for each individual component of the lifting arrangement working angles angle between vertical and sling leg sling and shackle type specification material specification certificate requirements operational limitations sling lengths and fabrication tolerances reference to applicable standards F 7 2 4 2 Structural design Design load in accordance with F 7 2 3 should be chosen for proof of competence of structural components Standard lifting lugs as specified in Annex J should preferably be selected F 7 2 4 3 Steel wire rope slings specification Wire rope slings shall be selected by specifying the following wire rope type construction standard NS EN 12385 4 subsidiary NS EN 13414 1 minimum breaking load MBL excluding end termination factor ye sling length far inside eyes in mm end termination design Recommended construction types e Steel Wire 6X36 CFS 1770 or 1960 N mm 6 strand rope with Fibre Core e Steel Wire 6x36 41 49 CWR IWRC 1770 or 1960 N mm 6 strand rope with Steel Core F 7 2 4 4 Shackles and tings FheShackles shall be in accordance with C 11 1 and the following apply shackles design standard shalt be additional requirements for offboard lifts e e Grade 8 according to U S Fed Spec RR C 271
76. 2 00 DAF onboard onshore 1 50 5 1 00 T TT T T TT T 50 WLL T 60 70 80 90 100 Figure F 4 Dynamic amplification factor DAF F 7 2 3 6 End termination factor ye End termination factor Ferrule secure termination EN 13411 3 Ye 0 9 O ie Spliced terminations EN 13411 2 Ye 0 8 Chain slings EN 818 2 Ye 1 0 Fibre slings spliced termination EN 1492 4 Ye 0 9 Fibre endless Soft slings and webbing slings EN 1492 1 and EN 1492 2 Ye 1 0 NORSOK standard Page 149 of 182199 Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert ngen understreking H Formatert nnrykk Venstre 1 cm Formatert Utheving F 7 2 3 7 Material resistance facorfactor yam Material resistance factor for Lifting accessories Check against minimum breaking load MBL Wire rope slings Yrm 2 0 Chain slings Yam 1 8 Shackle and rings incl master links Yam 1 8 Fibre slings Yam 2 8 Structural members and sections Check against characteristic resistance Lifting lugs and structural parts Yam 1 15 Bolts and welds Yrm 1 3 For structures bolted connections welded connections and lifting lug design the material resistance factor may be selected according to above factors or other recognised standards like EN 13001 3 1 and EN 1993 1 1 Eurocode 3 may be used NOTE Capacity of structural part
77. 2 3 is placed in the most unfavourable position on the basket fer side protection of work baskets shall be designed to withstand internal manual forces according to EN 280 5 2 3 4 Any hinged doors shall be equipped with lubrication points on the hinges C 18 1 2 2 Materials Materials for steel structures shall be selected in accordance with C 6 Materials for aluminium structures shall be selected in accordance with EN 1999 1 1 The work basket shall be protected against corrosion if the materials selected are not corrosion resistant C 18 1 2 3 Fabrication The fabrication requirements in C 6 apply Each work basket shall be tested with a static load corresponding to a total weight of 2x max gross mass suspended from the dedicated lifting set Each lifting set shall be tested separately An inclination test shall be performed with an inclination test load equal to the pay load The centre of gravity of the inclination test load shall be not less than 0 5 m above the floor and not further than 0 3 m from the side protection of the work basket In this loading condition the static inclination of the work basket shall not exceed 7 from the horizontal C 18 1 2 4 Information for use and maintenance NORSOK standard Page 123 of 182199 For baskets intended to be used on offshore installations a statement shall be given in the instructions to inform that the basket is not intended for offboard lifting on offshore installations The instr
78. 2 4 3 2 1 General A powered winch shall be provided for hoisting the lifeboat with a minimum speed as given in A 1 6 A 2 4 3 2 2 Winch brakes primary brakes Winches shall be equipped with brakes primary brake in accordance with 5 7 6 A 2 4 3 2 3 Winch brakes backup brakes Winches shall also be equipped with backup brakes in accordance with A 1 10 A 2 4 3 2 4 Control station The control station described in A 2 4 2 2 4 shall also incorporate a movement control device for starting stopping and variable speed control of the hoisting motion either stepless variable speed or variable speed in 2 or more defined steps The movement control device shall be of the hold to run type A 2 4 3 3 Motion limiters Motion limiters for the hoisting motion and any other recovery motions shall be provided in accordance with A 1 9 Prior to reaching the upper stop position the hoisting speed shall be automatically reduced by at least 50 A 2 4 3 4 Emergency operation In case of a main power failure or a control system failure one of the following emergency solutions shall be available as applicable e If the means of retrieval is intended to be used with persons on board the lifeboat it shall be possible to recover the lifeboat by use of secondary independent power and control system in accordance with A 1 11 e _ f the means of retrieval is intended to be used without persons on board the lifeboat it shall be possible to lower the lifeboat to
79. 2 Secondary means of launching A 2 4 2 1 General The secondary means of launching shall be capable of launching the lifeboat in any possible loading condition i e from empty lifeboat up to the rated capacity for the mechanism as specified in A 2 3 NOTE The requirements for secondary means of launching given in this clause are intended for launching devices utilising a winch and falls Other solutions may also be considered but at the time of publication of this NORSOK standard no other solutions are considered sufficiently qualified Other solutions must be qualified in accordance with 4 15 Some of the requirements given in the subsequent subclauses are given based on the assumption that the secondary means of launching is intended to lower the lifeboat with a crew of three If lowering the lifeboat with persons inside is not part of the intended use the requirements in A 2 4 2 2 1 and A 2 4 2 2 3 do not apply se also A 2 4 2 4 for emergency operation A 2 4 2 2 Launching mechanism A 2 4 2 2 1 Constant speed control In case secondary means of launching is based on gravity lowering by a winch the lowering speed shall be controlled by two independent constant speed control devices The speed control devices shall be able to control the lowering motion within the speed limit given in A 1 6 In case of failure in one of the speed control devices the speed should not exceed 1 5 m s A 2 4 2 2 2 Winch brakes primary brakes Winches shall be
80. 3 and NORSOK R 005 NOTE 2 The application of this standard is regulated by references in guidansequidelines to PSA Regulations or the responsible company s internal requirements ye eee ee eee es ii 2 Normative and informative references The following standards include provisions and guidelines which through reference in this text constitute provisions and guidelines of this NORSOK standard Latest issue of the references shall be used unless otherwise agreed Other recognized standards may be used provided it can be shown that they meet the requirements of the referenced standards NOTE Some clauses in this standard refer to specific clauses in the normative references These references are based upon the editions available at the time of issuing this standard 2 1 Normative references Ewi 3 f CEN TS 13001 3 5 Cranes General design Part 3 5 Limit states and proof of competence of forged hooks Directive 97 68 EC Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 DeemberDecember 1997 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to measures against the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from internal combustion engines to be installed in non road mobile machinery amended by Directives 2001 63 EC 2002 88 EC 2004 26 EC and 2006 105 EC DNV Standard for Certification No 2 22 Lifting Appliances DNV OS E101 Drilling Plant DNV OS E406 Design of free fall lifeboats
81. 4 Short link chain for lifting purposes Safety Part 4 Chain slings Grade 8 EN 818 6 Short link chain for lifting purposes Safety Part 6 Chain slings Specification for information for use and maintenance to be provided by the manufacturer Components for upper and lower terminals of chain slings See group R9 Lifting components C 8 2 Complementary requirements for chain slings C 8 2 1 Design Mechanical joining devices of hinged type shall not be used in chain sling assemblies NOTE Mechanical joining devices are often referred to as connecting links C 8 2 2 Materials All lifting components in chain slings shalishould be of grade 8 i i s sS S S 5 ER T BE Eon S Other grades of similar or better quality may be used if they satisfy requirements of a recognized standard Left applicable for lifting equipment and with documented Charpy values 42J at 20 C 27J at 20 C in fusion Formatert Engelsk USA line ee __ Formatert Engelsk USA C 8 2 3 Marking Formatert Innrykk Venstre 0 63 cm The marking tag and its means of attachment to the sling assembly required by EN 818 4 Clause 7 shall be made of corrosion resistant material The total weight of the tag and its means of attachment to the sling assembly should have a mass of less than 70 g C 9 Fibre slings Group R2 C 9 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following re
82. 5 also fulfiL in DNV OS E101 Chapter 1 and Chapter 2_in addition to Clause 1 to Clause 5 in this standard Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Functional requirements given in NORSOK D 001 also apply Formatert Skrift 8 pkt For lifting appliances used in the drilling area where DNV Lifting appliances Standard for Certification No 2 22 is referred to in DNV Drilling Plant an alternative approach is to use EN 13001 series for the structural parts For definition of lifting appliances and lifting accessories reference is made to 3 1 4619 and 3 1 4718 For the purpose of this annex e the term lifting appliances also include the load bearing parts of the drilling machine where the drilling machine is connected when lifting the drill string tubulars or other loads the term lifting accessories also includes the load bearing equipment used to connect the aril pipes WBuIRIS or oer loads ne the drilling machine or other lifting appliances B Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Formatert Ingen punktmerking eller nummerering Formatert Skrift 10 pkt Engelsk the load in drilling operations E ui ment intended for the lifting of loads outside of the well centre is USA regarded as lifting accessories Equipment used for lifting solely within casings and risers in well ce
83. Deflection Vertical deformation Spay of a runway beam relative to its supports excluding load factors Spay lt L 500 H 5 4 End stoppers Runway beams shall be provided with robust end stoppers on both sides on all open ends where the lifting equipment may become detached from the runway beams Ensure that the width of the end stopper is as wide as the runway beam flange to prevent the trolley from falling off The gap under the end stopper shall not exceed 30 mm to prevent the trolley wheels to pass under The contact area of the end stoppers shall align with the part of the lifting equipment which is designed for such contact NORSOK standard Page 176 of 182199 Runway beams shall be provided with special designed buffers and end stoppers to absorb the kinetic energy from the fully loaded trolley travelling at the corresponding maximum speed H 5 5 Rack and pinion Runway beams on ships and floating units shall be equipped with racks compatible with pinion drives of the lifting equipment see Annex G H 5 6 Fabrication Fabrication tolerances of the flange width and thickness shall be in accordance to the specifications given by the trolley manufacturer Misalignment and welded joints shall be grinded flush and within the specifications given by the trolley manufacturer H 5 7 Painting and marking Runway beams shall be painted yellow RAL 1003 and permanently marked with a unique identification and SWL visible from flo
84. E The term Working Load Limit inSafe working load used for this ub group is equivalent with the term Safe F rste linje 0 cm workingtoad in ISO 43535 Working Load Limit used for other sub groups of this annex Ce ET CI ee oT OE Ee EO et cr NO Ie ARE EC ert EEE E A CL _ Formatert Skrift 8 pkt if it is possible to use the SDLA for picking up tubulars or other loads from a horizontal position the workig load limit WLL for the SDLA shall be specified for the most unfavourable direction Alternatively different WLLs may be specified for horizontal and vertical positions For the purpose of calculating the WLL according to this NORSOK standard the design load according to ISO 13535 API Spec 8C shall be divided by a dynamic coefficient of 1 33 Formatert Skrift Fet Formatert Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp 1 5 cm Left NORSOK standard Page 119 of 482199 C 17 3 2 Elevators C 17 3 2 1 General The working load limit for elevators shall be stated both for lifting the load in vertical and horizontal position The working load limit for lifting the load in horizontal position shall be taken as the maximum weight of a single tubular for which the elevator is intended to handle maximum diameter Elevators shall be designed for lifting the load horizontally with the most unfavorable orientation of the elevator i e with the opening sector facing downwar
85. For launching and recovery appliances utilising gravity lowering the secondary independent power and control system is only required for the hoisting motion and any other motions necessary for recovering the rescue boat to its stowed position A 7 2 6 Brakes Mechanisms for all motions under the influence of gravity shall be provided with brakes in accordance with 5 7 6 primary brake and a backup brake in accordance with A 1 10 A 7 2 7 Rope tensioning system If a rope tensioning system is provided the following requirements apply e When activated the system shall provide a tension force at the means of connection on the rescue boat not higher than 50 of the rated capacity of the launching and recovery appliance when the control device for the hoisting movement is operated to its full hoisting position e The system shall be able to maintain tension in the winch rope at any time in the LS condition i e both when winch is pulling rope in and when winch rope is being pulled out e It shall not be possible to activate the system when the winch is loaded e Activation of the system shall be possiblel only by two deliberate actions by the operator When the first action is performed a visual signal shall be provided to indicate that the system is ready When the second action is performed a different visual signal shall be provided to indicate that the system is active e The system shall automatically be re set to the un activated state when co
86. For manually operated elevators the locking element s shall be engaged by a positive mechanical action between the closing movement of the elevator door s and the movement of the locking element s to the locked position i e engagement of the locking element s shall not depend on springs or gravity It shall not be possible to close the elevator completely if the locking element s is_ are in the locked position prior to closing An attempt to close the elevator when the locking element s is are in the locked position shall NORSOK standard Page 120 of 182199 result in an aperture of at least 20 mm between the adjacent surfaces of the closing parts of the elevator in order to give a clear visual observation that the elevator is not properly closed The securing device on manually operated elevators shall engage automatically to the secured position when the locking element s is are engaged The securing device shall be prevented by mechanical restriction from engaging in the secured position when the locking element s is are not in the locked position Release of the load from the elevator shall require at least two separate manual actions by the operator e g one action for disengaging the securing device and one action for opening the locking element s C 17 3 2 4 Powered remote operated elevators Powered remote operated elevators shall have a pre defined sequence for all movements i
87. Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e nut with split pin through the bolt 0 75 cm e through metal nuts e locking plates Other well proven methods and designs may also be used NOTE The handbook Best Practice Dropped Object Prevention issued by Working Together for Safety SfS Samarbeid for sikkerhet may be used for guidance 5 4 105 4 9 _ Mechanical vibration and shock Lifting equipment shall be evaluated for mechanical vibration and shock to humans in accordance with NORSOK S 002 and ISO 2631 1 4 445 4 10 _ Handling and transport facilities Lifting appliances shall be provided with facilities for handling and transport of major components e g motors gearboxes pumps sheaves etc Detachable parts of lifting appliances weighing more than 25 kg shall be shaped to facilitate strapping or be equipped with attachment points i e lifting lugs etc Reference is made to Annex B 5 4 125 4 11 Hot surfaces The temperature of hot surfaces e g exhaust pipes and channels shall not exceed the ignition temperatures of flammable mediums that can escape upon accidental leaks Shields and guards intended to prevent skin contact shall be fitted if required 5 5 Environmental conditions 5 5 1 Temperatures The minimum and maximum operating temperatures shall be as specified in the annexes to this standard unless otherwise agreed The minimum and maximum operating temperatures shall be stated in the instructions f
88. Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 0 75 cm NORSOK standard Page 89 of 182199 crane information rescue boat information any equipment to be used manning and personnel qualifications personnel safety equipment communication equipment and procedure operational limitations including dynamic load charts which describe the option for deliberate exceeding the supplierssupplier s recommendation during emergency operations A dynamic load chart shall be calculated for the actual rescue boat that is to be lifted The dynamic load chart shall clearly state the conditions upon which it is based and if relevant the type and specification of the elastic fibre rope sling that is to be used The dynamic load chart shall differentiate between training operations and emergency operations NOTE In an emergency where the offshore crane is to be used for handling the rescue boat it is to be noted that this operation has to be authorised by the installation management in each case In an emergency situation the operational risks as well as the technical risks for the rescue team have to be balanced against the actual conditions and the probability of a successful rescue operation A 7 8 Instructions for use of dedicated rescue boat cranes or davits The rescue boat crane or davit shall be equipped with a detailed instruction for rescue boat operations The instruction shall be summarised in a pro
89. N 842 Safety of machinery Visual danger signals General requirements design and testing EN 894 1 Safety of machinery Ergonomics requirements for the design of and control actuators Part 1 General principles for human interactions with displays and control actuators EN 894 2 Safety of machinery Ergonomics requirements for the design of and control actuators Part 2 Displays EN 894 3 Safety of machinery Ergonomics requirements for the design of and control actuators Part 3 Control actuators EN 953 Safety of machinery Guards General requirements for the design andAnd construction of fixed and movable guards EN ISO 4413 Hydraulic fluid power General rules and safety requirements for systems and their components ISO 4413 2010 EN ISO 4414 Pneumatic fluid power General rules and safety requirements for systems and their components ISO 4414 2010 EN 1037 Safety of machinery Prevention of unexpected start up EN 1127 1 Explosive atmospheres Explosion prevention and protection Part 1 Basic concepts and methodology EN 1492 1 Textile slings Safety Flat woven webbing slings made of man made fibres for general purpose use EN 1492 2 Textile slings Safety Roundslings made of man made fibres for general purpose use EN 1492 4 Textile slings Safety Lifting slings for general service made from natural and man made fibre ropes eee EN 1495 Lifting platforms Mast
90. NORSOK STANDARD R 002 Draft Edition 2 September 20123 February 2015 Lifting equipment Formatert Engelsk USA Formatert Engelsk USA Formatert Svensk Sverige Formatert Svensk Sverige Formatert Svensk Sverige Formatert Svensk Sverige Formatert Normal Tabulatorstopp 17 cm H yre Formatert Normal This NORSOK standard is developed with broad petroleum industry participation by interested parties in the Norwegian petroleum industry and is owned by the Norwegian petroleum industry represented by Fhethe Norwegian Oil Iadustryand Gas Association OLF and The Federation of Norwegian ndustryindustries Please note that whilst every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this NORSOK standard neither OLFthe Norwegian Oil and Gas Association nor The Federation of Norwegian adustryindustries or any of their members will assume liability for any use thereof Standards Norway is responsible for the administration and publication of this NORSOK standard Standards Norway Telephone 47 67 83 86 00 Strandveien48 P O Box 242 _____ 1326 Lysaker Fax 47 67 83 86 01 BH2shoisakot NORWAY _ Email petroleum standard no NORWAY Visiting address Website www standard no petroleum Mustads vei 1 0283 Oslo Copyrights reserved ry ry Foreword 33 Intro
91. NOTE 3 Accelerations resulting from earthquake or extreme wave with wave height corresponding to 10 000 year return period whichever gives the highest accelerations must be applied to both mass of the hoist load and mass of the launching appliance in all degrees of freedom for the particular installation NOTE 4 For dynamic overload testing is taken from EN 13001 2 clause 4 2 2 1 For static overload testing 1 Key A1 ULS Pick up of rescue boat from sea in NLS conditions without environmental actions from wind snow ice or temperature variations The effect of waves on dynamic factor shall be taken into account A11 ULS Rescue boat suspended from hang off relief arrangement A3 ULS Acceleration of hanging rescue boat at start of descent or start of hoisting in NLS conditions without environmental actions from wind snow ice or temperature variations B1 ULS Pick up of boat rescue boat from sea in LS conditions in combination with environmental actions B3 ULS Acceleration of hanging rescue boat at start of descent or start of hoisting in NLS conditions with environmental actions C1 ULS Re entry during hoisting in LS conditions C2 ALS Rescue boat in the stowed position ready for launching in combination with loads from extreme wind conditions corresponding to wind speed with 10 000 year return period C3 ULS Static and dynamic load testing in NLS conditions with a the following test loads 2 2 times rated capacity for st
92. Or P2g shall be calculated in accordance with equation A 3 A 1 5 3 Dynamic coefficient for load combination C1 re entry Re entry implies that the launching appliance is reloaded due to the wave motions if the release mechanism does not open after the life savinglifesaving equipment has landed on the sea or during hoisting if hoisting velocity is less than the vertical wave velocity Re entry during hoisting is considered more unfavourable than re entry during lowering The dynamic coefficient D2 for re entry is the ratio between the maximum dynamic force created in hoist rope s during re entry and the mass of hoist load Equation A 3 may be used as a simplified method for calculating z If the simplified method does not sufficiently limit the dynamic coefficient according to the limit values stated above the maximum force created in the hoist rope s shall be determined by a more detailed study e g calculations simulations or model tests taking into account the wave period the lowering or hoisting speed the stiffness of the launching and recovery appliance and the moment of inertia of the winch drum A 1 5 4 Dynamic coefficient for load combination C6 emergency cut out The dynamic coefficient 2 cg for the impact on the hoist load occurring when lowering at full speed and activating emergency stop or triggering an overspeed protection device when provided in the upper position shall be calculated in accordance
93. Proof load test means of connection B7 X Speed test B11 B11 X Dynamic overload test mechanisms other than hoisting B12 B12 NORSOK standard Page 65 of 182199 Object System Test Phase Launching Lifeboat Prototype Production Installation appliance I Il Ill X Function testing B13 B13 X X Hang off Tensile test means of connection A2 X relief Tensile test means of connection anchorage in hull A3 X X arrangement Launch simulation if hang off relief arrangement is used for A9 B4 arresting the lifeboat during simulation X X Static overload test 200 A11 B6 X Xx Proof load test means of connection B7 NORSOK standard Page 66 of 182199 A 1 14 2 1 Prototype tests for Group A 1 Test No A1 Release test 200 primary means of launching The means of connection shall be loaded with a suspended load equal to or greater than 200 of the rated capacity see A 2 3 of the primary means of launching The load may be the lifeboat itself with test loads or a dummy load connected to the means of connection in a realistic manner The means of connection and direction of load shall be oriented in the same way as it will be when installed on the host facility without heel or trim The release mechanism shall be opened by the activation system The test is considered successful if the load is released and if there is no damage on the means of connection or the release sys
94. Snow and ice 4 2 3 2 1 22 1 1 1 1 loads Temperature 4 2 3 3 z z 1 16 1 1 1 1 1 05 1 z z variations Skewing 4 2 3 4 1 16 1 Exception Extreme wind stowed 4 2 4 2 A 1 4 3 E z a 1 0 1 al position Static test load A 1 14 1 1 1 Test load for release A 1 5 5 1 1 l Q2 mechanism Excitation of the foundation 4 2 4 8 A 1 4 3 1 0 1 NORSOK standard Page 39 of 182199 NOTE 2 Risk coefficient yn NOTE 3 4 3 2 5 9 1 5 1 5 1 0 lt Formatert tabell See EN 13001 2 clause 4 3 3 4 3 4 and Table 7 See EN 13001 2 4 3 5 Formatert Ikke Hevet NOTE 1 Mass of the hoist load shall be taken as rated capacity from A 2 3 for load combinations A1 A2 A4 B2 B2 B4 and B5 For lad combination C2 the mass of hoist load may be taken as mass of empty lifeboat For load combination C7 the mass of hoist load shall be taken as the test load for release mechanism NOTE 2 Accelerations resulting from earthquake or extreme wave with wave height corresponding to 10 000 year return period whichever gives the highest accelerations must be applied to both mass of the hoist load and mass of the launching appliance in all degrees of freedom for the particular installation NOTE 3 The risk coefficient shall be applied to mass of the hoist load and movea
95. TE For terminology see EN ISO 12100 The system shall be simple to operate and shall be available without undue delay in order to avoid unacceptable risk Unless specified otherwise in the annexes the minimum hoisting and lowering speeds for SWL shall be 10 of the minimum required speeds Only one function may be operated at a time The control devices shall be of hold to run type and shall be clearly and permanently marked A separate emergency stop shall be provided for the emergency operation system A clear and unambiguous operation procedure for the system shall be included in the instructions for use and shall be permanently displayed at the control station Specific requirements applicable to different types of lifting appliances are given in the relevant annexes 5 16 Communication 5 16 1 Telephone Cranes and lifting appliances with an enclosed control station shall be fitted with a permanently installed telephone communication system NORSOK standard Page 29 of 182199 5 16 2 UHF VHF radio Lifting appliances with an enclosed control station shall be fitted with permanently installed UHF and or VHF radio facilities It shall be possible for the crane driver to send receive messages without removing the hands from the main control levers 5 16 3 Loudspeaker alarm horn Lifting appliances with an enclosed control station shall be fitted with permanently installed external loudspeaker or alarm horn that can be oper
96. The carrier must be designed to protect the passengers from entangling with the lifting sets or the crane hook after landing on a vessel deck The carrier must be designed to float in an upright position if immersed into the sea NORSOK standard Page 91 of 182199 Annex B Normative Material handling principles B 1 Concept principles Material handling principles cover all activities related to handling of goods and materials to and from and at the installation in all phases of its lifetime The installation shall be designed to ensure that the number of lifting operations is minimized and with sufficient lay down storage areas and transportation routes for safe and efficient operation of the installation Due consideration shall be given to the different phases of use of the installation including all operations regular maintenance shutdowns for major overhaul and simultaneous operations To facilitate use of fork lift truck or trolley all transportation routes shall be planned without any obstructions and thresholds Transportation routes shall be dimensioned for the weight and size of equipment that will be transported to and from the area Operators of lifting appliances shall have a clear view of load and handling areas in regular use When designing areas for maintenance the safest lifting equipment and lifting concepts shall take preference Concepts for material handling that are impervious to weather conditions shall ta
97. Type IV Grade B or EN 13889 grade 8 e anchor should be used charpy v notch tested to minimum 42J at 20 C e lt gt CEC ee ae ea ae see Anchor type Bow shackle H shackle should be used o Ssefebebedideipellonc ayhadi esl oie cael po eed F 7 2 4 5 Chains The following apply chainChain slings shouldshall be welded Grade 8 shortink chain accordingin accordance with C 16 1 1 and the following additional requirements for offboard lifts e _Documented Charpy v notch tested to EN 84 8 minimum 42J at 20 C 27J at 20 C in fusion line Other grades of similar or better quality may be used if they satisfy requirements of a recognized standard applicable for lifting equipment and with documented Charpy values 42J at 20 C 27 J at 20 C in fusion line NORSOK standard Page 151 of 482199 Formatert Skrift Fet Engelsk Storbritannia Formatert Skrift Ikke Fet Engelsk USA Formatert Mellomrom F r 0 pkt Etter 0 pkt Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 cm Innrykk ved 0 63 cm Tabulatorstopp Ikke p 2 cm Formatert ngen punktmerking eller nummerering Formatert Skrift Ikke Fet Engelsk USA Formatert Mellomrom F r 0 pkt Etter 0 pkt Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 cm Innrykk ved 0 63 cm Tabulatorstopp Ikke p 2 cm Formatert Skrift 11 pkt Fet Engelsk F 7 2 4 6 Rin So n S
98. a series of identical lifting lugs samples for testing may be selected according to Table H 5 H 6 4 2 Documentation In addition to the technical file required by 5 25 each lifting lug shall be accompanied by a certificate based on ILO form 2 issued by an enterprise of competence in accordance with NORSOK R 003 Annex E or NORSOK R 005 as applicable The certificate shall state the applied test load in accordance with H 6 4 1 Lifting lugs selected for testing in accordance with H 6 4 1 shall be decided by the Enterprise of Competence H 7 Sheave brackets Group H 3 H 7 1 General The sheave bracket will normally comprise a base plate for fixed attachment to the structure side plates axle bearings wire sheave pulley wheel and sometimes a pivot arrangement for sideways movement H 7 2 Design loads Unless otherwise agreed or stated by the manufacturer of the lifting equipment the following design criteria shall be used e dynamic amplification factor DAF shall be taken as 1 5 for line pull up to and including 3 tonnes and lt Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 1 3 for line pull above 5 tonnes For line pull between 3 tonnes and 5 tonnes DAF is to be found by Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved linear interpolation 0 75 cm e The line pull is normally the SWL of the lifting appliance in which the sheave is integrated and the load on the bracket is the vector sum of the two line pull loads e all condition
99. ace between the foundation and the lifting lt Formatert Nummerert Niv 1 appliance ref 5 25 3 and Annex H classification utilization see also 5 8 PLUM A A 1 i coe ENE HE cm FINN ved 0 75 cm e operational limitations e anti collision system e fire and gas shut down philosophy e automatic shutdewrshutdown criteria e other relevant health safety and environment requirements NOTE Complex lifting equipment i e offshore cranes launching appliances for life saving equipment drawwork lifts etc will normally have an extensive interface to the installation including power supplies HVAC systems fire amp gas signals and shut downs telecom PA systems access routes utility systems etc In order to ensure that the HSE requirements are met and the equipment interfaces are compatible with the rest of the installation the PSA requirements stated in the Facility regulation and applicable Company specifications will have precedence for these interfaces at the installation side in case of conflict with the requirements of this standard 5 1 2 Lifting of personnel Lifting equipment for the lifting of personnel shall be designed and equipped to minimise the risk for the personnel NORSOK standard Page 20 of 182199 The structural and mechanical capacity of lifting equipment for the lifting of personnel shall be designed with a higher value risk coefficient see 5 9 and the relevant annexes Lifting ap
100. acity of all lifting points of more than 200 kg C No requirements for documentation of material handling Lifting equipment intended for infrequent use but exposed to wind rain snow or sea spray shall be designed for easy and safe dismantling re installation and storage in warehouse Permanently installed lifting equipment which are exposed to wind rain snow or sea spray shall be designed with extra protection against corrosion and preferably be parked stored in a weather protected garage When installing lifting equipment near flares burners and exhaust outlets on the installations due consideration shall be given to the effects of thermal exposure on the lifting equipment during the lifetime of the installation e g on sensitive electric components non metallic materials steel wire ropes ventilation of cabin oil temperature etc Dedicated areas for operation of mobile cranes and loader cranes on onshore installations A suitable number of permanent areas for operation of mobile cranes and loader cranes shall be arranged at onshore installations The areas shall be located for maximum crane coverage and view from the control stations and to minimize any risk during the lifting operations The ground shall be dimensioned for the maximum expected ground pressure from stabilisers The area shall be clearly and permanently marked and be included in the material handling plan NORSOK standard Page 93 of 182199 Offsho
101. acture for lowest working temperature 20 C in accordance with EN 13155 Table A 313001 3 1 For equipment intended to be used at lower operating temperatures than 20 C materials shall be selected in accordance with C 6 C 12 1 2 2 Fabrication The fabrication requirements in C 6 apply C 12 1 2 3 Information for use and maintenance Unless the equipment complies with the additional requirements of Annex F a statement should be given in the instructions to inform that the equipment is only intended for onboard lifting C 12 2 Pad eye flanges C 12 2 1 General requirements Pad eye flanges shall be designed in accordance with Annex F C 12 2 2 Complementary requirements for pad eye flanges C 12 2 2 1 Design The working load limit WLL for pad eye flanges shall be specified in steps corresponding to standardised shackle dimensions see group R 4 Pad eye dimensions recommended in Annex J may be used Pad eye pin holes shall have a diameter for which a pin of standard shackle with corresponding WLL will fit into The pad eye thickness shall fit into the opening of a standard shackle with corresponding WLL The proof of competence for structural strength of pad eye flanges shall be performed in accordance with Annex F taking into account the dynamic factor as described for onboard lifts A minimum of four bolts shall be used for connection of the pad eye flange to the load C 12 2 2 2 Materials Materials shall be selected with
102. additional protection such as plastic cones on wire rope terminations Reference is made to 5 4 9 Lifting accessories used in cranes shall comply with the requirements of Annex C NORSOK standard Page 160 of 182199 G 3 7 Lifting of persons Text in this Clause has been deleted Requirements are given in Clause 5 1 2 G 3 8 Cranes for temporary use offshore Powered cranes intended for temporary use on an offshore installation shall also comply with NORSOK Z 015 G 4 Cranes with emergency operation system EOS For cranes equipped with EOS in accordance with 5 15 3 the EOS shall have means to control the main functions of the crane i e hoisting lowering luffing slewing telescoping travelling in case of an emergency where it is necessary to continue the lifting operation and secure the load and the crane ifa single failure has occurred in the normal operation system see Figure G 1 The EOS shall be initiated and controlled from the control station with operator view to the crane and the load The EOS shall be capable of handling all loads within the rated capacity The manual controls of the EOS shall be hold to run and shall be clearly and permanently marked Only one motion need to be operational at a time An emergency stop device for the EOS which shut off the emergency power supply and stops all motions shall be in reach of the crane operator at the control station The EOS shall be operational within
103. all be applied in the following positions of the runway beam NORSOK standard Page 178 of 182199 e mid span a Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 e support points Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e cantilever outer end 0 75 cm e centre of turns Runway beams with turns or rack pinion drive shall be functional tested throughout its full length with a trolley loaded with at least 50 of the beam SWL Table H 4 Proof test loads Safe working load SWL Static proof test load Up to and including 20 tonnes 1 5 x SWL gt 20 tonnes 1 25 x SWL When testing a series of identical runway beams or lifting lugs samples for testing may be selected according to Table H 5 a ne Formatert Skrift Fet Table H 5 Sample selection for proof load testing Formatert Innrykk Venstre 2 cm F rste linje 1 cm 1to3 4to6 7 to 10 11 to 15 16 to 25 26 to 40 gt 40 To be agreed with enterprise of competence H 5 9 2 Documentation In addition to the technical file required by 5 25 each runway beam shall be accompanied by a certificate based on ILO form 2 issued by an enterprise of competence in accordance with NORSOK R 003 Annex E or NORSOK R 005 as applicable The certificate shall state the applied test load in accordance with Amdy beams selected for testing in accordance with H 5 9 1 shall be decided by the Enterprise of Competence H 6 Lifting lugs Group H 2 H 6 1
104. all be of self locking type in accordance with EN 1677 3 The locking mechanism shall be protected against inadvertent opening due to entanglement with any obstruction during lifting Hooks shall have a swivelling element or swivel of grade 8 according to EN 1677 1 shall be permanently fitted between the hook and the steel wire rope eye Swivels or swivelling elements of hooks shall incorporate a thrust bearing The top link to be attached to the crane hook should have minimum internal dimensions 270 mm x 140 mm The components of the forerunners pennants shall be selected with documented breaking force 8F BF in kN kiloNewton as follows e top link BF 5 0 x WLL xg Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e hook BF 5 0 x WLL xg Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e wire BF 6 0 x WLL x g for WLL up to and including 10 T pIem _ BF 5 0 x WLL x g for WLL above 15 T Where g is equal to 9 81 m s2 NORSOK standard Page 113 of 182199 For WLL between 10 T and 15 T linear interpolation to be used for calculating the BF Forerunners pennants should have a working load limit of at least 8 T The crane owner may specify a lower working load limit but not less than 50 of the cranes rated capacity NOTE A working load limit of 8T is typical for a crane with rated capacity 15 T C 14 3 2 Materials Materials for components for upper and lower terminals of forerunners pennants shall be selected in accordance with the
105. alled maintained tested and used within the limitations described by the following sets of conditions e NLS non life saving condition PTEE e LS life savinglifesaving condition The NLS condition is applicable for operation during installation and maintenance Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 The LS condition is applicable for operation during a real life saving situation i e evacuation or rescue The conditions are defined by e environmental conditions in terms of max wind speed and max significant wave height 4 Justert ved Orca lt p nny Ved 0 75 cm Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 NORSOK standard Page 35 of 182199 e operational situations as sidelead and offlead e max static angle of heel for the installation in the damaged stability condition The NLS and LS conditions are defined in Table A 2 The design temperature Tp shall be taken as 20 C unless otherwise agreed Itis the responsibility of the supplier of the life savinglifesaving equipment to ensure and document that safe operation can be achieved in the specified operational conditions Care shall be taken to ensure that connecting and detaching the life savinglifesaving equipment to from its launching and recovery appliance at sea can be done in a safe manner without exposing personnel to risk NORSOK standard Page 36 of 182199 Table A 2 NLS and LS condition
106. als type of lifting equipment arrangement lifting handling procedure transport route etc In cases where the equipment vendor has incorporated comprehensive handling procedures in the maintenance manual this can be referred to in the report The material handling description for such equipment can be simplified by just defining the required lifting transportation equipment and transport routes g requirements for transportation routes roads including width and height in the different areas h description of goods handling to from helicopter deck if applicable i description of loading hose handling including hose replacement j description of areas where special protection of equipment is required e g dropped object protection truck barriers swinging load protection etc k material handling drawings based on equipment arrangement drawings or 3D plots including piping and valves containing the following 1 all equipment to be handled including lifting lugs meneraitsrunway beams access ways etc NORSOK standard Page 98 of 182199 2 table containing all equipment identification numbers to be handled with corresponding identification numbers for the lifting equipment to be used 3 load capacities for lay down areas and transportation routes roads 1 Dedicated areas for operation of mobile cranes and loader cranes on onshore installations NORSOK standard Page 99 of 182199 Annex C Normative Lifting accessories an
107. and cabin Comment D lt lt lt lt o lt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp 1 5 cm Left e E E ee es l Formatert Engelsk USA Formatert Skrift 12 pkt Fet G 12 Floating cranes Group G6 NORSOK standard Page 169 of 182199 G 12 1 Size and capacity Reference is made to the relevant parts of the requirements given for offshore cranes in G 12 1 G 12 2 Design Floating cranes shall be in accordance with EN 13852 2 For non slewing cranes e g A frames etc applicable parts of EN 13852 2 apply In addition floating cranes shall fulfil the requirements in G 11 2 1 including G 5 2 8 and the following G 12 3 Location of emergency load release system ELRS manual control ELRS control device shall be arranged for rapid and unobstructed activation and shall be located at the left hand side of the crane operator Reference is made to EN 13852 2 5 7 1 G 12 4 Lifting appliances for subsea operations G 12 4 1 General Lifting appliances intended for sul seasubsea operations shall be specially designed for such operations and shall fulfil the requirements in G 12 4 2 to G 12 4 11 G 12 4 2 Sea water penetration and corrosion The design shall minimise the sea water penetration and corrosion effects on hooks swivels lifting accessories hoisting ropes winches etc that are exposed to sea water G 12 4 3 Load hoist drum The hoisting drum shall be designed according to DNV Standard No 2 22 Certification of Lif
108. appliance for lifeboats launched by falls and a winch Table A 5 summarises the load combinations to be analysed for such appliances A more detailed analysis of load combinations is needed for launching and recovery appliances with other movements For such appliances reference is made to EN 13001 2 Table 10 NORSOK standard Page 44 of 182199 Table A 6 Load combinations for Group A 3 Escape chutes TO BE DEVELOPED Table A 7 Load combinations for Group A 4 Rafts TO BE DEVELOPED Table A 8 Load combinations for Group A 5 Escape lines TO BE DEVELOPED NORSOK standard Page 45 of 182199 Table A 9 Load combinations for Group A 6 Launching appliances for rescue boats Categori Loads Reference Load combinations A Load combinations Load combinationsC lt Formatert tabell es of B loads EN NORSO Partial A1 A11 A3 Partial Bi B3 Partia C1 C C3 C6 C8 13001 2 K safety safety 2 R 002 factors factors safety factor Yp Yp 2 Yp Regular Gravitation Mass of the 4 2 2 1 Q 1 1 oF 1 Q 1 Q 1 1 acceleratio launching NOTE 4 n appliance Impacts Mass of the A 1 5 3 1 34 D2 1 1 1 22 Q2 1 1 1 1 1 hoist load NOTE 1 Inertia forces due to 4 2 2 4 1 34 Os 1 22 Os acceleration from hoist drives Displacements 4 2 2 5 1 1 1 1 1 ax 1 1 1
109. as function of length L _ K MBL _1 80 480 864 K kN kN m 3 m L L L Note that L is the unknown variable to be calculated through this process not yet known at this moment 1 3 3 Calculation of minimum rope length In the following a graphical approach is used to illustrate the pennant length influence of the dynamic factor Q and the dynamic safety factor SFuyn Those factors serve as acceptance criteria for the pennant length The pennant length may also be calculated by rearranging the formulas for the criteria to be checked The velocities applicable for calculation of the dynamic factor can be calculated from the input parameters as shown in Table 1 2 Table 1 2 Velocities used for calculating dynamic factor Load combination Sign wave height Hs Vu m s Vp m s ref expression A 6 Vc m s ref expression A 7 Vr m s ref expression A 21 The dynamic factor is calculated using expression A 20 for both LCA and LCC The dynamic safety factor SFdyn is calculated using expression A 19 for both LCA and LCC These parameters will be depending on the pennant length L Results are shown in Table 1 3 NORSOK standard Page 190 of 182199 Feltkode endret Feltkode endret Feltkode endret Feltkode endret Table 1 3 Dynamic factor and dynamic safety factor a
110. ated by the crane driver without removing the hands from the main control levers 5 17 Pneumatics Pneumatic systems and components of lifting equipment shall be in accordance with EN ISO 4414 5 18 Hydraulics Hydraulic systems and components shall be in accordance with EN 4413 The hydraulic system should be fitted with metallic tube connections for fluid power with elastomeric sealing rings in accordance with ISO 8434 1 or DIN 2354 combined with hydraulic pipes with cold formed tube ends Cutting rings described in ISO 8434 1 or DIN 2354 should not be used Cutting rings are normally the limiting factor for the working pressure tables of ISO 8434 1 DIN 2354 When the tube fittings are used with cold formed tube ends the maximum working pressures may be increased The maximum working pressure shall be confirmed and documented by the tube fitting manufacturer and the hydraulic pipe supplier Flexible hoses shall not be used between any load holding valves and hydraulic motors or cylinders Acceptance testing shall be performed in accordance with EN 4413 Clause 6 with the following additional test requirements e Hydraulic hoses for all pressure lines shall be pressure tested to 1 5 times the maximum working pressure for the system limited to 70 Bar above the maximum working pressure e Piping and tube fittings according to above mention combination of industrial tube fittings and cold formed pipe ends may be exceptedomitted from pressure testi
111. atic load testing of structure 1 5 times rated capacity for static load testing of winches and 1 1 times rated capacity for dynamic load testing The rated capacity is specified in A 1 4 2 C6 ULS Launching appliance with a test load equal to 1 1 times the rated capacity see A 1 4 2 in combination with loads caused by emergency braking during lowering at full speed or triggering of the overspeed protection device when provided whichever gives the highest dynamic effect C8 ALS Launching appliance with hoist load in combination with loads due to external excitation of the foundation At the time of publication of this NORSOK standard hoisting lowering is the only motion of a typical launching and recovery appliance for rescue boats Table A 9 summarises the load combinations to be analysed for such appliances A more detailed analysis of load combinations is needed for launching and recovery appliances with other movements For such appliances reference is made to EN 13001 2 Table 10 NORSOK standard Page 47 of 182199 Page intentionally left blank lt Formatert Annex head2 NORSOK standard Page 48 of 182199 A 1 4 4 Lateral loads on means of connection In order to avoid failure of means of connection and their anchorage in hull as result of a mederate deviation in direction of forces atateral out of plane forcethe proof of competence calculations for of connection forming part of the lifesaving equip
112. ation caused by possible sidelead and offlead wave trough and the lowest astronomical tide When the lower motion limit has been reached at least 2 windings of wire rope shall remain on the winch drum A 2 4 2 4 Emergency operation In case of a main power failure or a control system failure one of the following emergency solutions shall be available as applicable e If the secondary means of launching is intended to be used with persons on board the lifeboat it shall be possible to recover the lifeboat by use of the emergency operation system for means of retrieval ref A 2 4 3 4 e f the secondary means of launching is intended to be used without persons on board the lifeboat it shall be possible to lower the lifeboat to sea by means of an emergency lowering system in accordance with 5 15 2 A 2 4 2 5 Release system for the secondary means of launching A manually operated actuator shall be provided for opening of the release mechanism of the secondary means of launching The opening and closing of release mechanism shall be possible from within the lifeboat or through a hatch opening Opening of the release mechanism shall require two deliberate actions by the operator and shall only be possible when the means of connection are offloaded The release system shall be physically protected against inadvertent use The release mechanism shall be designed in such a way that it will not be forced open by the self weight of the lifeboa
113. atorstopp 1 5 cm Left e this elastic pennant is only intended for lifting and lowering thea rescue boat within the working load limit related to the service as stated in the certificate caly Any other use of the elastic pennant is prohibited e this elastic pennant shall only be used to lift the rescue boat in a straight lift No choking is allowed e this elastic pennant is intended for use in training operations in wave conditions up to and including 3 m significant wave height It is also intended for real rescue operations in wave conditions up to and including 6 m significant wave height e athorough examination shall be performed after each training operation e the elastic pennant shall be replaced immediately if it has been used in rescue operations in wave conditions exceeding 3 m significant wave height e the elastic pennant shall be replaced every second year regardless of condition as determined by visual examination _ Formatert ngen punktmerking eller nummerering Formatert Skrift Calibri 11 pkt Skriftfarge Egendefinert farge RGB 31 73 125 Engelsk USA 2 his l Formatert Engelsk USA A 7 6 Load bearing parts of rescue boats A 7 6 1 General The proof of competence shall be carried out in accordance with A 1 3 A 1 7 and A 1 8 for means of connection and their anchorage points which are integral part of the rescue boat A 7 6 2 Load combinations
114. ays check substructure for sufficient weld area LZ Slot the lifting lug through horizontal plate Weld lifting lug to end of beam including fillet weld along web Figure J 3 Welded connections J 2 3 Lifting lug shackle accommodation Lifting lugs should be design to match the relevant standard shackle dimensions and to account for tolerance deviation between the different shackle types The selected shackle shall house both lifting lug and selected sling or hook see Figure J 4 Inside length Figure J 4 Lifting lug vs shackle interface Type 1 Lifting lug shown NORSOK standard Page 199 of 182199 J 2 4 Lifting lug geometry Lifting lug geometry should be decided on the basis of a load distribution perspective and an operational judgement based on shackle geometry The following examples of complete lifting lug geometry may form such basis The dimensions given in tables below are based on a minimum yield stress fy of 355 N mm Type 1 Load Angle 90 lt a lt 90 Dimensions in mm dh 1 03 d 2 Minimum hole diameter 1 3 dh lt R lt 1 8 dh 0 75 ws lt tp 0 9 ws 3 2 2 dn lt h 2 4 dh 2 4 h SL lt 2 7 h d shackle bolt diameter ws inside width of shackle at bolt section a load angle relative to vertical Maximum hole diameter shall not exceed dn 5 Shackle geometry and tolerances are based on Dee shackles and Bow shackles according to
115. bances and stresses with a low probability of failures or malfunctions 3 1 43 rescue boat boat designed to rescue persons in distress and to marshal survival craft NOTE Rescue boats are also commonly known as man over board MOB boats 3 1 44 rescue equipment rescue boats and personnel transfer carrier 3 1 45 risk combination of the probability of occurrence of harm and the severity of that harm 3 1 46 NORSOK standard Page 13 of 182199 safe working load SWL maximum working load that the lifting equipment is designed to lift under specific conditions NOTE Safe working load corresponds to the term rated capacity R used by many standards 3 1 47 shall verbal form used to indicate requirements strictly to be followed in order to conform to this NORSOK standard and from which no deviation is permitted unless accepted by all involved parties 3 1 48 should verbal form used to indicate that among several possibilities one is recommended as particularly suitable without mentioning or excluding others or that a certain course of action is preferred but not necessarily required NOTE The term should means that other solutions can be chosen than the one recommended in the standard It shall be documented that the alternative solution provides an equivalent level of safety 3 1 49 sidelead angle angle from the vertical at which the hoist rope or chain leaves the lifting appliance measured in the plane describ
116. ble parts of mass of the launching appliance Static parts of mass of the launching appliance need not be multiplied with the risk coefficient NOTE 4 3s gust wind shall be applied without simultaneous action from wave induced accelerations Wave induced accelerations shall be applied in combination with simultaneous action from a mean wind speed averaged over a 60s period Key A1 ULS Suspended lifeboat with no wind or other environmental loads This load combination shall be applied for lifeboat in stowed position suspended from each mechanism i e primary means of launching secondary means of launching means of retrieval and hang off relief arrangement For skidding arrangements this load combination shall also be applied in the most unfavourable position at the skidding track during launching A2 ULS Sudden release of load drop of lifeboat as result of activating the release function of the primary means of launching 3 1 0 to be applied for calculating the peak reaction load effects in the main structure caused by drop of lifeboat A4 ULS Travelling on an uneven surface or track with no wind or other environmental loads if part of the launching sequence for primary means of launching B1 ULS Lifeboat in stowed position suspended from primary means of launching in the LS condition For skidding arrangements this load combination shall also be applied in the most unfavourable position at the skidding track during launching For
117. by dynamic coefficients multiplied by partial safety factors and superimposed into load combinations in accordance with EN 13001 2 in order to decide their resulting load effects in terms of upper and lower extreme values of nominal stresses or inner forces Load combinations given in the annexes of this NORSOK standard shall be applied 5 7 4 Limit states and proof of competence The following parts of the CEN TS 13001 3 series shall be used for the selection of limit design stresses forces and for the proof of static strength fatigue strength and elastic stability The technical specifications listed below may also be applied to the selection of materials ea SAT FRACS A Ol PUNKtIMerKe Iva ustert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e EN13001 3 1 for structural members and welded bolted and pinned connections pesn cm NORSOK standard Page 25 of 182199 e CEN FSEN 13001 3 2 for wire ropes in reeving systems e prEN 13001 3 3 for wheel rail contact e CEN TS 13001 3 5 for forged hooks lt Bolts of class 12 9 shall not be used in load bearing connections For fatigue design of steel structures DNV RP C203 may be used as a supplement 5 7 5 Mechanisms Mechanisms are devices needed to start or stop a relative motion between two rigid parts of the lifting appliance between the lifting appliance and its foundation or between the lifting appliance and the lifted load Thus motors brakes transmission systems and s
118. c value for angle of heel for the damaged host facility is known this test may be performed at the host specific angle of heel ia steadinstead of 17 Reference is made to Table A 2 Test No A6 Function test of activation system for release mechanism manually operated actuator For primary means of launching the following requirements shall be demonstrated by functional tests e the number of strokes required to open the release mechanism and release the lifeboat is within the lt Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 range given in A 2 4 1 2 for loading conditions corresponding to empty lifeboat and 110 of the rated Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved capacity see A 2 3 of the primary means of launching 0 75 cm e the manual force required to operate the enabling device or the manual operating device does not exceed the value given in A 2 4 1 2 for the same loading conditions e itis not possible to open the release mechanism with the actuator when the enabling device is not activated NORSOK standard Page 67 of 182199 Test No A7 Function test of activation system for release mechanism powered actuator For primary means of launching the following requirements shall be demonstrated by functional tests e the energy source provided for the powered operated actuator has sufficient amount of potential energy lt to open the release mechanism and release the lifeboat in two subsequent trials without recharging b
119. cedure for training and emergency operations The procedure shall be included in the emergency preparedness plan for the installation The procedure for rescue boat operations shall include but not be limited to authority and responsibility for involved personnel _ Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 planning and precautions Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved announcement routines 0 75 cm crane davit information setting of personnel lift mode rescue boat information any equipment to be used manning and personnel qualifications personnel safety equipment communication equipment and procedure operational limitations including dynamic load charts which describe the option for deliberate exceeding the suppliers recommendation during emergency operations A dynamic load chart shall be calculated for the actual rescue boat that is to be lifted The calculation shall take into account the applicable damping effect of an elastic sling motion compensator or shock absorber The dynamic load chart shall clearly differentiate between training operations and emergency operations NOTE In an emergency where the crane or davit is to be used for handling the rescue boat this operation has to be authorised by the installation management in each case In such situations the operational risks as well as the technical risks for the rescue team have to be balanced against the actual conditions and the probability of a successful
120. cessories to be used in high risk applications The above mentioned operational precautions shall be given in the instruction for use ref clause 5 25 3 NORSOK standard Page 210 of 482199 standard norge norge
121. ching The actuator force required to open the release mechanism when the means of connection are loaded with a force equal to 100 of the rated capacity see A 2 3 shall be measured The actuator shall then be subjected to a force equal to twice this force The test is successful if there is no damage to the actuator and if the same actuator is successfully used in the prototype test No A5 Test No A5 Launch test lifeboat arrangement This test shall be performed for 2 different loading conditions one with empty lifeboat and one with lifeboat loaded with loads giving a total weight corresponding to 110 of rated capacity for primary means of launching see A 2 3 For both loading conditions the lifeboat shall be suspended from the primary means of launching in the launching appliance with the launching appliance oriented in the upright position i e corresponding to final installation on the host facility without heel or trim For both loading conditions the release mechanism shall be opened by the activation system and the lifeboat launched to sea The test is considered successful if the lifeboat is released and launched to sea with the predicted trajectory in air The test shall be repeated for both loading conditions with the launching appliance oriented in the most unfavourable heel trim angles up to 17 in any direction The actuator subjected to prototype test No A4 shall be used for this test NOTE Ifthe host facility specifi
122. ckles is highlighted in this annex This annex applies together with one or more of the annexes listed below e Annex F for lifting lugs on equipment or units to be used for transportation installation and Ses Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 decommissioning Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm e Annex H for lifting lugs for suspension of permanent or temporary lifting equipment e Annex C for lifting lugs integrated in lifting accessories All dimensions e g thickness hole diameter bolt diameter etc in this annex are given as nominal values in mm Fabrication tolerances are not covered in this annex J 2 Design of lifting lugs J 2 1 Types of lifting lugs Three different types of lifting lugs are considered e Type 1 is the basic type manufactured from one single plate e Type 2 has one cheek plate fillet welded on each side of the plate e Type 3 has a boss partly welded to the plate with full penetration weld TYPE 1 Typical for shackles with WLL lt 8 5 Tonnes Load angle between 90 lt a lt 90 TYPE 2 WLL lt 55T Typical for shackles with WLL lt 55 Tonnes Load angle between 90 lt a lt 90 TYPE 3 WLL lt 55T Typical for shackles with WLL lt 55 Tonnes Load angle between 90 lt a lt 90 Figure J 1 Lifting lugs Type 1 2 and 3 Dotted lines indicate alternative designs NORSOK standard Page 197 of 482199 J 2 2 Lifting lug connection to structures A g
123. climbing work platforms EN 1570 1 Safety requirements for lifting tables Part 1 Lifting tables serving up to two fixed landings EN 1677 1 Components for slings Safety Part 1 Forged steel components Grade 8 EN 1677 2 Components for slings Safety Part 2 Forged steel lifting hooks with latch Grade 8 EN 1677 3 Components for slings Safety Part 3 Forged steel self locking hooks Grade 8 EN 1677 4 Components for slings Safety Part 4 Links Grade 8 EN 1679 1 Reciprocating internal combustion engines Safety Part 1 Compression ignition engines eee F EN 1755 Safety of industrial trucks Operation in potentially explosive atmospheres Use in flammable gas vapour mist and dust EN 1808 Safety requirements on Suspended Access Equipment Design calculations stability criteria construction Tests EN 1834 1 Reciprocating internal combustion engines Safety requirements for design and construction of engines for use in potentially explosive atmospheres Part 1 Group II engines for use in flammable gas and vapour atmospheres EN 1993 1 1 Eurocode 3 Design of steel structures Part 1 1 General rules and rules for buildings NORSOK standard Page 6 of 182199 Formatert Skriftfarge Automatisk Formatert Skriftfarge Automatisk J EN 1999 1 1 Eurocode 9 Design of aluminium structures Part 1 1 General structural rules EN 12077 2 0
124. cordance with C 6 Materials for aluminium structures shall be selected in accordance with EN 1999 1 1 C 13 1 2 3 Fabrication The fabrication requirements in clause C 6 apply Each basket shall be tested with a static load corresponding to twice the max gross mass suspended from the dedicated lifting set C 13 1 2 4 Information for use and maintenance Information for use shall be given in compliance with relevant parts of EN 12644 1 as applicable The instructions must clearly state that the basket is not intended for lifting persons A statement should be given in the instructions to inform that the basket is only intended for onboard lifting C 13 1 2 5 Marking Baskets shall be marked with manufacturer s name and address Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 type designation Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved max gross mass tonnes 0 75 cm payload tonnes year of manufacture identification for traceability to manufacturer s certificate warning against offboard lifting warning against lifting persons Marking signs shall be permanently attached to the basket with adequate means to prevent the sign from loosening NORSOK standard Page 112 of 182199 C 13 2 Intermediate bulk containers and big bags C 13 2 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply ISO 21898 Packaging Flexible intermediate bulk containers FIBCs for non dangerous goods IMDG
125. culate and document their material properties Means of connection made from rolled structural steel or aluminium are considered as structural members A 1 8 3 Ropes chains means of connections and other lifting components A 1 8 3 1 General The characteristic resistance R of ropes chains means of connection and other lifting components shall be their breaking force The design strain Sg for these components shall be calculated for all relevant load combinations listed in Table A 3 to Table A 10 Formatert 1 Skrift 8 pkt Formatert F rste linje Innrykk Venstre 0 cm 0 cm Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Justert ved lt Formatert 0 75 cm Punktmerket Niv 1 0 25 cm Innrykk ved NORSOK standard Page 56 of 182199 A 1 8 3 2 Steel wire ropes in running reeving systems Rope length Steel wire ropes used for launching of life saving equipment to sea shall have a minimum effective length which takes into account the most unfavourable situation such as inclination of the installation or lowest astronomical tide the lowest point of wave trough and drift off in LS condition according to Table A 2 NOTE _ The lowest point of wave trough should be taken as 1xH below sea level _ A a aes ae or ee Rope reeving Single fall rope reeving should be used unless it can be verified that sufficient measures are provided to avoid twisting of multiple rope falls
126. cumentation of risk assessment shall demonstrate that the requirements for performing the risk assessment have been met and that the results with respect to the acceptance criteria are fulfilled The risk assessment principles are given in ISO 12100 and ISO TR 14121 2 For complex lifting appliances the risk assessment shall be developed using methods on component level e g FMECA as described in IEC 60812 4 5 Inherently safe design measures Inherently safe design principles using reliable components shall be applied see ISO 12100 clause 6 2 Dependent on the result of the risk assessment fail safe components or redundant components shall be used 4 6 Safeguarding and complementary protective measures Safeguarding and complementary protective measures shall be used to reduce or eliminate risks that can netcannot be avoided or sufficiently limited by inherently safe design measures Reference is made to ISO 12100 clause 6 3 4 7 Information for use Information for use consists of communication links e g text words signs signals symbols or diagrams used separately or in a combination to convey information to the user Information for use shall be supplied to further reduce risks that can notcannot be avoided or sufficiently reduced by inherently safe design measures or safeguarding and complementary protective measures The information for use shall be an integral part of supply of lifting equipment Reference is made to ISO
127. d oscillations during use should be calculated and documented NOTE If some parts of the pedestal and attachments play a partalso in the structural integrity of the installation hull these parts may also have to pe checked fer cerrect seque gt i If not agreed otherwise the parts of the pedestal which play a part of the structural integrity of the installation hull structure should be fabricated according to NORSOK M 101 or Class requirements and parts of the pedestal that do not constitute a part of the structural integrity of the installation hull structure should be fabricated according to DNV 2 22 according to standard used for the installation structure Interface between pedestal and pedestal adapter should be located such that installation welds can be made without damaging machined flanges for slewing ring Table H 36 is an informative summary of different factors to be used on reactions in the foundation interface and may be used as a comparison between the different lifting appliances standards and the NORSOK N 001 standard for including the lifting appliance foundation actions in to the global and local structural analysis NORSOK standard Page 182 of 182199 Formatert Skrift Helvetica Formatert Skrift Helvetica Formatert Skrift Helvetica Formatert USA z Skrift 8 pkt Engelsk Formatert USA Skrift 8 pkt Engelsk F
128. d for both onboard and offboard lifting NOTE A calculation example is shown in Annex I C 15 2 2 Marking The marking tag and its means of attachment to the sling assembly required by A 7 4 6 shall be made of corrosion resistant material The total weight of the tag and its means of attachment to the sling assembly should have a mass of less than 70 g C 16 Lifting components Group R9 C 16 1 Chains C 16 1 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply Formater PunkimerkelENWAS Te z seas oe Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e EN 818 1 Short link chain for lifting purposes Safety Part 1 General conditions of acceptance 0 75 cm NORSOK standard Page 114 of 182199 e EN 818 2 Short link chain for lifting purposes Safety Part 2 Medium tolerance chain for chain slings Grade 8 C 16 2 Steel wire ropes C 16 2 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply e EN 12385 1 Steel wire ropes Safety Part 1 General requirements a Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e EN 12385 2 Steel wire ropes Safety Part 2 Definitions designation and classification Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e EN 12385 4 Steel wire ropes Safety Part 4 Stranded ropes for general lifting applications VEE C 16 2 2 Complementary requirements for steel wire ropes C 16 2 2 1 Marking The steel wire rope when supplied for installation on a winch drum
129. d lifting components Group G14 C 1 General The requirements of this annex apply in addition to the requirements stated in Clause 1 to Clause 5 The requirements given in this annex are applicable only for lifting accessories intended for onshore and onboard lifting unless offboard lifting is explicitly stated for particular groups or sub groups of this annex Lifting accessories for offboard lifting shall in addition comply with applicable requirements in Annex F Fixed or detachable dedicated lifting points mounted on an object e g machines unit structures etc are not subject to certification by an enterprise of competence according to NORSOK R 003 Annex H or R 005 Annex E unless they are intended for repeatedly detachment and reuse Requirements for fixed and detachable dedicated lifting points are given in Annex F Group F5 C 2 The groups of lifting accessories covered by this annex are listed in Table C 1 Group overview Table C 1 Group overview and test requirements Test Group Group type Sub groups requirements no see C 7 1 R1 Chain sling Sling with or without hook in the leg ends Single and multiple legs 1 R2 Fibre sling Flat woven webbing slings and round slings 1 R3 Steel wire Sling with or without hook in the leg ends Single and multiple legs 1 and 2 or 1 rope sling Grommets and 3 4 R4 Loose lifting Shackles 1 components Eye bolts Nuts 1
130. d load the majority of the weight may be taken by only three or even two of the legs with the remaining legs only serving to balance the load F 7 2 3 5 Dynamic amplifying factor DAF Standard dynamic amplifying factor to be used when designing lifted objects and their corresponding lifting accessoriesshallaccessories shall be Onshore lifts and onboard lifts on fixed or floating installations DAF 1 5 for WLL lt 50 tonnes NORSOK standard Page 148 of 182199 factors according to machinery directive and NMD For onboard lifting on bottom supported installations and for onshore lifting spreader beams lifting beams and lifting frames may be designed in accordance with the requirements of Annex C Clause C 12 1 unless actual DAF exceeds 1 2 The following dynamic factor shall be used for the design of lifting arrangement on objects for offboard lifting by offshore crane OEbeare Offroad lifts DAF 1 09 0 41 for WLL lt 50 tonnes F 2 1 _ Offbeard enbeardOff board on board and onshore lifts DAF 1 7 0 004 WLL for WLL gt 50 tonnes F 2 2 Figure F 4 shows typical DAF values for onshore onboard and offboard lifting For all lifts from 50 tonnes to 100 tonnes designed according to this NORSOK standard the dynamic facerfactor DAF shall be selected with a linear reduction from 1 5 at 50 tonnes to 1 3 at 100 tonnes 3 50 3 00 2 50 DAF DAF Offboard
131. d with flame arresters and spark arresters be installed in machinery house and cabin CA D G 11 23 Shutdown system When the offshore crane is out of service the following requirements shall be complied with e Upon single low gas alarm at any location on the installation an automatic isolation of the offshore crane within response time as specified in NORSOK S 001 shall be initiated e Inhibit start of offshore crane shall be initiated start of offshore crane shall not be possible before the area is cleared e The offshore crane is in this condition considered to be naturally ventilated When the offshore crane is in service the following requirements shall be complied with e Upon single low gas alarm at any location on the installation the offshore crane operator shall immediately take the crane into a safe position secure the load and make a manual shut down e Inhibit start of crane shall be initiated Start of offshore crane shall not be possible before the area is cleared e Upon confirmed gas detection at any location on the installation an automatic shutdown of the offshore crane within response time as specified in NORSOK S 001 shall be initiated The offshore crane is considered to be mechanically ventilated in this condition A Formatert Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Reference is made to NORSOK S 001 Table 2 Crane engine
132. de the lifeboat with the following control devices a start device to enable power supply to the launching and recovery appliance b stop device to disable power supply to the launching and recovery appliance c emergency stop for emergency purposes to stop all motions d mode selector e indication of selected mode f movement control devices for hoisting and lowering and if applicable any other movements All movement control devices shall be of the hold to run type i e return to neutral position when released All movements shall have variable speed control either stepless variable speed or variable speed in 2 or more defined steps The control station must be located so that the operator has a clear view to the life boat during all movements NORSOK standard Page 78 of 182199 A 3 3 3 Winch brakes Primary and backup brakes shall be operative as described in 5 7 6 and A 1 10 A 3 3 4 Motion limiters Motion limiters for the upper and lower position of the lifeboat shall be provided in accordance with A 1 9 The motion limiter for the upper position shall stop the movement at the level for boarding the lifeboat Prior to reaching the upper stop position the hoisting speed shall be automatically reduced by at least 50 A 3 3 5 Backup release system Operation of the backup release system described in A 3 4 7 3 shall be possible in the mode for installation and maintenance A 3 3 6 Secondary independent power and c
133. der operated hydraulic drawwork including top drive DDM Subgroup Drawing Ref Equipment description Hydraulic lifting cylinders Main function Hydraulic cylinders for lifting of travelling yoke DDM and drill string load Typical names Ram rig cylinders Lifting cylinders Lifting equip ment Yes No Accumulators Accumulators for connection to the lifting cylinders and hoisting system Ram rig accumulators Travelling yoke Structure connected to the cylinder rods and guided by the derrick structure The yoke include sheaves for drilling line mud hoses hydraulic hoses and electrical cables Travelling yoke Yoke sheaves Wire sheaves for main hoisting of drill string Yoke sheaves Wire rope Wire rope for DDM suspension via wire sheaves in travelling yoke and fixed ends anchorage in deck structure Hoisting wire rope Ram rig wire rope Wire rope anchor Anchor points for wire rope Attached directly to deck structure or via equalizer mechanisms Wire rope anchorage Derrick drilling machine DDM See Group D 1 DDM Top drive Other equipment shown in drawing but not included in Group D 1 8 Derrick Drilling tower structure for guiding the travelling yoke Support for derrick mounted equipment Derrick Drilling tower Ram rig No Guide track and dolly Dolly for guiding the DDM NOTE New designs shall be classified according to defin
134. ding harness 1 C 3 Structure of requirements C 3 1 General requirements General requirements are references to standards or other annexes listed under each group and sub group of lifting accessories General requirements are applicable for design materials fabrication manufacturing processes tolerances and testing information for use and maintenance manufacturer s certificate marking C 3 2 Complementary requirements aa Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved NORSOK standard Page 101 of 482199 Complementary requirements apply in addition to the requirements given in references under general requirements In some cases when particularly stated the complementary requirements except or replace requirements given in references under general requirements Complementary requirements are stated with reference to design a Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 materials Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved fabrication manufacturing processes tolerances and testing 0 75 cm information for use and maintenance manufacturer s certificate marking C 4 Marking It should be noted that legal marking may be required in addition to the marking requirements of this annex e g CE marking according to European directives where such directives apply C 5 Design Lifting accessories shall be designed to operate in a minimum operational temperature of 20 C unle
135. ding to at least Medium according to DNV OSS 308 or equivalent should be applied ref 4 14 A 1 2 Group overview Table A 1 lists the groups of launching and recovery appliances covered by this annex Table A 1 Groups of launching and recovery appliances Launching and recovery appliances for life saving equipment Groups Evacuation equipment Rescue equipment A 1 A 2 A 3 f A 7 Free fall Lifeboats Escape Personnel lifeboats launched chutes transfer by falls carriers anda winch A 1 3 Structural and mechanical strength proof of competence Structural and mechanical strength of launching and recovery appliances for life saving equipment their structural members machinery ropes rope reeving components and means of connection shall be documented by performing proof calculations in accordance with the principles of the limit state method as described in 5 7 Structural and mechanical strength of the means of connection which are integral parts of the life savinglifesaving equipment and their anchorage to the Hife savinglifesaving equipment shall be documented in the same way The proof of competence shall be performed for the ULS and the ALS In addition fatigue shall be checked in accordance with NORSOK N 003 and N 004 for load cycles induced by waves and wind A 1 4 Loads and operational limitations A 1 4 1 Operational limitations Launching and recovery appliances shall be designed to be inst
136. ds All structural members of an elevator including suspension points doors hinges and locking elements shall be designed to withstand the design load s in accordance with ISO 13535 API Spec 8C Means shall be provided to operate the elevator without the need to be in contact with pinch points All pinned and bolted connections e g in hinges and suspension points shall be secured against unintended loosening Elevator suspension points shall be designed with means to prevent the elevator links to disconnect from the suspension points These means shall not be loaded by the elevator links when the load is moved from vertical to horizontal position unless they are designed for the horizontal WLL in accordance with ISO 13535 _ API Spec 8C Elevators shall be designed to facilitate verification e g by visual observation that the size and profile of the load is compatible with the corresponding inside size and shape of the elevator Elevators with inserts shall be designed in a way to easily verify that the correct inserts for the actual pipe dimension are used Elevators with inserts shall have means to prevent inserts from falling out of the elevator C 17 3 2 2 Locking securing and indication The locking mechanisms on elevators shall in addition to the locking element s have a securing device and an indication device The locking mechanism including locking element s securing device and indication device shall be p
137. duction 33 1 Scope 55 3 Terms definitions and abbreviatio Terms and definitions Safety 4 2 Fitness for use De 4 3 Reliability and availability Maintenance uality management system sk assessment 3 Strength and stability classification 5 9 High risk applications _ 5 10 Power systems rength proportion B dG 5 11 Electrotechnical equipment 5 12 Non electrotechnicalequipment ss E 5 15 Emergency systems 5 16 Communication gE thnetatb tell deeb ache 5 18 Hydraulics Annex A Normative Launching and recovery appliances for life saving equipment 34 Annex B Normative Material handling principles 92 Annex C Normative Lifting accessories and lifting components Group G 4 100 Annex D Normative Lifting equipment in drilling area 125 NORSOK standard Page 1 of 182199 Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Formatert Feltkode endret Formatert Formatert Feltkode
138. during assembly and operation or derailing of wire rope Separable parts shall be secured in accordance with 5 4 9 C 16 9 2 2 Information for use and maintenance Rated capacity shall be described in detail and include illustrations to explain line pull and head pull Maintenance instructions must give clear and unambiguous details on how to measure groove wear on sheaves and bearing wear Reference marks on sheaves for wear measurement must be illustrated Required intervals for wear measurements and discard criteria shall be given C 16 9 2 3 Marking Sheaves shall be permanently marked with reference marks either stamped or embedded on the sheave circumference for measuring groove wear depth The rated capacity to be marked on both manually operated pulleys and pulley blocks hook blocks C 16 10 Ferrule terminations C 16 10 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e EN 13411 3 Termination for steel wire ropes Safety Part 3 Ferrules and ferrule securing aide Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 0 75 cm C 16 10 2 Complementary requirements for ferrule terminations Ferrule terminations shall be tapered in the wire end C 16 11 Wire rope grips C 16 11 1 General requirements None C 16 11 2 Complementary requirements for wire rope grips C 16 11 2 1 Design Wire rope grips shall be of a type with two gripping surfaces U bolt clamps
139. e where Yam and Ye is given in F 7 2 3 7 and F 7 2 3 6 respectively Note When ordering slings it should be noted to the manufacturer that end termination factor is included in the calculations F 7 3 4 Master link and top link Required master link and top link to be selected from supplier catalogue on the basis of minimum breaking load MBLm 2 WLL DAF DF Yrm F 10 F 7 4 Marking of lifting sling sets Lifting sling sets shall be marked with the following information Manufacturer s identifying mark Numbers and or letters identifying the sling with the certificate required by Annex C The working load limit according to this standard Any legal marking e g CE marking where Machinery Directive applies Offboard lift Reference to a rigging design drawing with specified sling angles for the lift eeeeee The marking tag and its means of attachment to the sling assembly required shall be made of corrosion resistant material The total weight of the tag and its means of attachment to the sling assembly should have a mass of less than 70 g F 7 5 Design load for lifting lugs and supporting structure Determination of design load Pip DF Pp 0s u F 11 Lifting lugs shall be designed with a minimum lateral load of 0 05 Pp 3 deg offset acting at the centre of the shackle bow Reference is given to Annex J for proof of competence for lifting lugs F 7 6 Alternative selection of lifting
140. e rrick drilling machin e DDM D 2 Cylinder operate d hydrauli c draw work RAM rig includin g top drive de rrick drilling machine DDM D 3 Vertica I pipe handli ng VPH machin e D 4 Horizo ntal to vertical HTV pipe handli ng machin e includi ng catwal k machin e D 5 X mas tree BOP carrie r Table D 1 Lifting equipment in the drilling area D 6 Miscellaneous lifting equipment in the drilling area Lifting accesso ries DrillingSpecial designed lifting lt SDLA D 7 Slettede celler Sammensliatte celler Slettede celler Slettede celler Slettede celler Formatert Skrift 10 pkt Ikke Fet Formatert Engelsk Storbritannia NORSOK standard Page 126 of 182199 Subgroup Drawing Ref Table D 2 Group D 1 Conventional drawwork including top drive DDM Equipment description Drawwork Main function Winch to lift drill string load through several parts of wire rope in crown block and travelling block Typical names Drawwork Lifting equip ment Yes No Fastline wheel Wire sheave for wire coming from drawwork Fast rotation Fastline wheel Crown block Multi sheaved wire block mounted in upper part of derrick Crown block Deadline wheel Wire sheave for wire entering the dead line anchor small oscilla
141. e 1 or Zone 2 according to EN 1127 1 and applicable parts of EN 13463 series as relevant for the hazardous area classification Electrotechnical equipment mounted externally exposed to potential explosive atmosphere on lifting appliances located in non hazardous areas shall as a minimum be classified for use in hazardous area Zone 2 see NORSOK S 001 Crane boom movements in zone 1 area require zone equipmenti equipment in boom for parts of the boom entering zone 1 during operation Area classification shall be in accordance with IEC 61892 all parts 5 3 3 HVAC HVAC in enclosed spaces of lifting appliances shall be in accordance with relevant parts of NORSOK S 001 and NORSOK S 002 if applicable The HVAC system shall serve the crane cabin and the engine room The engine room will either comprise of equipment for electrical hydraulic drive diesel hydraulic drive or all electrical drive The crane shall have local HVAC control The HVAC system shall be suitable for operation as per Area Classification The following minimum requirements e The part of the HVAC system serving the cabin shall be designed to provide a comfortable working environment for the offshore crane operator The heating cooling system shall be able to keep an adjustable inside temperature within the range of 15 C to 25 C for all ambient air temperatures for which the offshore crane has been designed NORSOK standard Page 21 of 182199 e
142. e and installation facilities life savinglifesaving operations i e evacuation or rescue Easily understandable operations instruction and permanent sign plates in accordance with EN 12644 2 and IMO Resolution A 760 18 as amended by IMO resolution MSC 82 70 shall be posted at the launching station A 1 14 Testing A 1 14 1 General Launching and recovery appliances together with means of connection and their anchorage in life saving equipment shall undergo testing as specified in the following sub clauses to prove that the requirements given in this NORSOK standard are met Testing is required to be performed in the following phases Prototype tests Il Production tests lll Installation tests Prototype tests are intended to demonstrate that certain design requirements are met and they are often of a destructive nature Prior to prototype testing the equipment shall be inspected to document that it is built in accordance with fabrication and layout drawings for the equipment Production tests and installation tests are intended to be performed on each individual produced unit in order to demonstrate a certain quality or performance Production tests are to be performed at the manufacturer s site prior to shipment to the final installation Installation tests are to be performed after being installed at the final installation The time and place of testing shall be in accordance with Table A 13 i e either as production test
143. e document shall as a minimum contain the following elements a definition of all relevant documents for transmittal to the authorities b basis for location of offshore cranes and other main cranes c visibilityline of sight from crane drivers position to lay down areas_and lifting routes and exceptions if d line cdrsyght from crane drivers position to load handling area at supply vessel and lifting routes de description of handling with offshore cranes to and from the supply vessels and internally on the topsides e f listing of the most common lifting operations including frequency of these g description of safe lifting routes for the most common lifting operations gh the most faveurablefavorable location and arrangement of crane cabin due to i ae height above the most elevated crane handling area loading unloading of vessels blind zones man machine interface Wi description of maximum allowable lifting heights coverage and restrictions i j requirements for dropped object protection k description of crane outfitting related to safety alarms communication lightning etc l description of situations where the crane booms shall be brought to the rest position and the frequency of these Bm description of weather constraints waves and wind an evaluation of concurrent crane operations on pipe deck NORSOK standard Page 97 of 182199 jo description of crane operations involving transportat
144. e following classification e Working cycles Classification of U e Average displacement Classification of D e Load spectrum Classification of Q e Number of accelerations Classification of P 5 9 High risk applications Lifting equipment intended to be used for the following high risk applications represent an increased severity of possible harm or extended harm in case of failure a Lifting of loads moving the lifting appliance or parts of it e g the boom with or without load over pressurized or critical equipment see Annex B 3 3 of this standard b Lifting of personnel c Lifting of certain loads that may represent severe consequences such as e g explosives flammables dangerous chemicals or pressurised equipment To be published NORSOK standard Page 26 of 182199 Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk og latinsk tekst Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm ma Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert nnrykk Venstre 0 cm Hengende 1 5 cm Tabulatorstopp 1 25 cm Left Ikke pa 1 5 cm Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Lifting equipment for high risk applications shall be designed in order to reduce the probabilities and consequences of possible harm For lif
145. e with the manufacturer s instructions Mechanical completion and commissioning should follow relevant parts of NORSOK Z 007 Upon final installation lifting appliances and launching appliances for life saving equipment shall be tested in accordance with the technical requirements of DNV Standard for cerificationCertification of lifting appliances No 2 22 Ch 2 Section 2 Materials and fabrication and relevant partssections for testing unless stated otherwise in the annexes of NORSOK Z 007this standard 5 24 Corrosion protection 5 24 1 General In selecting of materials and combination of materials used in lifting equipment due consideration shall be given to environmental conditions with regards to risk of corrosion 5 24 2 Surface preparation and protective coating Surface preparation and protective coating shall be in accordance with NORSOK M 501 and or ISO 12944 i G Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm NORSOK standard Page 31 of 182199 5 24 3 Bolting All bolts and nuts shall be made corrosion resistant either by stainless steel material quality galvanizing metalizing or effective surface preparation and protective coating in accordance with 5 24 2 All external bolt connections up to and including 10 mm diameter should be stainless steel A4 quality Exceptions are bolts and nuts used on components subject to painting and bolts used in special high yield
146. eans of connection and other lifting components Standardised metallic components Standardised components such as chains shackles links forged steel components and forged hooks shall be of grade 8 complying withaccording to Annex C and the following standards additional requirements Ghains EN 848 2 e _Forged steelcompenents charpy v notch tested to minimum 42J at 20 C e shackles of grade 8 according to EN 1677 1_should be used aaa Formatert Normal Punktmerket o Forged heeks with latch EN 4677 2 Niva 1 Justert ved 0 cm Innrykk e Links EN 1677 4 ved 0 63 cm These components shall be selected with a breaking force resulting from the following equations whichever gives the greatest breaking force BF gt M g 6 A 15 BF 2M 8 6 V Vn Yr A 16 NORSOK standard Page 58 of 182199 where BF isthe minimum required breaking force KN for the selection of components M is the mass of hoist load tonnes for the particular load combination g 9 81 m s is the gravity constant isthe dynamic factor for the particular load combination Yp is the partial safety factor for the particular load combination Yn is the risk coefficient i e 1 0 or 1 5 as applicable in accordance with the particular load combination Yr 1 8 is the component resistance factor For hook shaped components made of steel forgings the proof of competence may alternatively be performed in accorda
147. early visible from the control station of the lifting appliances that handles loads to and from such areas Remotely operated lifting operations where no personnel are exposed to suspended loads when the load is automatically connected and disconnected can be performed when supervised observed by a camera The working areas shall be designed to withstand the loads that will be placed in the area Working areas and lay down areas shall normally be located in a safe zone and provided with heavy duty barriers to prevent damage to adjacent equipment On floating installations attachment points for sea fastening of cargo shall be provided Lifting appliances and their working areas shall be located so as to minimise the risk of load handling impacts and dropped object damage to systems and structures Information regarding the extension and weight capacities of working and lay down areas shall be available to the operator of the crane in use Lay down areas shall be designed such that the signaller and slinger easily can escape to a safe position On offshore installations hose loading stations and rescue boat shall be visible from the offshore crane cabins if the rescue boat is to be launched by offshore crane Walls close to working areas and lay down areas should as far as possible have clean surfaces without obstructions e g flood lights cable trays piping etc B 3 2 Bumpers and protective structures Suitable bumpers for impact pr
148. eboat and releasing stored energy to the actuator is considered as safety related parts of control system and shall fulfil a required performance level PLr equal to e in accordance with ISO 13849 1 e The manually operated locking device shall be arranged for rapid unlocking by a single operation at any time In order to prevent unintended operation the locking device shall be sealed It shall be possible to visually check the position of the locking device from the operator s position The locking device shall be clearly marked with conditions for unlocking NOTE The manually operated locking device is intended to be unlocked only in a real evacuation situation and at safe distance from sea level during training When the condition for release is detected the control system shall initiate movement of the actuators to open both release mechanisms within 1 s after detection of seaborne lifeboat NORSOK standard Page 80 of 182199 A 3 4 7 3 Backup activation system For the event of malfunctioning of the primary activation system a manually operated backup activation system for opening both release mechanisms simultaneously shall be provided The backup release system shall be available for both operational modes The activation system for the backup release system shall be operated from within the boat and shall require two deliberate actions by the operator Operation of the backup activation system shall only be possible whe
149. ed by the vertical and the transverse direction of the last sheave or drum whichever is the last contact point with the structure of the lifting appliiaacseappliance Sidelead angle is caused by the lateral displacement of the hook load 3 1 50 significant wave height the average wave height measured from trough to crest of the highest one third of individual wave heights occurring in a period of 20 min 3 1 51 test specific operation of lifting equipment with or without a defined load in order to determine whether the lifting equipment is suitable for use Formatert Skrift Arial Formatert TermNum Automatisk tegnavstand mellom latinske og 3 1 52 asiatiske tegn J uster mellomrom test load mellom asiatisk tekst og tall specified load that the lifting equipment shall withstand within the manufacturer s specified limits without resulting in permanent deformation or other defects NOTE Thereby confirming that the design materials and manufacture comply with specification and statutory requirements 3 1 53 working area vertical projection of all possible load positions 3 1 54 working load limit WLL maximum load that a lifting accessory is designed to lift at a specific configuration NORSOK standard Page 14 of 182199 3 2 Abbreviations ALARP as low as reasonable practicable ALS accident limite state ATEX Atmosph res Explosibles CE Conformit Europ enne EMC electromagnetic compatibility
150. ed in accordance with EN 15011 taking into account the additional design criteria given in G 43 For bridge and gantry cranes used in the drilling area the requirements of Annex D also apply G 10 2 Machinery Hoist and travelling machinery shall have completely enclosed and sealed gearboxes with oil bath lubrication NORSOK standard Page 162 of 182199 Cranes on floating installations and vessels shall be furnished with rack and pinion drives and parking brakes for travelling G 10 3 Brakes Brake adjustment mechanisms shall be protected against inadvertent use G 10 4 Access The crane shall be designed with facilities for easy inspection and maintenance Permanent access platforms shall be provided for inspection and maintenance of electrical motors main electrical cabinets and hoist machinery Grease lubrication points shall be centralized where possible and accessible from walkways and access platforms G 10 5 Weather protection Machinery on cranes permanently located outdoor shall be protected against exposure to rain snow wind and sun G 10 6 BOP and X mas tree cranes For BOP and X mas tree cranes see D 5 G 10 7 Anti collision protection Where there is a risk of collision between cranes running on the same rails system for detection motion limiters proximity warning and automatic ramp down and stop of relevant motions shall be installed G 11 Offshore cranes Group G5 G 11 1 Size and capacity
151. ed performance level Safety related parts of control systems for all main motions i e hoisting lowering luffing slewing knuckling and telescoping shall conform to ISO 13849 1 with the specified performance levels in accordance with Table K 4 Table K 4 Required performance level Performance level PLr High risk class dore High risk class II e K 4 2 Other protective measures As a general rule independent back up motion limiters of diverted technology shall be used for each motion of the main function of the crane i e travelling hoisting lowering luffing telescoping knuckling and if applicable and where the motions are limited Movable lifting equipment for which their stability and leveling depend on ground conditions shall be equipped with a crane level limiter connected to the crane level indicator which gives an immediate warning at the control station and an automatic stop of the main crane motion if the level indication exceeds the limit for safe operation Reversal of the motions to a safe position shall not be inhibited Cranes with various options for rigging of the hoist load the boom lift or the configuration of counterweights outriggers etc shall be equipped with an automatic detection system which gives feedback to the control and safety system of the rigging configuration The automatic detection system shall ensure that the setting of the control and safety system comply with the actual c
152. ed toift the rescue boatrelated ref A 7 4 2 service to which the elastic include links or other components permanently attached to the elastic pennant Formatert Normal Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp 1 5 cm Left Formatert Normal Formatert Skrift Formatert Normal Ikke legg til avstand mellom avsnitt med samme stil Formatert Skrift Formatert Normal Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp 1 5 cm Left Formatert Normal Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp 1 5 cm Left Formatert Engelsk USA iio ee eee ele ee eee alee een hie neal eet ee an ate eee Soli eee cea teat eee EEEE A 7 4 89 Calculation example An informative example of how to select diameter and length of the elastic pennant is given in Annex I A 7 5 Instructions for use of elastic pennants Elastic pennants shall be accompanied with instructions for use as specified in Annex A and Annex C as appropriate of EN 1492 4 In addition the following instructions shall be stated NORSOK standard Page 88 of 182199 Formatert Engelsk USA Formatert Engelsk USA Formatert Engelsk USA Formatert Skrift Calibri 11 pkt Skriftfarge Egendefinert farge RGB 31 73 125 Engelsk USA Formatert Engelsk USA Formatert Normal Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabul
153. ee fall This includes skidding track means of connection release system and securing arrangement A 2 2 4 Secondary means of launching The secondary means of launching is an alternative lifeboat launching system normally based on gravity lowering or power lowering by a lifting appliance This includes a winch and fall system with its machinery and control system as well as means of connection release mechanism release system and securing arrangement The purpose of the secondary means of launching is not to launch the lifeboat in an emergency situation A 2 2 5 Means of retrieval The means of retrieval is a lifting appliance designed for retrieval of the lifeboat from sea to its stowed position on the host facility The means of retrieval is normally the same mechanism as the secondary means of launching A 2 2 6 Hang off relief arrangement NORSOK standard Page 72 of 482199 The hang off relief arrangement is lifting accessories and means of connection intended for keeping the lifeboat in the stowed position when the lifeboat is disconnected from the primary means of launching the secondary means of launching and the means of retrieval A 2 3 Rated capacity When performing the proof of competence in accordance with A 1 the rated capacity for the different mechanisms shall be taken as follows e primary means of launching fully loaded lifeboat cae e secondary means of launching 1 1 x fully loaded lifeboat e means of ret
154. ementary to the requirements in EN 13001 2 The ALS loads are entered into load combinations C2 and C8 in the above mentioned tables with partial safety factors set to Yp 1 0 NORSOK standard Page 38 of 182199 Categorie Table A 3 Load combinations for Group A 1 Launching appliances for free fall lifeboats Lifeboat in stowed position and launched by primary means of launching Loads Reference Load combinations A Formatert tabell Load combinations B Load combinations C s of loads EN NORSOK Partia A1 A2 A4 Partia B1 B2 B4 B5 Partia C2 C3 C7 13001 2 R 002 l l l safety safety safety factor factor factor s S S Regular Gravitation Mass of the 4 2 2 1 1 oF 1 oF 1 1 1 1 acceleration launching appliance Impacts Mass of the 4 2 2 2 1 34 1 3 1 22 1 3 1 1 1 1 hoist load NOTE 1 Masses of 4 2 2 3 1 22 M 1 16 D D launching appliance and hoist load travelling on uneven surface Acceleratio Masses of the 4 2 2 4 1 34 Os 1 22 Os n from launching drives other appliance and than hoist hoist load drive Displacements 4 2 2 5 t 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Occasiona Environmental Wind loads 4 2 3 1 Table A 2 1 22 1 1 1 1 1 16 1 actions Wave 1 22 1 1 1 1 NOTE 4 induced accelerations
155. ements of the suspension or foundation 1 34 1 25 1 68 Main elements of the suspension or foundation 1 34 1 10 1 48 Other structural elements of the suspension or foundation Material resistance factor for check against yield strength for structural steel shall be see NORSOK N 004 e For lifting lugs including structural parts and full penetration welds Yrm 1 15 Aime Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e For fillet welds partial penetration welds and bolted connections Yam 1 3 ae ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved A cm H 4 Design criteria H 4 1 Design loads Design loads for foundations and suspensions shall be applied in accordance with 5 7 or standards referred to within this annex whichever gives the most stringent requirement H 4 2 Inclination angles Foundations and suspensions used onshore shall be designed for a minimum inclination from the horizontal of 1 in all directions Foundations and suspensions used offshore shall be designed for a minimum inclination from the horizontal according Table H 3 Table H 3 Inclination angle Location Inclination angle Bottom fixed installations tension leg platforms jack ups and submersibles fixed Semi submersible jack up floating Barges of length less than 4 times breadth Ships and vessels having shipshape hull properties NORSOK standard Page 175 of 182199 The resulting maximum inclination from heel and trim of the
156. emergency stop Emergency stop control device shall be arranged for rapid and unobstructed activation and shall be located at the right hand side of the operator G 11 14 Location of MOPs manual control MOPs manual control device shall be arranged for rapid and unobstructed activation and shall be located at the left hand side of the crane operator G 11 15 AOPS simulation and testing The characteristics of the AOPS system shall be analysed and documented by a simulation programme The programme shall provide realistic representation of main elements that influence the AOPS response time and forces in an overload situation e g crane stiffness wire rope elasticity hydraulic and electric components moments of inertia from winches and gears damping of hydraulic systems load excitation etc The response time of the AOPS shall be verified by testing The AOPS system shall have a built in test facility which enables the system to be tested automatically by the system at start up or by the crane operator at suitable intervals without physical changes of the crane The status of the test shall be displayed to the crane operator During testing it shall not be possible to operate the crane The test shall include time measurementefmeasurement of system activation from overload signal is initiated to the AOPS power control load control element is fully activated G 11 16 Hook velocities Formatert Skrift 11 pkt
157. ence of a hazardous event and the possibilities of avoiding the harm The exposure to a hazard is influenced by need for access to the hazard zone time spent in the hazard zone number of persons exposed frequency of access 2252 The occurrence of a hazardous event is influenced by a reliability and other statistical data b incident and accident history c risk comparison The possibilities of avoiding the harm are influenced by NORSOK standard Page 18 of 182199 personal skills how quickly the hazardous situation is developing awareness of risk possibility of escape 4 11 5 Evaluation of risks Risk evaluation shall be carried out to determine if risk reduction is required If risk reduction is required then appropriate risk reduction measures shall be selected and applied in accordance with 4 12 followed by repeated risk assessment As a part of this iterative process the designer shall check whether additional hazards are created or other risks are increased when new measures are applied If additional hazards do occur they shall be added to the list of identified hazards analysed and evaluated For standardised lifting equipment which is fully covered by the standards referred to herein and which fully complies with the requirements stated without additional hazards the acceptance criteria in this NORSOK standard apply For non standardised lifting equipment or standardised lifting equipment whic
158. eneral recommendation is to design the connection between lifting lug and supporting structure as a shear connection Out of plane loading should be minimized For welded lifting lugs through thickness properties must be documented in cases where it is impractical to avoid stresses in thickness direction e g by use of z quality material or by additional ultrasonic testing for lamination An alternative to avoid lamination problems is to slot the plate through the horizontal flange and weld directly onto the underlying vertical web plates This applies specially to heavy loaded lifting lugs The stress level locally at the base of the lifting lug may be reduced by adding a fillet weld onto a part pen or full pen weld Bolted connections shall be minimum M12 size and should be designed to transfer the load e by shear without considering the friction mobilized in the connection lt Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e or alternatively by vertically orientated bolts in tension eee ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 13 cM Examples shown in Figure J 2 and Figure J 3 WELDED BOLTED This option requires Z steel or additional lamination check M12 bolts or larger Number of bolts as required Alternative welding of part pen w fillet mark up Figure J 2 Welded bolted connections NORSOK standard Page 198 of 182199 SY NAAR SS Increasing the weld area Not recommended Alw
159. er of personnel and goods lifts The size and capacity of these lifts shall be adjusted to the size weight of the largest heaviest items to be transported by the lift but the minimum capacity shall be 1 500 kg The personnel and goods lift shall give access to the main transportation routes at all deck levels Good access to main workshop stores shall be given priority Lifting of equipment of more than 25 kg shall be done by means of mechanical lifting If lifting or transporting of loads weighing more than 25 kg is required there shall be enough space for the use Of lifting and transportation gear Permanent arrangemenis_ e gmonorails lifting fugs equipment shall be installed for material handling of equipment objects gt 200 kg and which require regular maintenance if it is not reachable for a fork lift truck or other movable lifting appliances Minimum requirements for material handling of equipment are given in Table B 1 Table B 1 Requirements for material handling Weight Maintenance interval Yearly lt 2 years 2 years to 5 years gt 5 years A 25 to 200 kg 200 kg to 2 tonnes gt 2 tonnes Key A Permanently installed lifting arrangementsequipment e g menerailscranes or suspensions such as runway beams pad eyes for assembly of hoists B A description material handling plan for material handling of equipment with use of temporary lifting equipment The plan shall include documentation of structural cap
160. er scoop arm Monkey tail No if guiding only 4 Mouse hole An opening in the drill floor near the rotary Mouse hole table but between the rotary table and the Yes if V door that enables rapid connections while mobile drilling May be a hole with a fixed bottom ata certain depth or have a mobile bottom to lift No if the tubulars stored in the hole fixed Table D 5 Group D 4 Horizontal to vertical HTV pipe handling machines Subgroup Equipment description Pipe rack crane Main function To lift and transport tubulars from pipe deck area to TFM or directly to drill floor Typical names Pipe rack crane Pipe deck pipe handler PDPH Pipe handling crane Knucle boom crane Triplex crane Dino Lifting equip ment Yes No Tubular feeding machines TFM To transport tubulars from storage area to drill floor vicinity or setback area Horizontal transportation or inclined at an angle Tubular feeding machine Tubular shuttle Catwalk machine Tubular chute Riser chute Yes when vertical motion of load No when horizontal motion only HTV arms To transport tubulars from a horizontal or inclined position at the TFM to a vertical position at drill floor area or setback area Eagle Eagle light Yes NORSOK standard Page 131 of 182199 Table D 6 Group D 5 X mas tree BOP handling systems Subgroup Equipment description BOP cranes Ma
161. es B C D and E and their dedicated lifting sets are to be considered as group F5 F 6 Heavy lift units and units for subsea lifting Group F4 Heavy lift units offshore and units for subsea lifting and their dedicated lifting sets shall be designed in accordance with DNV OS H101 DNV Rules for the planning and execution of marine operations January 1996 as amended Part 1 Chapter 3 and 4 Part 2 Chapter 5 or ISO 19901 6 Specific requirements for offshore structures Part 6 Marine operations or other recognised guidelines standards such as e g GL Noble Denton Guidelines for Marine Lifting Operations 0027 ND Heavy lift units onshore and their dedicated lifting sets shall be designed in accordance with relevant parts of DNV Rules for the planning and execution of marine operations January 1996 as amended Part 1 Chapter 3 and 4 Part 2 Chapter 5 or ISO 19901 6 Specific requirements for offshore structures Part 6 Marine operations or other recognised guidelines standards such as e g GL Noble Denton Guidelines for Marine Lifting Operations 0027 ND Units for subsea lifting shall be analysed in accordance with DNV RP H103 which gives guidance for modelling and analysis of marine operations including lifting through wave zone and lowering of objects in deep water to landing on seabed OTE Units for Sub Seasubsea lifting that are planned for repetitive lifting operations may be designed in accordance with the Formatert Skrift 8
162. es are made to the said NMD Regulation only those requirements of the referred secionssections for launching or recovery are not within the scope of this standard For lifting accessories used in launching and recovery appliances for life saving equipment reference is also made to Annex C For cranes used as launching and recovery appliances for life saving equipment reference is also made to Annex G NORSOK standard Page 34 of 182199 e the most stringent requirements for structural and mechanical strength apply Se i 0 75 cm Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved nummerering Formatert ngen punktmerking eller Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt ee The requirement for efficient hand gear for recovery of lifeboats and rescue boats given in the LSA code section 6 1 2 6 is not comprised by this NORSOK standard Mechanical joining devices of hinged type shall not be used as hang off equipment or as means of connection belonging to any kind of life saving equipment or launching recovery appliances for such equipment NOTE Mechanical joining devices are often referred to as connecting links Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt A verification level correspon
163. etween the two releases for loading conditions corresponding to empty lifeboat and 110 of the capacity see A 2 3 of the primary means of launching whichever is the most unfavourableunfavorable e the energy source is capable of producing an actuator force of at least two times the force measured in prototype test No A4 e itis not possible to open the release mechanism by operating only one of the control devices e each of the two control devices returns to neutral position after activation Test No A8 Dynamic overload test mechanisms for positioning the lifeboat during launching sequence prior to release Any mechanisms used for positioning the lifeboat during the launching sequence prior to release shall be tested as follows With the launching appliance in an upright position corresponding to no heel or trim of the host installation a load equal to 120 of the rated capacity for the primary means of launching shall be suspended from the suspension point of the primary means of launching resting at the skidding arrangement or other mechanism in a realistic manner simulating load action from the weight of the lifeboat The mechanism shall move the load from one extreme position to the next extreme position and back again using machinery and power source similar to that of the final installation The test shall be repeated with the launching appliance inclined to 17 in the most unfavourable directions of heel and trim The same te
164. evice 3 1 2 agreed term used when operating conditions or other design parameters are to be specified and an agreement has to be reached NORSOK standard Page 9 of 182199 NOTE The parties of the agreement are the manufacturer of the equipment in question and the company s technical responsible for operation of the installation in question The term is used in different contexts e g unless otherwise agreed to be agreed as agreed etc 3 1 3 availability availability of an item to be in a state to perform a required function under given conditions at a given instant of time or in average over a given time interval assuming that the required external resources are provided 3 1 4 breaking load breaking force the maximum load reacedreached during a static tensile test to destruction of a lifting component or lifting accessories Destruction is understood as actual breakage or failiurefailure to sustain a load due parts disconnecting as result of deformation NOTE In this standard both thermsterms breaking load and breaking force are used having the same meaning S Formatert Innrykk Venstre 0 cm F rste linje 0 cm 3 1 5 breaking load test a static tensile test with the purpose of determining the actual breaking load breakdingbreaking force of a lifting component or lifting accessories in order to verify a specified minimum value 3 1 6 can verbal form used for
165. f high risks Movable lifting equipment which depends on stability for safe operation such as lorry cranes mobile cranes and crawler cranes shall be calculated for rigid body stability in accordance ISO 4305 The risk coefficient yn shall be multiplied with the P and F values to be taken into consideration in the stability calculations in clause 3 2 of ISO 4305 K 3 1 Duplicating components Duplicated components shall be loaded during normal use and shall withstand the load impacts if there is a single failure in one of the components Duplicated components shall have proof of competence for two loading conditions as follows Regular loading condition where all the components operate as a whole sharing the load Exceptional loading condition taking into account a failure of any single component of the mechanism and the resulting dynamic impact on the remaining parts The increased risk coefficient ref K 3 2 need not to be applied for duplicated components Mechanisms including their drive systems and energy converters shall be fully or partly duplicated dependent on the high risk class see Table K 2 Systems of duplicated components shall have means for load equalization between the components during normal operation Load equalization of duplicated components shall be monitored and controlled e g by synchronization hydraulic electric control system or by a compensating device Safe transfer of loadings to the remainin
166. ferences apply EN 1492 1 Textile slings Safety Part 1 Flat woven webbing slings made of man made fibres for general purpose use EN 1492 2 Textile slings Safety Part 2 Roundslings made of man made fibres for general EN 1492 4 Textilepalnpgse Sagety Part 4 Lifting slings for general service made from natural and man made fibre ropes C 9 2 Complementary requirements fibre slings C 9 2 1 Design Lifting slings made from fibre ropes shall have eyes with thimbles Mechanical joining devices of hinged type shall not be used in fibre sling assemblies NOTE Mechanical joining devices are often referred to as connecting links C 9 2 2 Manufacturer s certificate No complementary requirements NORSOK standard Page 104 of 182199 C 9 2 3 Information for use and maintenance For the purpose of complying with this NORSOK standard the information described in EN 1492 1 Annex D shall be provided in the manufacturer s instructions for flat woven webbing slings For the purpose of complying with this NORSOK standard the information described in EN 1492 2 Annex C shall be provided in the manufacturer s instructions for roundslings For the purpose of complying with this NORSOK standard the information described in EN 1492 4 Annex B and Annex C shall be provided in the manufacturer s instructions for flat fibre rope slings The minimum contact diameter for connection to shackles links or hooks and when the slin
167. for baskets shall be performed in accordance with Annex F as described for group F 5 taking into account e the weight W specified in Annex F is the maximum gross mass tonnes corresponding to the sum of lt Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e tara weight tonnes of the basket lt Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e pay load tonnes of the basket 0 75 cm e the dynamic amplification factor DAF shall be as specified for onboard lifting in Annex F Formatert nnrykk F rste linje 0 cm Punktmerket Niva 1 J ustert For the purpose of calculating the structural strength of the basket floor an evenly distributed load may be Vedi 0 25 os innrykk ved 075 0 assumed Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm The floor in the basket shall be drained Any door in the side of the basket shall have a locking mechanism to prevent inadvertent opening The door with hinges and locking mechanism shall be designed to withstand a load corresponding to 25 of the max gross mass without permanent deformation when applied in the most severe position Hinges shall have grease nipples Baskets shall have pockets for transport with fork lift trucks For aluminium baskets the resistances and resistance factors for materials members and connecting devices shall be taken from EN 1999 1 1 C 13 1 2 2 Materials Materials for steel structures shall be selected in ac
168. for the operator with easy adjustments for optimal view and individual comfort The main controls shall follow the movements of the chair Other controls and switches shall be located within the recommended reach for hands and feet A second seat shall be provided for an instructor or a trainee G 11 6 Video camera CCTV NORSOK standard Page 164 of 182199 NOTE Clause removed requirement covered in EN 13852 1 G 11 7 Data recorder A data recorder shall be installed for continuous logging of main operational data for the purpose of a tracking of events e g 1 overload 2 changes in operational parameters 3 alarm and acknowledge history b condition monitoring c fatigue assessment For tracking of events essential parameters e g load motion speeds position limits brake status pressures operator commands and alarm status shall be continuously recorded The recording system shall contain data for at least 30 calendar days For condition monitoring and fatigue assessment the recorded data shall be continuously accumulated from day one and during the complete lifetime of the crane It should be possible at any time for user to display status for condition monitoring and fatigue assessment of the crane The data may be compressed for the purpose of limiting the necessary storage capacity A back up copy of the data should frequently be stored independently G 11 8 Data remote access A remote access s
169. g component damping of dynamic impacts and limitation of movements of the load and parts of the lifting appliance shall be ensured if one of the components fails NORSOK standard Page 207 of 182199 Table K 2 Examples of duplication related to high risk class Example of duplication High risk class High ei class Backup brake with independent load path xX on single winch Single hydraulic cylinders with mechanical x lock Single winch with dual load suspension x system wire ropes or chains Dual winch with dual suspension Single X X failure proof Dual hydraulic cylinders with independent x xX load holding valves Single failure proof K 3 2 Application of a risk coefficient All parts of the load bearing chain which are not duplicated non redundant in accordance with K 3 1 shall be designed with a risk coefficient yn according to EN 13001 2 2004 A2 2009 clause 4 3 2 Lifting equipment which areis used for non high risk operations as well as in high risk applications may have differentiated rated capacities for those operations where the risk coefficient yn is taken as 1 0 for the non high risk operation The risk coefficient shall be in accordance with Table K 3 Table K 3 Risk coefficient for high risk classes yn High risk class Min 1 5 High risk class II 2 NORSOK standard Page 208 of 182199 K 4 Protective measures K 4 1 Requir
170. g is used in choked hitch or basket hitch shall be provided for all types of fibre slings For flat woven webbing slings both minimum and maximum diameter to be inserted in the eyes shall be stated C 9 2 4 Marking The minimum contact diameter stated in the user manual shall also be marked on the slings For flat woven webbing slings the maximum diameter of objects to be inserted in the eyes shall also be marked on the fg 5 Material Fibre slings should as a general rule be made from polyester However if fibres slings are intended to be used in alkaline environment slings made from polypropylene should be preferred C 10 Steel wire rope slings Group R3 C 10 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply Steel wire ropes for slings See group R9 Lifting components Single leg and multi leg slings EN 13414 1 Steel wire rope slings Safety Part 1 Slings for general lifting service EN 13414 2 Steel wire rope slings Safety Part 2 Specification for information for use and maintenance to be provided by the manufacturer EN 13414 3 Steel wire rope slings Safety Part 3 Grommets and cable laid slings Termination of steel wire ropes EN 13411 1 Terminations for steel wire ropes Safety Part 1 Thimbles for steel wire rope slings EN 13411 3 Terminations for steel wire ropes Safety Part 3 Ferrules and ferrule securing Components for upper and lower terminals of steel wire rope
171. g persons to risk a purpose built system for remote operation of the activation systems may be utilised Care must be taken to ensure that the involved components and structures are able to absorb any shock loadings during load transfer ref load combination C7 Table A 3 Peak loads must be measured during this test to confirm the dynamic factor used in load combination C7 Table A 3 Test No A10 Static overload test primary means of launching A test load corresponding to 220 of the rated capacity of primary means of launching see A 2 3 shall be suspended from the attachment point for means of connection for the primary means of launching The test is considered successful if there is no damage or permanent deformation to the main structure skidding track or means of connection after the tests The test load may be the lifeboat itself or a dummy load with identical footprint on the skidding track and same location of the centre of gravity Test No A11 Static overload test hang off relief arrangement A test load corresponding to 200 of the rated capacity of the hang off relief arrangement see A 2 3 shall be suspended from the attachment point s for the hang off relief arrangement The test load may be the lifeboat itself or a dummy load with identical footprint on the skidding track and same location of the centre gravity Alternatively if this test represents the same loading on the skidding track as test No A10 a reali
172. g sub Pup joints for lifting 2 Miscellaneous Tools to connect the tubulars and equipment to the lifting Riser Yes lifting tools appliance drilling machine for lifting in and out of the drilling fiftingLlifting when area tools used for Handling tools lifting Running tolstools Hanger tools Ete ence ng when ments vertical motion of lead Me when herzontal motion only 43 Elevator A mechanism that may be closed around drillpipes or other Drillpipe elevator Yes drillstring components to facilitate lowering them into the Casing elevator wellbore or lifting them out of the wellbore In the closed Drill collar NORSOK standard Page 133 of 182199 position the elevator forms a load bearing ring around the elevator component Tubing elevator etc 54 Elevator links A device that connects the elevator either directly to the Elevator links Yes z travelling block or via the DDM Bails D 3 Design criteria D 3 1 Design loads Design loads shall be applied in accordance with DNV OS E101 Ch 2 Sec 1 Subsections H and I Depending on the type of lifting appliance DNV OS E101 gives further references to other standards e g API spec 8C DNV Standard for Certification No 2 22 and FEM Rules for the Design of Hoisting Appliances It is important to note that API defines Load Rating as follows Maximum operating load both static and dynamic to be applied to the equipmen
173. ght circuit is protected against unintended deactivation Lift cars shall be equipped with a telephone connected to the main telephone system private automatic branch exchange at the installation PA system shall be installed in the lift car E 3 4 Materials and fabrication Materials and fabrication may be in accordance with relevant NORSOK standards NORSOK standard Page 139 of 182199 E 3 5 Documentation The lift shall be certified by an approved enterprise of competence NORSOK standard Page 140 of 482199 Annex F Normative Portable units F 1 General Group F For portable units the requirements of this annex apply in addition to the requirements stated in Clause 1 to Clause 5 NOTE Itis assumed that practices for slinging lifting and lowering operations are planned and performed in accordance with s Formatert Skrift 8 pkt NORSOK R 003 or NORSOK R 005 Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Portable units of groups indicated in Table F 1 shall be documented in accordance with NORSOK R 003 Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Annex E or R 005 Annex E as applicable Lifting sets for all groups shall be documented in accordance with Formatert Skrift 8 pkt NORSOK R 003 Annex E or R 005 Annex E as applicable Portable units of groups indicated in Table F 1 are subject to the provisions for Enterprise of competence given in NORSOK R 003 Annex H or R 005 annex H as applicable Lifting se
174. group in the subsequent clauses of this annex The backup brake shall be designed according to the same requirements given for the primary brake given in 5 7 6 Primary and backup brakes shall be arranged for individual testing The backup brake shall preferably act directly on the winch drum but a load path fully independent from the primary brake will be considered acceptable The backup brake shall be of a different type or make than the primary brake Where hydraulic cylinders are used two independent cylinders shall be provided for each function such that one cylinder is capable to stop and hold the load in case of a failure of the other cylinder A 1 11 Secondary independent power and control system Unless otherwise stated for the particular groups of launching and recovery appliances powered launching and recovery appliances for the lifting or lowering of persons shall be equipped with a secondary independent power system and a secondary independent control system for the powered movements The secondary power system shall not be affected by failures in the primary power system and the secondary independent control system shall not be affected by failures in the primary control system NOTES Secondary independent power and control system is equivalent with emergency operation system according to For such appliances the secondary independent power and control system shall be operated from the control station and shall be simple
175. h partly or fully does not meet the requirements in this NORSOK standard the remaining risks shall comply with the ALARP principle The ALARP principle may be described as a reverse burden of proof i e that risk reduction measures shall be implemented if there is no evidence showing why not The designer shall implement risk reduction measures unless it can be proven that there is a major inconsistency between cost and benefit 4 12 Risk reduction Risk reduction shall comprise all possibilities to reduce the risk including redesign design modification protective measures and information for use The designer shall select the most appropriate measure following the three step method below Step 1 Inherently safe design measures Step 2 Safeguarding and possible complementary protective measures Step 3 Information for use covering residual risks For reference see 4 4 4 13 Documentation of risk assessment Documentation of risk assessment shall demonstrate that the requirements for performing risk assessment have been met and that the acceptance criteria are fulfilled The documentation shall include description of 1 the lifting equipment for which the assessment was made e g specifications limits intended use and any relevant assumptions that have been made e g loads strengths safety factors 2 the hazards and hazardous situations identified and the hazardous events considered in the 3 the irfeseedioemn which risk asse
176. hall be collected and used by the designer in order to assess the risks of lifting equipment during all phases Risk assessment shall be an iterative process and repeated after the application of risk reduction measures until an acceptable level of safety is obtained see principle of evaluation of risks stated in 4 12 The risk assessment shall be carried out in accordance with ISO 12100 NOTE ISO 12100 gives a more comprehensive description of risk assessment The relevant method of analysing hazards and estimating risk shall be selected depending on the lifting equipment characteristics and the type of risks that are dominating Examples of such methods are described in ISO TR 14121 2 Annex A The risk assessment shall be documented as stated in 4 13 and used as input for the maintenance planning see 4 4 4 11 2 Determination of the limits Determination of the limits of the lifting equipment is the first step in the risk assessment Determination of the limits of the lifting equipment includes the technical properties and the performance of the lifting equipment the personnel involved and the environmental constraints at all times Determination of limits of the lifting equipment shall include but not be limited to use limits including intended use and foreseeable misuse A Formatert Nummerert Niv 1 different modes of operation and operator interventions Mummerennossiil Punkt Start pet 1 space limits Justering Ve
177. hall be taken as the rated capacity NOTE 2 For the dynamic load test coefficient Dg is to be calculated according to equation A 3 with Vr 0 5VHmax For the static load test De 1 NOTE 3 The risk coefficient of 1 5 is only applicable if lifting or lowering persons is part of the intended use see A 2 4 2 1 and A 2 4 3 and when performing proof of competence with rated capacity for lifting persons see A 2 3 When performing proof of competence with rated capacity without persons the risk coefficient may be set to 1 0 NOTE 4 For dynamic overload testing is taken from EN 13001 2 clause 4 2 2 1 For static overload testing 1 t NOTE 5 The risk coefficient shall be applied to mass of the hoist load and moveable parts of mass of the launching appliance Static parts of mass of the launching appliance need not be multiplied with the risk coefficient NOTE 6 3s gust wind shall be applied without simultaneous action from wave induced accelerations Wave induced accelerations shall be applied in combination with simultaneous action from a mean wind speed averaged over a 60s period NORSOK standard Page 41 of 182199 Key A1 ULS Pick up of lifeboat from sea with means of retrieval in NLS conditions without environmental actions from wind snow ice or temperature variations The effect of waves shall be taken into account A3 ULSS Acceleration of hanging lifeboat at start of descent or start of hoisting in NLS conditions without environmental ac
178. his annex the rated capacity for launching and recovery appliances shall be taken as the gross mass of a fully equipped ife savinglifesaving equipment when boarded with its full complements of persons i e crew and passengers For the purpose of calculating the rated capacity of launching and recovery appliances the weight of each person in the life saving equipment e g life boat rescue boat shall be set to 100 kg A 1 4 3 Loads and load combinations Structural and mechanical strength of launching and recovery appliances shall be proved for loads and load combinations The following tables shall be used instead of Table 10 in EN 13001 2 e GroupA 1 Tables A 3 and Table A 4 Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e GroupA 2 Table A 5 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e Group A 6 Table A 6 0 75 cm Loads for the ULS shall be determined based on the NLS and LS conditions Loads for the ALS shall be determined based on extreme wind conditions extreme wave conditions or earthquake Extreme wind and wave conditions are conditions with mean wind velocity 10 min at 10 m NORSOK standard Page 37 of 182199 above sea or wave height corresponding to 10 000 year return period Extreme weather conditions are to determined for the particular installation in accordance with NORSOK N 002 ULS loads are to be determined for load combinations A B and C with partial safety factors yp as defined in EN 13001 2 ALS loads are compl
179. id out for routine lifting operations No restriction for routine lifts Predefined lifting zones should be defined as green areas Areas where lifting will be performed shall as a minimum be defined as yellow or green All yellow areas shall have predefined lifting restrictions according to the loads expected to be handled in or above the area The green areas and dropped object protection devices in yellow areas shall be checked for impact from dropped objects according to the actions and accidental limit state defined in NORSOK N 003 and N 004 DNV RP C204 may also be used as reference The impact loads for design of the deck area and protection devices shall be selected in accordance with relevant weight size and drop height expected for the specific location Lifting operations in red areas and outside defined limits in yellow areas may exceptionally be considered if the following types of measures have been implemented in accordance with an operational risk assessment e Consequence reducing measures e Probability reducing measures e Contingency plans In addition lifting equipment shall be desigeneddesigned and manufactured with built in measures for high risk application in accordance with clause 5 9 NOTE This standard does not cover operational risk assessment and corresponding measures Reference is given to authority regulations PSA NORSOK standard Page 95 of 182199 3 Formatert Skrift 8 pkt l Formate
180. ifferent levels and be designed for the transport of supplies and spares and in an emergency to facilitate transport of a stretcher smoke diving and fire fightingfirefighting equipment Fixed means of access according to EN 13586 shall be provided to areas of the crane requiring regular prescribed maintenance and inspection For access between different levels externally on the crane stairs should be used instead of ladders Walkways of type 1 in accordance with EN 13586 shall be provided for access to crane boom A service platform shall be provided for safe access when changing the configuration of the crane replacement of wire ropes and sheaves etc G 11 4 View from the control station The control station shall be arranged with the aim to give unobstructed view for the crane operator of the working area with the boom and the hook in any position Any equipment such as rated capacity indicators camera monitors window wipers window protection bars etc shall be so located and arranged to reduce this view as little as possible NOTE This implies that metal grids in front of windows isare not accepted The window wiper system shall be robust and suitable for a marine environment Wipers on front window shall be oriented vertically and move horizontally and be able to keep at least 80 of the window area clean from water and spray G 11 5 Control station outfitting The control station shall be equipped with an ergonomic chair
181. imilar components are defined as mechanisms Strength of components that form parts of mechanisms shall be proved for loads defined in FEM 1 001 booklet 2 2 5 applying the allowable stress method for the load combinations referenced in clause 5 7 3 of this standard All partial safety factors shall be set to 1 0 for this purpose If relevant e g for lifting persons the risk factor referenced in 5 9 shall be applied Components of mechanisms shall be checked for adequate safety against failure due to fracture crippling fatigue and excessive wear in accordance with FEM 1 001 booklet 4 4 1 Requirements given in EN 13135 2 shall also apply for certain components in mechanisms 5 7 6 Brakes Where the power transmissions of mechanisms are not able to hold the load or moveable part of a lifting appliance a parking brake shall be provided Unless otherwise stated in this NORSOK standard brakes for slewing mechanisms travel mechanisms hoisting mechanisms and other winch driven mechanisms e g luffing or telescoping shall in addition to the requirements of EN 13135 2 comply with the design requirements given in FEM 1 001 booklet 7 7 5 3 Brakes shall automatically be activated without undue delay when the motion control lever is returned to the neutral position at power failure control failure or at emergency stop 5 8 Strength and stability classification The service condition should be specified according to EN 13001 1 by th
182. imum hole diameter shall not exceed dn 5 Table J 3 Type 3 Boss types NORSOK standard Page 201 of 182199 J 2 5 Lifting lug strength calculations J 2 5 1 Load components The lifting lug design force Fp is defined in Annex F or Annex H as applicable Vertical and horizontal component of Pp Pay Pp cosa J 1 Pon F sing J 2 Figure J 8 Design load components The above tables are guidelines only The actual lifting lug has to be checked using the partial factors and the design load applicable for the installation according to Annex F or Annex H The lateral load specified in Annex F or Annex H shall be applied acting in the centre of the shackle bow as indicated in Figure J 9 The lateral load is not accounted for in the following text and shall be considered additionally Figure J 9 Lateral load acting in the centre of the shackle bow NORSOK standard Page 202 of 182199 J 2 5 2 Limit design stress The limit design stress is YRm J 3 fy yield stress YRm material resistance factor Material resistance factors shall be as follows e for lifting lugs including structural parts and full penetration welds Rm 1 15 e for fillet welds partial penetration welds and bolted connections YRm 1 3 J 2 5 3 Tear out limit design stress Limit design shear stress should be assessed to satisfy the following condition fy A V3 Ya
183. in clause A 1 4 3 for detailed application of risk coefficient NOTE This requirement addresses the subject of increased mechanical strength during the lifting of persons see Machinery Directive Annex Clause 6 1 1 A 1 8 Limit states and proof of competence A 1 8 1 General The characteristic resistance R of material members connections and components shall be derived from the subsequent sections or references given in the subsequent sections The limit design resistance Rg in terms of stresses and forces to be applied for the proof of competence shall be based on the characteristic resistance and resulting resistance coefficients yp as described herein or as described in the references given In general the limit design resistance is expressed as R Re A 12 Yr breaking strength for other components A 1 8 2 Structural members and connections For launching appliances and load bearing parts of life saving equipment e g anchorage for means of connection the limit design resistance for structural members and their bolted pinned and welded connections shall be taken from the following references e Steel structures EN13001 3 1 Cranes General design Part 3 1 e Aluminium structures EN 1999 1 1 e Composite structures DNV OS E406 Sec 6 C Composite materials shall be selected and documented in accordance with criteria given in Sec 5 of DNV OS E406 Methods described in DNV OS C501 may be used to cal
184. in function To lift and transport x mas tree BOP stacks Typical names BOP crane Overhead crane Gantry crane Lifting equip ment Yes No x mas tree BOP Transporter Table D 7 Group D 6 Miscellaneous lifting equipment in the drilling area To safely transport lift guide the x mas tree BOP from the parked storage position to the well centre and vice versa x mas tree BOP transporter x mas tree BOP trolley x mas tree BOP carrier Yes when vertical motion of load No when horizontal motion only Subgroup Equipment Main function Typical names Lifting description equip ment Yes No 1 Man rider winch A winch specially designed for lifting one Man rider winch Yes person 2 Man riding harness Yes 3 Access basket A working basket or personnel basket Access basket Yes installed at the end of a fixed or telescopic Cherry picker jib Casing stabbing basket Slewing and topping movements are normally included to facilitate access to large areas either within the derrick or in the moon pool area 4 Casing stabbing A power driven working platform operating Yes board along a guided vertical track 5 Utility Winch Winch used for miscellaneous lifting Utility winch Yes operations Tugger winch 7 Guideline winches Winch used for installation and tensioning of Yes guide wires No unless used for lifting of loads anc horing weight
185. inal fraedbraking system should be of the rack and pinion principle to match runway beams required in Annex H G 17 Other cranes Group G20 The design criteria stated in G 3 apply Mobile elevating work platforms shall be in accordance with EN 280 Mast climbing platforms shall be in accordance with EN 1495 Suspended access equipment shall be in accordance with EN 1808 Lifting tables shall be in accordance with EN 1570 1 Forklift trucks shall be in accordance with NS EN ISO 3691 1 ISO 22915 1 and NS EN 1755 as applicable For cranes used in drilling operations reference is also made to the requirements in Annex D NOTE Powered slewing cranes mounted in a fixed installation often referred to as G20 cranes in the industry are covered by Group G3 NORSOK standard Page 173 of 482199 Annex H Normative Foundations and suspensions H 1 General Group H The requirements of this annex apply in addition to the requirements stated in Clause 1 to Clause 5 Foundations and suspensions are not regarded as lifting appliances They are structural components elements used for supporting or suspending the lifting appliance and is considered as the interface between a lifting appliance and general structure For verification requirements of the lifting equipment as a whole reference is made to Clause 4 14 Proof of competence for foundations and suspensions shall be in accordance with NORSOK N 004 taking into account loads
186. ing temperature 20 C in accordance with EN 13155 Table A 3 For clamps intended to be used at lower operating temperatures than 20 C materials shall be selected in accordance with C 6 C 11 3 2 3 Fabrication The fabrication requirements in C 6 apply C 11 4 Lifting forks C 11 4 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply NORSOK standard Page 107 of 182199 EN 13155 Cranes Safety Non fixed load lifting attachments C 11 4 2 Complementary requirements for lifting forks C 11 4 2 1 Materials Materials shall be selected with steel quality and maximum thickness for resistance to brittle fracture for lowest working temperature 20 C in accordance with EN 13155 Table A 3 For lifting forks intended to be used at lower operating temperatures than 20 C materials shall be selected in accordance with C 6 C 11 4 2 2 Fabrication The fabrication requirements in C 6 apply NORSOK standard Page 108 of 182199 C 12 Spreaders and special design Group R5 C 12 1 Spreader beams lifting beams and lifting frames C 12 1 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply EN 13155 Cranes Safety Non fixed load lifting attachments C 12 1 2 Complementary requirements for lifting beams spreader beams and lifting frames C 12 1 2 1 Materials Materials shall be selected with steel quality and maximum thickness for resistance to brittle fr
187. ion for use 5 10 Power systems 5 10 1 Electrical installations Electrical powered lifting appliances shall be provided with relevant power supplies from the installation in accordance with NORSOK E 001 Electrical installations of lifting appliances shall be in accordance with IEC 61892 all parts 5 10 2 Electrical motors Electrical motors installed in lifting appliances shall be in accordance with applicable parts of IEC 60034 5 10 3 Combustion engines Combustion engines installed in lifting appliances shall be in accordance with EN 1679 1 and EN 1834 1 Arrangement and exhaust of combustion engines shall be in accordance with the applicable area classification see 5 3 The requirements given in clause 5 5 of NORSOK R 001 apply to all combustion engines In addition combustion engines shall have monitoring of exhaust gas temperature with temperature display at the crane driver s position Audible and visual alarm shall be given at a temperature in accordance with engine manufacturer s specifications for max allowable exhaust gas temperature 5 11 Electrotechnical equipment Electrotechnical equipment of lifting equipment shall be in accordance with EN 13135 1 IEC 60204 1 and IEC 60204 32 Minimum requirements for protection against water ingress and dust penetration to enclosures shall be as follows NORSOK standard Page 27 of 182199 e For dry indoor located equiomentareas Grade P441P20 according to IEC 60529
188. ion of personnel e g rescue boat personnel basket etc p description of operational range safe lifting routes and lay down areas for offshore cranes if offshore cranes are to be used for transferring loads from one side of the installation to the other a description of protection against heat radiation from flare burners and exhaust outlets on crane cabins crane systems and wires e r __ plot plan showing 1 crane locations offshore crane operation range with and without jib minimum radius and radius for heaviest lift maximum allowable lifting heights maximum weight capacities for lay down areas and transportation ways lay down areas including allowable loads areas not visible from the crane cabin shall be highlighted hose loading stations tote tank area access and transportation ways including allowable loads 9 permanent and temporary restriction areas 10 dropped object protection 11 crane maintenance platform s including location for facilities for re reeving and replacement of wire rope 12 storage for crane hooks 13 crane boom rests 14 rescue boat 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B 7 Material handling plan The material handling philosophy in the final as built version shall be included in the material handling plan This material handling plan shall identify all equipment that needs to be handled and describe the method equipment and the transport route to be used when lif
189. ired rope length for the elastic pennant The static stiffness of the elastic pennant must provide a sufficiently low dynamic factor The static stiffness varies in inverse ratio to the length of the elastic pennant as shown in A 7 4 5 There are two main criteria to be considered e The lifted rescue boat must be protected against excessive dynamics i e the dynamic factors given in A 7 6 2 must not be exceeded for the load combinations LCA and LCC defined in A 7 6 2 e The elastic pennant itself must be protected against excessive dynamics i e the dynamic safety factor SFpyn must not exceed the actual static safety factor SFsta for load combinations LCA and LCC defined in A 7 6 2 Applying these two main criteria for both LCA and LCC makes a total of 4 criteria to be met by the selected rope length Pica 62 5 icc lt 3 0 SFoyntca 2 SFstat SEpya Lec SFstat PoJa Aj NOTE LCA is pick up of rescue boat from sea in the NLS condition LCC is pick up of rescue boat from sea in the LS condition lt Formatert I nnrykk F rste linje 1 27 cm NORSOK standard Page 86 of 182199 Dynamic safety factor SFpyn is the product of dynamic factor partial safety factor risk coefficient and rope resistance factor as follows SF pyn Vo Yr Vw A 19 Feltkode endret y isthe partial safety factor ___ 7 1 34 for load combination A y hI for load combina
190. ition in D 1 Guide track and dolly Yes if used for lifting No if guiding only NORSOK standard Page 129 of 182199 wn te E gt 6 oo c E 2 E U gt 6 Wire Rope Anchor Derrick Drilling Machine DDM DDM may comprise several units Main shaft Swivel Gearbox Link hanger Connection links Pipe handler Wash pipe Figure D 2 Cylinder operated hydraulic drawwork including top drive DDM 482199 Page 130 of NORSOK standard Table D 4 Group D 3 Vertical pipe handling VPH machines Subgroup Equipment Main function Typical names Lifting description equip ment Yes No 1 Racking Either to grip lift guide transport and position Star racker Yes if equipment tubulars vertically inside drilling structure Hydra racker used for derrick Bridge crane lifting Upper racking arm URA Upper guiding arm UGA No if Intermediate racking arm IRA guiding Lower lifting arm LLA only Lower guiding arm LGA 2 Finger boards Storage rack for tubulars fixed or Drill pipe finger board No adjustable Casing finger board Riser finger board Belly board 3 Manipulator arms Normally to guide or assist when tubulars are Drill floor manipulator arm DFMA Yes if entering the drill floor area or setback area Multi manipulator arm MMA used for Sometimes also used for lifting Tail in arm lifting Pow
191. ke preference In order to avoid unnecessary shut down of process systems in the operation period the installation shall be designed with safe lifting and transport routes for all equipment that has to be dismantled regularly for service testing and control see B 3 3 Priorities of preference for lifting equipment are as follows a Automated handsfree material handling concepts for frequently repeated operations ab Forklift trucks personnel and gods lifts4orries with cranes mobile cranes bc Permanent cranellifting foundations d Lorries with cranes mobile cranes eye Temporary other mobile lifting equipment amp f Rigging equipment Due consideration shall be given to the effect of inclinations and motions on floating installations and vibrations from other equipment Types of lifting equipment shall be selected in order to avoid the exposure of employees to risks from uncontrolled horizontal or vertical movements from the lifting appliances or load colliding with employees moving unintentionally coming loose unintentionally or free falling In addition the environment shall be considered in areas where material handling equipment is used and stored The criticality and economic importance of the load special process equipment shall be reflected when selecting the safety level for lifting and transport equipment to handle the load e g additional lifting and braking systems and emergency lowering facilities see 4 11 4
192. ken as the rated capacity as defined in A 1 4 2 for load combinations A1 A3 B1 B3 and C1 For load combination A11 the mass of hoist load shall be taken as 1 1 times the rated capacity as defined in A 1 4 2 For load combinations C2 and C8 the mass of hoist load may be taken as mass of empty lifeboat For load combination C3 mass of the hoist load shall be taken as the test load For load combination C6 the mass of the hoist load shall be taken as the test load of 1 1 times the rated capacity as defined in A 1 4 2 NOTE 2 For the dynamic load test coefficient D is to be calculated according to equation A 3 with Vr 0 5VHmax For the static load test De 1 0 NOTE 3 Accelerations resulting from earthquake or extreme wave with wave height corresponding to 10 000 year return period whichever gives the highest accelerations must be applied to both mass of the hoist load and mass of the launching appliance in all degrees of freedom for the particular installation NOTE 4 For dynamic overload testing is taken from EN 13001 2 clause 4 2 2 1 For static overload testing 1 Key M1 ULS Pick up of lifeboat from sea in NLS conditions without environmental actions from wind snow ice or temperature variations The effect of waves on dynamic factor shall be taken into account 11 ULS Lifeboat suspended from hang off relief arrangement 3 ULS Acceleration of hanging lifeboat at start of descent or start of hoisting in NLS conditions without en
193. king load limit WLLproo2a tonnes for an elastic pennant including its end fittings shall be equatte or greaterthancompatible with the gross mass of the fully equipped rescue boat with its full complement of persons The working load limit relates to a specific service as described in A 7 4 1 NORSOK standard Page 84 of 182199 NOTEThe WLL for elastic pennants for rescue boats is labelled with the index R002A in order to Se it from lifting slings for general service A 7 4 3 SafetyfactorsSelection of rope diameter dee for elastic pennants shall be selected with thea specified minimum ee load MBL tonnes andkN giving a static s factors factor not less than 10 Static safety factor SFsta is the ratio between the 90 of MBL and WLL MBL MBL SE sa ak SF siat a 2 10 WLL agg 4 8 WLLroona 8 A 18 where MBL jis the specified minimum breaking load in kN for the fibre rope used in the elastic pennant g 9 81 m s is the acceleration of gravity The criterion described in expression A 18 is used to Ropes for elastic pennants shall be selected with select a rope diameter having the necessary MBL giving a The actual static safety factor noHesswill normally be higher than 40 7 Dynamic safotytactor SEps athe minimum required safety factor based on dynamic factor partial safety factor risk coefficient and rone resistance factor as follows
194. l be planned with the following priority 1 Safety 2 Reliability 3 Availability A maintenance programme shall be provided for all lifting equipment and shall include all important maintenance tasks highlighted and recommended in the risk assessment see 4 11 For cranes reference is made to ISO 12482 1 and relevant parts of NORSOK Z 008 as applicable If appropriate for complex lifting appliances the maintenance programme shall be developed on component level e g RCM as described in IEC 60300 3 11 Lifting appliances and launching appliances for lifesaving equipment which are infrequently used and exposed to corrosive atmosphere should have a modular design allowing parts to be easily dismantled and removed for temporary in house storage and preservation Alternatively the equipment should be designed for reliable in situ preservation 4 10 Quality management system The design manufacturing and installation of lifting equipment shall be performed in accordance with a quality management system The quality management system shall be in accordance with ISO 9001 or equivalent 4 11 Risk assessment 4 11 1 General Risk assessment shall be an integral part of the supply ofdesign process for lifting equipment This implies that the knowledge and experience of the design manufacturing installation transportation assembly dismantling use maintenance incidents accidents and harm etc related to lifting equipment s
195. l determine the required performance level in accordance with ISO 13849 1 and demonstrate that the required performance level is achieved Severity Programmable electronic systems shall follow the principles of ISO 17894 If a lifting appliance is supplied with multiple control stations only one station shall be available at a time 5 14 Limiting and indicating devices Limiting and indicating devices on lifting appliances shall be in accordance with EN 12077 2 Visual danger signals shall be in accordance with EN 842 5 15 Emergency systems 5 15 1 Emergency stop Power operated lifting appliances shall be equipped with an emergency stop in accordance with ISO 13850 5 15 2 Emergency lowering system Power operated lifting appliances for suspended loads shall be equipped with an emergency lowering system in order to avoid hazard of swinging loads in the event of loss of normal lowering function This system is not required if an emergency operation system is provided in accordance with 5 15 3 NORSOK standard Page 28 of 182199 The emergency lowering system shall enable a controlled lowering of the load upon a power failure landing the load safely The activation switches or handles shall be of hold to run type and shall be clearly and permanently marked The control station for emergency lowering shall be positioned in a place that gives the operator a clear view of the load and the lifting zone The system shall be si
196. lation should be provided with access to the lifting appliance in accordance with NORSOK S 002 4 55 4 4 Illumination A main electric lighting system shall provide illumination of every part of the lifting appliances normally accessible to operators and maintenance personnel taking its supply from the main source of electrical power An emergency lighting system shall provide illumination of the working area of every part of the lifting appliance normally accessible to operators and maintenance personnel taking its supply from the emergency source of electrical power Upon loss of the main power source all emergency lighting shall automatically be supplied from the emergency source of power to ensure safe emergency operation and emergency escape Aircraft warning lights shall be installed on all lifting appliances representing a risk of obstruction for aircrafts Illumination of working area shall be in accordance with NORSOK S 002 5 6 5 4 65 4 5 _ Prevention of unexpected start up Powered lifting appliances shall have devices preventing unexpected start up in accordance with EN 1037 Lifting appliances with enclosed cabins and or remote operated control stations shall be equipped with a switch device with which the operator can disable the main control levers 5 4 75 4 6 Guards Lifting appliances shall be equipped with fixed or moveable guards in accordance with EN 953 to protect persons from mechanical thermal or other hazards as
197. lements including data processing counter sensors protective devices balance valves Power transmission elements Working parts Emergency Emergency control system incl Emergency power Manual controls control devices power supply control elements Figure G 1 Schematic representation of EOS NOTE For terminology see EN ISO 12100 G 5 Emergency stop All power driven cranes winches and hoists shall be equipped with an emergency stop function in accordance with EN 1SO13850 G 6 Main switch All power driven lifting appliances shall be equipped with a lockable main power supply isolation device e g valve or switch G 7 Mobile cranes Group G1 The design shall be in accordance with EN 13000 taking into account the additional design criteria given in G43 G 8 Tower cranes Group G2 criteria given in G 43 G 9 Slewing jib cranes Group G3 criteria given in G 43 Tower cranes shall be designed in accordance with EN14439 taking into account the additional design Slewing jib cranes shall be designed in accordance with EN14985 taking into account the additional design Loader cranes in accordance with EN 12999 mounted on a fixed foundation may also be used as slewing jib cranes provided the requirements in G 14 are fulfilled G 10 Bridge and gantry cranes Group G4 G 10 1 Design Bridge and gantry cranes shall be design
198. les or non load bearing parts of means of connection shall be designed to prevent incorrect attachment to each other Means of connection including release mechanism shall be calculated and tested in accordance with A 7 6 A 7 4 Elastic pennant for lifting rescue boat with offshore crane Formatert Normal Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp 1 5 cm Left A 7 4 1 General When lifting a rescue boat group A 6 with offshore crane an elastic pennant shall be utilised in order to limit the dynamic impact acting on the load bearing siructuratparts of the boat and the personnel on board The elastic pennant shall be selested and dedicateddesigned for the maximum gross mass of the particular rescue boat to be lifted and the expected intended service Service is defined by the combination of e maximum steady state hoisting speed for the offshore crane s to be used for lifting the beat rescue lt Formatert Skrift Arial 10 pkt boat when lifting a load equal to the maximum gross mass of the rescue boat and Engels Storbritannia e type of host installation on which _ the offshore crane is located i e bottom fixed semisubmersible or Formatert Listeavsnitt Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 63 cm Innrykk ved 1 27 cm monohull shaped FPSO The elastic pennant shall consist of a single legged sling made from 8 strand plaited construction man made fibre r
199. load factors and resistance factors described in this annex EN 1993 6 may be used as a supplement for more detailed design of runway beams Fabrication of welded steel structures shall be performed in accordance with NORSOK M 101 Non welded structures shall be fabricated in accordance with requirements in Clause 5 22 H 2 Group overview Group no Definitions Runway beams Monorails and beams including their fastening to structure for suspension of permanent or temporary lifting Lifting lugs Lugs including their fastening to structure for suspension of permanent or temporary lifting equipment Sheave brackets Sheave brackets including their fastening to structure for suspension of permanent or temporary sheaves Foundations Structural or mechanical parts used as foundation for permanent or temporary mounted lifting equipment to structure H 3 Design factors The factors relevant for lifting design are summarized in Table H 1 Table H 1 Factors relevant for lifting design Load factors Resistance factor Design factor DF APPLICATION TO FIND i Design Suspension and capacity foundation design NORSOK standard Page 174 of 182199 The design load is defined as Pp SWL DAF DF H 1 The design factor DF is defined as DF Yp Yc H 2 where Yp partial load factor Yc consequence factor Table H 2 Design factors DFs p C Single critical el
200. lours and safety signs Registered safety signs Quality management systems Requirements Petroleum and natural gas industries Drilling and production equipment Wellhead and christmas tree equipment Acoustics Recommended practice for the design of low noise machinery and equipment Part 1 Planning Acoustics Recommended practice for the design of low noise machinery and equipment Part 2 Introduction to the physics of low noise design ISO 11961 API Spec 5D and 7 Petroleum and natural gas industries Steel drill pipe ISO 12100 ISO 12482 1 ISO 12944 1 ISO 13200 ISO 13535 ISO 13628 1 ISO 13628 4 ISO 13628 7 API RP 17G 2 Safety of machinery General principles for design Risk assessment and risk reduction Cranes Condition monitoring Part 1 General Paints and varnishes Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective paint systems Part 1 General introduction Cranes Safety signs and hazard pictorials General principles API Spec BC Petroleum and natural gas industries Drilling and production equipment Hoisting equipment Petroleum and natural gas industries Design and operation of subsea production systems Part 1 General requirements and Ratoohsoendationstural gas industries Design and operation of subsea production systems Part 4 Subsea wellhead and tree equipment Petroleum and natural gas industries
201. m J 4 where TEd is the tear out stress P __ PF w Fe as J 5 where dy r Z t For Type 1 d d EEO NEEN O oe orp d r 3 tp For Type 3 dh r Z t For Type 1 d d Asn R P tp 2 R Z te For Type 2 d r 2 tp For Type 3 J 2 5 4 Load bearing limit design stress at pinhole edge Design bearing limit design stress should be assessed to satisfy the following condition fy 15 gt a fa ta J 6 where b pin hole bearing stress Py teff ed J 7 Op NORSOK standard Page 203 of 182199 where ty For Type 1 bap tn 2 t For Type 2 ty For Type 3 J 2 5 5 Fillet weld limit design stress for Type 2 Fillet weld limit design stress should be assessed to satisfy the following condition f fa ty a y3 Yrm 7 J 8 where TEd is the fillet weld shear stress Force distribution is assumed to be according to thickness of lifting lug plate and cheek plates For each cheek plate the following should be assumed PE Effective weld length is of total circumference E off 7 2 H R J 9 wih Load through weld of each cheek plate P zt Effective ee ee weld length t 2 f J 10 2 3 of total Figure J 10 Effective weld length Fillet weld shear stress T Pow i P t Ed Lope a t 2 t 3 2 R a J 11 where nominal throat size of the fillet weld Rb cheek plate radius in mm Fy lifting lug design force tp lif
202. material assets in the petroleum industry by giving technical requirements for lifting equipment During development of this NORSOK standard due consideration has been given to relevant EU Directives Norwegian regulations European StandardStandards and International stancardstandards as well as other _ formal documents of relevance It should be noted however that this NORSOK standard is not a standard and it does not contain all the technical and administrative requirements of the applicable regulations and directives see the foreword The expert group responsible for this NORSOK standard has agreed that the main safety philosophy and principal requirements of the standard shall be based on applicable safety and health requirements stated in relevant EU directives e g the Machinery directive 2006 42 EC ATEX directive 94 9 EC LVD 2006 95 EC EMC directive 2004 108 EC PED 97 23 EC This applies regardless of type of installation or unit on which lifting equipment is installed Administrative requirements however e g CE marking declaration of conformity requirements for EC Type examination etc do not form part of this NORSOK standard The requirements of this NORSOK standard are given in clause 4 clause 5 and in the annexes The combinatian of all these requirements forms the Bennical basis the lifting equipment has to comply with X pae iaa aaja Na re uirements in clause P shall eth sappy eee E Order of
203. means of launching 200 of the rated capacity NORSOK standard Page 70 of 182199 e means of retrieval 200 of the rated capacity e hang off relief arrangement 200 of the rated capacity Means of connection forming part of the lifeboat hull shall be fixed to their anchorage in hull during this test The tests are considered successful if there is no damage or permanent deformation to the means of connection or the lifeboat hull after the tests Test No B8 Static overload test main structure for secondary means of launching and means of retrieval Test No A12 shall be performed both as production test and installation test When performed as installation test the test is considered successful when also the interface to the host installation is examined and there is no damage or permanent deformation after the test Test No B9 Static overload test winches Test No A13 shall be performed as production test Test No B10 Dynamic overload test winches Test No A14 shall be performed as production and installation tests During installation test the tests described in the first paragraph of test No A14 shall be performed with the suspended lifeboat with loads corresponding to 110 of the rated capacity for the means of retrieval and secondary means of launching respectively During production test the tests may be performed with a test load Test No B11 Speed test The hoisting and lowering speed of the
204. means of retrieval and secondary means of launching shall be measured when hoisting or lowering a load equal to the rated capacity for the mechanism The tests are considered successful if the speeds are within the limits described in A 1 6 In case of gravity lowering with two independent constant speed control devices the lowering speed test shall be performed for each speed control device separately with the other speed control device disabled or adjusted to a higher speed Both speed control devices shall be adjusted to correct speed after the test Test No B12 Dynamic overload test mechanisms other than hoisting With the launching appliance in an upright position corresponding to no heel or trim of the host installation the lifeboat with loads corresponding to 110 of the rated capacity for the secondary means of launching and means of retrieval shall be suspended from the suspension point of the secondary means of launching and means of retrieval All mechanisms i e skidding luffing slewing telescoping etc shall be moved in their full operating range in both directions at full speed in sequence one at a time If the movement of the skidding mechanism loaded by the weight of the lifeboat is part of the cycle the lifeboat shall be supported by the skidding tracks during this test There shall be at least two stops of each motion during the cycle The test is considered successful if the launching appliance is able to perform all
205. ment shall take into a deviation angle _ of 17 i7 i in the most unfavourable direction t o from he ma A 1 4 5 Clearance to structure Launching and recovery appliances for life saving equipment on non ship shaped installations shall be arranged and located to give a minimum safe clearance to structure The minimum safe distance measured from the nearest edge of the life saving equipment to installation structure when the life savinglifesaving equipment is hanging vertically below the suspension point with no heel or trim of the host installation are given in table A 11 Table A 11 Minimum safe distances A 2 A 3 A 4 tan20 x H tan15 x H minimum 8m Where H is the heigthheight from stored position to sea A 1 5 Dynamic effects A 1 5 1 The dynamic effects resulting from inertial effects during acceleration of drives and hoisting and gravity effects are generally given as various dynamic coefficients All dynamic coefficients shall be calculated in accordance with EN 13001 2 except 2 which shall be calculated in accordance with the requirements of this annex 2 may vary for each load combination as described herein General If necessary means shall be provided to limit the dynamic coefficient 2 to the following maximum values For the purpose of limiting the dynamic coefficient 2 the following means may be applied 4 0 for life saving equipment where personnel is sitting
206. mmand for full hoisting force is given It shall also be possible for the operator to manually de activate the system by a single action at any time e A fault in the control system for rope tensioning system shall be detected and render the system inactive giving a visual and acoustic alarm to the operator without increasing the risk represented by the hoisting system e Operating devices and indicating devices for the rope tensioning system shall be clearly marked A 7 2 8 Overspeed protection An overspeed protection device shall be implemented to prevent free fall or excessive lowering speed without exposing persons or equipment to unacceptable accelerations When overspeed is detected both primary brake and backup brake shall be applied and dynamic coefficient 2 cs shall not exceed 3 In order to prevent unintended triggering of the overspeed protection device the triggering speed shall exceed the drum rotation speed necessary for operation of the rope tensioning system if provided For gravity lowering systems provided with two mechanically independent constant speed control devices overspeed protection need not be implemented NORSOK standard Page 83 of 182199 A 7 3 Means of connection release mechanism and systems Release mechanism shall be placed on and operated from the rescue boat The release mechanism shall have an off load release capability in accordance with clause 4 4 7 6 7 1 of the LSA Code Any hand
207. mple to operate and shall be available without undue delay in order to avoid unacceptable risk Unless a risk assessment justifies another value emergency lowering should be able to land the load safely within 15 min after an unintended stop including mobilising time for the system A clear and unambiguous operation procedure for the system shall be included in the instructions for use and shall be permanently displayed at the control station 5 15 3 Emergency operation system EOS Lifting appliances for lifting of persons shall be equipped with an emergency operation system EOS Other lifting appliances may be required to be equipped with EOS in the specific annexes The system shall be able to move the load in any direction in case of a main power failure or a control system failure utilising a secondary independent power supply system and a secondary independent control system The degree of independency is illustrated in Fig 1 Control system incl Signalling display warning Manual controls control devices Data storage and logic or analogical data processing sensors protective devices Power Machine Power control actuators transmission elements including elements counter Working balance parts valves Emergency Emergency control system incl Emergency power Manual controls control devices power supply control elements Fig 1 independency of emergency operation system NO
208. n a cold room at 30 C and loaded with a suspended load corresponding to 100 of its rated capacity A 3 5 cm thick uniform layer of icing should be built onto it by spraying cold fresh water from angles above 45 degrees from horizontal with intermittent pauses to let icing form The release mechanism shall then be opened with the intended type of actuator The test is considered successful if the load is released by applying a force less than twice the force required to open the release mechanism when loaded by the same load in non icing condition ref test No A4 A 1 14 2 2 Production and installation tests for Group A 1 Test No B1 Launch test lifeboat arrangement The lifeboat shall be suspended from the primary means of launching in its dedicated launching appliance with loading condition corresponding to 110 of the rated capacity see A 2 3 of the primary means of launching with the launching appliance oriented in the upright position i e corresponding to final installation on the host facility without heel or trim For this loading condition the release mechanism shall be opened by the activation system and the lifeboat launched to sea The test is considered successful if the lifeboat is released and launched to sea with the predicted trajectory in air Any mechanism for positioning the lifeboat prior to release shall be operated in accordance with the launching procedure without external power In order to avoid exposing
209. n the lifeboat is seaborne The backup activation system shall be physically protected against inadvertent use A 3 4 8 Re entry overload protection Unless the manufacturer can demonstrate by calculations simulations or model tests that the dynamic coefficient 2 1 is within the limit described in A 1 5 the launching appliance or the lifeboat shall be arranged with a protective device or system to limit the dynamic coefficient D2c1 as specified A 3 5 Hang off relief arrangement A hang off relief arrangement shall be provided to keep the lifeboat in the stowed position when it is disconnected from the launching system Suspension points and means of connection for the hang off arrangement forming integral parts of the lifeboat shall have easy access so that it is possible to connect without entering the lifeboat The hang off relief arrangement shall be designed so that it is not possible to attach any of its components to the wrong suspension points or means of connection The hang off relief arrangement shall be marked with rated capacity in accordance with A 1 4 2 A 4 Appliances for escape chutes Group A 3 Appliances for launching and recovery of escape chutes shall be in accordance with clause 6 2 of the LSA code A 5 Appliances for rafts Group A 4 TO BE DEVELOPED A 6 Appliances for escape lines Group A 5 TO BE DEVELOPED NORSOK standard Page 81 of 182199 A 7 Appliances for rescue boats Group A 6 A 7 1 Ge
210. n the user manual For SDLAs with multiple WLLs each WLL and its corresponding direction must be explained NORSOK standard Page 121 of 182199 Detailed instruction including figures pictures must be given in the user manual to describe how the SDLA is connected and secured to the lifting appliance and to the load The interpretation of any indicating devices must be unambiguously described in the user manual For SDLAs connected with threads to the load or to the lifting appliance e g Derrick Drilling Machine the necessary torque to be applied must be specified in the user manual together with any preparation requirements e g lubrication A clear warning must be provided to inform the user that no lifting is allowed until the specified torque s have been applied Wear tolerances of load carrying elements for connection to the lifting appliance or to the load must be given in the user manual In addition to the user manual a one sheet assembly instruction with illustrations and operational limitations shall accompany the SDLA The user manual shall clearly state the safe working load SWL corresponding to the load rating C 17 3 6 Manufacturer s certificate The manufacturer s statement of compliances required by in ISO 13535 API Spec 8C 11 3 a shall also state compliance with this NORSOK standard_and state the safe working load SWL corresponding to the load tating a a a ee a en eee eee ee ee eer
211. n the work chemicals sey i Work space space of the lifting appliance High risk Consequences of failure extending beyond Personnel class Il the vicinity of the lifting equipment with very serious economic social and Dangerous materials e g explosives environmental consequences or potential flammables and dangerous for losS of humanlives at the work space E wellheads risers pipelines and at the whole site installation vessel p PP Site installation vessel K 2 Principle of high risk reduction The prioritized sequence of reducing high risks shall be as follows 1 Inherent safe design see K 3 2 Protective measures see K 4 3 Information for use see K 5 NORSOK standard Page 206 of 182199 K 3 Inherent safe design Inherent safe design shall ensure that a component or element which are needed to suspend or move the load or main parts e g the boom of the lifting appliance does not cause the load or the part of the lifting appliance to fall or move unexpectedly in case of a single failure All load bearing structure mechanisms and suspensions for high risk applications shall either be redundant duplicated or be designed with an increased risk coefficient yn Redundancy by duplicating components shall be the preferred measure except for structure such as foundations pedestals superstructure booms and mechanisms where duplication is normally not feasible or will create other significant hazards o
212. nce with CEN TS 13001 3 5 with the following additional requirement Specific resistance coefficient shall be set to Ysm 1 0 Non standardised metallic components Means of connection made from components that are not shaped in accordance with any standardised components and which are not made from rolled structural steel or aluminium ref A 1 8 2 shall have a breaking force equal to that required for standardised components In addition these components shall be able to withstand a manufacturing proof force MPF without permanent deformation The manufacturing proof force shall be BF MPF A45 1 6 A 17 Formatert Tabulatorstopp 15 cm Standardised non metallic components Left Standardised non metallic components such as roundslings or slings made from man made or natural fibre webbings or ropes shall be made in accordance with the following standards e Flat woven webbing slings EN 1492 1 Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e Roundslings EN 1492 2 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e Slings from fibre ropes EN 1492 4 ELU Exception Elastic pennants for rescue boats lifted by offshore cranes see A 7 4 1 These components shall be selected with a breaking force resulting from equation A 16 with resistance factor Y 2 3 but the breaking force shall not be less than 7 times the rated capacity A 1 8 4 Strength proportions For launching and recovery appliances of group A 2 and A 6 the req
213. nces apply e RR C 271 U S Federal Specification ee e EN 1677 1 Components for slings Safety Part 1 Forged steel components Grade 8 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 NORSOK standard Page 116 of 182199 C 16 7 2 Complementary requirements for swivels Threaded load bearing parts of the swivel shall be protected against unscrewing C 16 8 Turn buckles C 16 8 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply e EN 1677 1 Components for slings Safety Part 1 Forged steel components Grade 8 ai Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e FF T 791 B U S Federal Specification Turnbuckle kai ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved A cm C 16 8 2 Complementary requirements for turn buckles C 16 8 2 1 Design The turnbuckle shall be equipped with means to lock adjustable rods from unintended disengagement C 16 9 Pulley blocks and hook blocks single and multiple sheaves C 16 9 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply Manually operated pully blocks and deflection pulleys e EN 13157 Cranes Safety Hand power lifting equipment a Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 0 75 cm Hook blocks pully blocks deflection pulleys and sheaves sheave houses to be used as integral parts of powered lifting appliances e EN 13135 2 Cranes E
214. nd Lifts for transportation of persons and nein accordanceinith pinion lifts goods EN 81 1 Clause 1 to Clause 5 Relevant require E5 Goods lift Goods lift above 300 kg mnenineatnements ct EN 81 3 E 3 Additional requirements for all lifts group E1 E2 and E4 E 3 1 General Lifts shall be designed to operate in a minimum operational temperature of 20 C unless otherwise specified in standards referred to in this annex Fire protection shall be in compliance with the general area classification For floating installations lifts and associated guides and components shall be constructed to allow for the relevant movements As an addendum to EN standards ISO 8383 should be used for relevant parts Lifts shall not be considered as a part of escape routes However it shall be possible to escape from the lift and the hoist way with the lift at any elevation This may require a hatch in the lift car roof and permanent ladder in the well The lift car shall automatically be prevented from moving when personnel isare escaping from the well The lift should to be manually reset from outside the well The escape system shall be risk evaluated Alternatively the escape system can be arranged outside the projection of the lift car roof Escape from legs shafts columns of an installation shall be considered separately If use of lift is necessary to ensure adequate and effective escape the lift system shall satisfy special NORSOK sta
215. ndard Page 138 of 182199 requirements e g concerning transport of injured personnel on stretchers protection ventilation power supply Relevant requirements in NS EN 81 72 should be considered Passenger and goods lift s shall be provided if living quarters has more than one floor level The lift s shall provide access to all main levels and at least one lift shall be dimensioned to accommodate a standard stretcher 2 200 mm x 650 mm with an inside cabin floor dimension of minimum 2 400 mm x 1 200 mm Any continuation of internal lift s fromthe the living quarters to any levels outside the living quarters should be considered divided by appropriate smoke and sound barrier s Wire terminations by use of U bolt clamps on tensioned part of wire ropes is prohibited The design of rigid screens protecting rotating moving equipment shall enable easy inspection and maintenance of the protected equipment Audible and visual alarm in the central control room shall be automatically activated if the lift goes out of service unintended stop between landing doors Upon low alarm for HC gas detection 20 LEL in the area surrounding the lift well lifts shall automatically go to next floor level and stop Continued use of the lift shall be prohibited Upon high alarm for HC gas detection 30 LEL in the area surrounding the lift well the lift shall stop E 3 2 Lift well Lifts shall have a totally enclosed lift well Every landi
216. ndard both thermsterms proof load and proof force are used having the same meaning Fe Sc a eg cs E SE tne a esse N E tg ig esses ee ts Formatert Skrift 10 pkt Formatert TermNum I nnrykk 3 1 36 Venstre 0 cm F rste linje 0 cm proof load test proof force test a static tensile test with a specified proof load proof force to which lifting components or lifting accessories Formatert TermNum are subjected during or after manufacturing After the test the tested object shall meet a specified acceptance criterion with respect to deformation 3 1 37 rated capacity R maximum load that a lifting appliance is designed to lift under specific conditions NOTE Rated capacity which corresponds to SWL used by International Labour OrganisationOrganization ILO 3 1 38 redundant component component or components which continue to perform a failed component s purpose or function without affecting the safe operation 3 1 39 release mechanism parts of the means of connection that are moveable for the purpose of disconnecting the ife savinglifesaving equipment from its launching and recovery appliance 3 1 40 release system combination of release mechanism and activation system 3 1 41 reliability ability of an item to perform a required function under given conditions for a given time interval 3 1 42 reliable component component which is capable of withstanding all load conditions distur
217. ne hoisting speed shall be assumed no less than 2 m s The carrier shall be designed for lifting personnel that are sitting The seats shall be equipped with seat belts that are easy to disconnect The carrier shall be designed to protect passengers from harmful accelerations decelerations when the carrier is subjected to a vertical impact speed of minimum 4 m s due to relative speed between boat deck and carrier at lift off or landing and when the carrier is subjected to a horizontal impact speed of minimum 2 m s due to swinging against an obstruction A damaged carrier may be acceptable when subjected to the horizontal impact but the load bearing capacity shall not be reduced The carrier shall be designed to facilitate transport of at least one injured person on a stretcher together with medical personnel The carrier shall be equipped with two dedicated lifting sets with independent lifting points in the carrier and with independent top links The top links to be attached to the crane hook should have minimum internal dimensions 270 x 140 mm Each individual lifting set shall be designed for the full load when calculated in accordance with the above requirements The lifting sets shall be permanently attached to independent lifting points of the carrier with means requiring tools to remove The length of the lifting sets shall be sufficient to allow necessary slack off after landing on a vessel deck to prevent snagging due to vessel motions
218. ne ventilation system orinthe combustien aitinetinstallation without delay see NORSOK S 001 a ee ee p Formatert Engelsk USA Lifting appliances for life saving appliances and for the lifting of personnel may be specially considered 5 4 Ergonomics 5 4 1 General Lifting equipment shall be designed in accordance with ergonomic principles in accordance with EN 614 1 and EN 614 2 In addition ee eats shatland NORSOK S 002 should be used for guidance Relevant 5 4 2 Operator position Control stations for lifting appliances shall be designed and constructed to avoid any risk related to the health and safety of the operator and such that the operator can safely supervise and control the lifting operations Design of displays and control actuators shall be in accordance with EN 894 1 EN 894 2 and EN 894 3 5 4 3 Escape and access Lifting appliances shall be equipped with access and escape routes for persenneHn accerdance with EN 13586 Lifting appliances shall be designed for safe access for operation including operation of emergency systemsin accordance with _5 15 operation inspection and maintenance in accordance with NORSOK S 902 EN 13586 aai Formatert ngen punktmerking eller nummerering NORSOK standard Page 22 of 182199 It shall be possible to evacuate personnel using stretchers from permanent control cabin and access provided for firefighting equipment NOTE The instal
219. neral Launching and recovery of rescue boats may be performed by general purpose offshore cranes or dedicated rescue boat cranes or davits especially designed for such operations This clause applies to dedicated rescue boat cranes or davits especially designed for such operations Reference is made to Annex G for general purpose offshore cranes intended for lifting rescue boats This clause also applies to the means of connection that form integral parts of the rescue boat including their release mechanisms release systems and anchorage to the hull NOTE The requirements in this clause of Annex A apply to launching appliances for rescue boats with one suspension point with single fall or multiple falls Other solutions e g multiple suspension points may also be considered but at the time of publication of this NORSOK standard such solutions are not considered sufficiently qualified Other solutions must be qualified in accordance with 4 15 The requirements in this clause apply in addition to the requirements in A 1 for launching and recovery appliances of Group A 6 The launching and recovery appliances shall be able to operate a fully loaded rescue boat in all positions The following requirements from NMD Regulation 4 July 2007 No 853 apply for launching and recovery appliances for rescue boats e section 11 1 paragraph SSS Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e section 11 4 paragraph including sub clauses a and c eae ved
220. ng Lifeboat Prototype Production Installation appliance I Il Ill X X Primary Release test 200 Al X X means of Tensile test means of connection A2 X launching Tensile test means of connection anchorage in hull A3 X Actuator force primary means of launching A4 X Function test of activation system manually operated A6 B2 actuator X Function test of activation system powered actuator A7 B3 X X Launch test lifeboat arrangement A5 B1 B1 Empty and 110 110 110 X X Dynamic overload test mechanisms for positioning A8 B1 B1 120 110 110 X X Launch simulation 110 and empty lifeboat AQ B4 X Static overload test 220 A10 B5 X x Proof load test means of connection B7 X Ice test release mechanism primary means of launching A16 X X Secondary Tensile test means of connection A2 X means Tensile test means of connection anchorage in hull A3 X of launching Static overload test main structure A12 B8 B8 X Static overload test winches A13 B9 X X Dynamic overload test winches A14 B10 B10 X X Proof load test means of connection B7 X Speed test B11 B11 X Dynamic overload test mechanisms other than hoisting B12 B12 X Function testing B13 B13 X Release test A15 B14 X X Means of Tensile test means of connection A2 X retrieval Tensile test means of connection anchorage in hull A3 X Static overload test main structure A12 B8 B8 X Static overload test winches A13 B9 X X Dynamic overload test winches A14 B10 B10 X X
221. ng The manufacturer of the lifting appliance shall however perform a one time prototype test of each pipe dimension The documented results shall be available on request e Piping and tube fittings other than above mention combination of industrial tube fittings and cold formed pipe ends shall be pressure tested to to 1 5 times the maximum working pressure of the system limited to 70 Bar above the maximum working pressure e Hydraulic hoses and pipe fittings for the return lines and drain lines may be exceptedomitted from pressure testing NORSOK standard specifications for piping and pipe fittings for process plants and instrument tubing shall not be used for lifting appliances The test pressure holding time shall be minimum 5 min and the oil temperature shall be minimum 7 C 5 19 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC 5 19 1 EMC immunity EMC immunity of lifting appliances shall be in accordance with IEC 61000 6 2 5 19 2 EMC emission EMC emission of lifting appliances shall be in accordance with IEC 61000 6 4 5 20 Exhaust and noise emissions Lifting appliances shall be designed for minimum noise emission according to ISO TR 11688 1 and ISO TR 11688 2 The A weighted emission sound pressure level at the operator position with windows and doors NORSOK standard Page 30 of 182199 closed and the HVAC turned on if applicable shall be in accordance with the limits given in NORSOK S 002 Annex A 5 21 Utility systems 5 21
222. ng components may be lifting accessories on their own 3 1 21 lifting equipment common term for all equipment covered by the scope of this standard 3 1 22 lifting operation all administrative and operational activities before during and after a load is moved and until the lifting equipment is ready for a new load 3 1 23 lifting set term used for single legged or multi legged slings 3 1 24 lifting zone space between the working area and the maximum lifting height NORSOK standard Page 11 of 182199 3 1 25 LSA code the IMO SOLAS Life savingLifesaving appliances LSA Code 2003 Edition adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee MSC by resolution MSC 48 66 including the Revised recommendation on testing of life saving appliances resolution MSC 81 70 ___ Formatert Skrift Fet l Formatert Term s main lay down area deck area for temporary storage of loads and equipment during normal logistics operation of the installation 3 1 27 material handling vertical and horizontal movement of a load NOTE Material handling principles include all activities related to handling of goods and materials to and from and internally on the installation in all phases of its lifetime 3 1 28 may verbal form used to indicate a course of action permissible within the limits of this NORSOK standard 3 1 29 means of connection mechanical parts e g hooks links rings etc intended for connection of the life
223. ng entrance shall incorporate a sill of sufficient strength to withstand the passage of loads being introduced into the car A slight counter slope shall be provided in front of each landing sill to avoid water from washing sprinkling etc draining into the well Landings entrances exposed to weather shall have a drain to prevent water from coming in to the well It shall be possible to transport goods consistent with the capacity of the lift by means of pallet jack in and out of the lift without obstruction from door thresholds or without damaging the threshold The distance between lift car sill and well wall may in special circumstances be increased to 0 25 m If it is not acceptable to mount a socket outlet in the pit one socket shall be placed near bynearby outside the pit Alarm in pit can be omitted if work procedures establish that radio communication always shall be present when working in the pit If a drain point is located at the bottom of the lift pit it shall be gas tight and have a fail safe mechanism against drying out The well shall be provided with electric lighting giving a permanent intensity of illumination of at least 50 lux even when all the doors closed Installation of emergency lighting in the well shall be considered in accordance with NORSOK S 001 E 3 3 Lift car Switch for illumination of the car can be omitted if there is an information sign in the main switchboard and the contactors for the li
224. ng into account partial safety factor yp 1 1 a dynamic coefficient Pz 3 0 and a risk coefficient y 1 5 NOTE The dynamic coefficients of 2 5 and 3 0 are related to lifting in Hs 3m and Hs 6 m respectively and take into account the use of an elastic pendant in accordance with Annex A The dynamic factors given for such elastic pendants do not take into account any favourable effect of the cranes own elasticity or damping The favourable effects resulting from the combination of crane and pendant properties may be taken into account provided the total elasticity of crane and pendant is documented by calculations Alternatively an elastic pendant with better elastic properties may be specified as a condition for the resulting load chart G 11 20 Instructions for lifting rescue boat with offshore cranes The crane shall be equipped with a detailed instruction for rescue boat operations The dynamic load chart shall clearly state the conditions upon which it is based and if relevant the type and specification of the elastic pendant sling that is to be used The dynamic load chart shall differentiate between training operations and emergency operations NOTE In an emergency where the offshore crane is to be used for handling the rescue boat it is to be noted that this operation has to be authorised by the installation management in each case In an emergency situation the operational risks as well as the technical risks for the rescue team ha
225. ng mechanism and speed control The lowering motion shall only depend on gravity or stored mechanical energy Once the lowering motion has started it shall continue regardless of any crew intervention until the lifeboat is seaborne The lowering speed shall be controlled by two independent constant speed control devices The speed control devices shall be able to control the lowering motion within the speed limit given in A 1 6 In case of failure in one of the speed control devices the speed should not exceed 1 5 m s A 3 4 4 Disabled safety features No other safety features shall be operational during the descent except for those ensuring the release mechanism to be secured NORSOK standard Page 79 of 182199 A 3 4 5 Release system Once the lifeboat is seaborne the release mechanisms for both the wire rope suspensions shall be opened automatically by the primary activation system A 3 4 6 Release mechanism The release mechanism shall be designed in such a way that it will not be forced open by the self weight of the lifeboat i e an external force from an actuator shall be necessary to open the release mechanism The actuator and release mechanism shall be interconnected in the positive mode in accordance with ISO 12100 6 2 5 Dynamics caused by initiation of the emergency evacuation from installation deck elevation or oscillation during the descent boat acceleration shall not cause the release mechanism to open unintentionall
226. ng routes motion characteristics splash zones waves tides and current etc b adynamic load chart for sub seasubsea lifting shall be calculated for each separate lifting operation reflecting the weight volume and shape of the lifted object wave height and period depth current vessel motions etc and specific operational limitations c any operational limitations of rope tensioning or heave compensation systems e g maximum or minimum stroke pressures or velocities shall be stated in the instruction for use in such a way to for the crane operator to limit or terminate the operation at specified limits These limits shall reflect adequate safety margin for each lifting operation 2 the instruction for use shall include any general operational limitations and precautions concerning subsea lifting and corresponding maintenance instructions for such service including requirements for fresh water washing and cleaning of hook blocks ropes and drums etc exposed to seawater after each operation amp the instructions for use shall include detailed procedures and acceptance criteria for initial and periodic testing of any heave compensation rope tensioning or ASOPSAOPS system that are installed on the crane G 13 Power driven winches and hoists Group G7 G 13 1 Design of power driven winches Power driven winches shall be in accordance with EN 14492 1 using the design criteria given in G 3 Power driven winches shall be e
227. nstre J ustert ved i Passe 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm time limits environamentalEnvironmental limits NORSOK standard Page 17 of 182199 4 11 3 Identification of hazards All hazards hazardous situations and events shall be systematically identified The phases shall include but not be limited to construction Formatert Nummerert Niv 1 assembly Nummereringsstil Punkt Start pa 1 FAT Justering Venstre Justert ved 4 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm transport installation commissioning use and foreseeable misuse maintenance and testing repair de commissioning dismantling and removal Further reference is ISO 12100 4 11 4 Estimation of risks The risk is the combination of the probability of occurrence of harm and the severity of that harm The severity of harm to health can be estimated by taking into account a the severity of injuries or damage 1 slight 2 serious 3 fatal b the extent of harm 1 one person 2 several persons Or in case of an extended harm of an economic and or environmental nature a the severity of the extended harm in terms of cost or environmental damage 1 minor 2 major 3 catastrophic b the extent of the extended harm in terms of cost or environmental damage 1 slight 2 moderate 3 extensive The probability of occurrence of any harm shall be estimated by taking into account the exposure to a hazard occurr
228. nt that must be handled during use with other lifting equipment its mass must be indicated legibly indelibly and unambiguously Safety colours and safety signs of lifting equipment shall be in accordance with ISO 3864 1 ISO 3864 2 ISO 3864 3 and ISO 13200 NORSOK standard Page 33 of 182199 Annex A Normative Launching and recovery appliances for life saving equipment A 1 General Group A A 1 1 Introduction The requirements of this annex apply in addition to the requirements stated in sections 1 5 in the main part this Standard Some of the requirements given in this annex may require new and unproven technology Unproven technical solutions shall be qualified in accordance with 4 15 This annex contains technical requirements concerning lifting and lowering facilities of launching and recovery appliances for life saving equipment This annex also covers suspension and hang off points for lifesaving equipment and means of connection and release systems that are integral part of the life saminglifesaving equipment Reference is also made to NORSOK S 001 and NORSOK S 002 This annex does not cover outfitting and other technical facilities that are not related to launching hang off or recovery of the ife savinglifesaving equipment For such equipment reference is made to national and international regulations and equipment specific standards e g DNV OS E406 for free fall lifeboats The supplie
229. ntation of lifting sets Lifting sets shall be tested and accompanied by documentation in accordance with Annex C as required for groups R1 R2 or R3 as applicable NORSOK standard Page 142 of 182199 F 2 Group overview Table F 1 gives an overview of object groups covered by this annex Table F 1 Groups of portable units Description Subject to NORSOK R 003 or R 005 Annex H and E Offshore containers Portable unit with a maximum gross mass not Unit and lifting set exceeding 25 000 kg for repeated use in the transport of goods or equipment handled in open seas to from or between fixed and or floating installations and ships Offshore service Portable unit built and equipped for a special Unit and lifting set containers service task mainly for temporary installation e g are laboratories workshops stores power plants control stations Offshore portable Portable unit or package with a primary structure Unit and lifting set units frame and maximum gross weight not exceeding 100 tonnes for repeated or single use as defined in DNV Standard for Certification No 2 7 3 clause 1 1 5 Type A Heavy lift units and Heavy lift units are portable units with a Lifting set only units for subsea maximum gross weight equal to or exceeding 50 lifting tonnes planned to be lifted as suspended load onshore or offshore Units for subsea lifting are portable units intended for lifting through wave zone and lo
230. ntre Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 may be considered as not being lifting accessories es s i i i i i O o Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved i ft 0 75 cm Requirements for lifting accessories in the drilling area are given in Annex C see references given for Formatert Skrift 10 pkt Engelsk groups D 6 and D 7 USA Formatert ngen punktmerking eller NOTE Typical lifting accessories in drilling operations Elevators and links bails lifting nipples lifting caps lifting subs pup joints for nummerering lifting running tools used for lifting lifting tools handling tools etc The drill string pup joints casings risers and down hole equipment however are regarded as parts of the load in drilling operations Equipment used for lifting solely within casings and risers in well centre may be considered as not being lifting accessories However when such equipment is intended for handling loads outside of the well centre it shall be regarded as lifting accessories and be rated for a working load limit corresponding to the load experienced when used for lifting outside of the well NORSOK standard Page 125 of 182199 D 2 Group overview The following tables include an informative list of equipment typically used in drilling operations NOTE The list is not necessarily exhaustive Lifting applianc es D1 Conven tional draw work includin g top drive d
231. of 1 500 kg To avoid unnecessary use of barriers main gangways at the installation shall not be crossing under or be placed near the lifting routes of main lay down areas The need for protection barriers along transportation routes intended for transportation of large heavy equipment and in locations where forklift trucks are used shall be evaluated The protection barriers shall not obstruct access to equipment valves etc Entrances directly into transportation routes shall be designed to avoid hazardous situations such as collisions between personnel transport equipment automatic doors etc Transportation routes shall be sized to allow transportation of the largest heaviest item from its location to the lay down area Transportation routes shall where required be designed for special transportation remedies such as heavy lifts and or forklift trucks air film transporters etc Transportation routes shall not contain steps or thresholds B 4 Material handling in a project In parallel with the engineering of the installation the engineering of lifting equipment for maintenance shall be carried out The feasibility of the material handling shall preferably be verified and documented preferably by use of 3 D design tools Alternatively the feasibility can be verified as described below Permanent lifting equipment shall preferably be installed and certified early in the construction phase enabling its use during the rest of the
232. onohull shaped installation FPSO Explanation The area between WLLyin and WLLyax to the left of the crossing points where WLLumn lt WLLyuax represents he allowable loads that can be lifted when the specific elastic pennant is used for different services In this case the elastic pennant cannot be used on a monohull installation FPSO Loads less than WLLun exceeds the acceptance criteria due to one or more of the following reasons e Dynamic factor is too high for the lifted rescue boat exceeds 2 5 for LCA or 3 0 for LCC e Dynamic safety factor SFuyn exceeds the static safety factor SFsta for either LCA or LCC Loads exceeding WLLmax do not give sufficient static safety factor i e SFsta_ lt 10 The results may also be presented as shown in table 1 4 Table 1 4 WLL variation V m s BF SEMI HULL WLLmax 1 6 3 14 3 62 5 53 4 40 NORSOK standard Page 193 of 182199 LZ 3 26 3 71 5 65 4 40 1 8 3 38 3 80 5 76 4 40 19 3 50 3 90 5 88 4 40 2 0 3 63 4 00 6 00 4 40 2 1 3 75 4 14 6 12 4 40 2 2 3 88 4 27 6 24 4 40 2 3 4 02 4 41 6 36 4 40 2 4 4 15 4 55 6 48 4 40 29 4 29 4 69 6 60 4 40 2 6 4 42 4 84 6 73 4 40 Numbers in brackets exceed the acceptance criterion NORSOK standard Page 194 of 182199 1 5 _WLL variations for a selected fib
233. ontrol system In case of unintended stops as result of power failure or failure in the control system secondary independent power and control systems in accordance with A 1 11 shall be available in mode for installation and maintenance A 3 4 Mode for emergency evacuation Pull and go A 3 4 1 General The launching shall not depend upon external energy supply other than gravity or stored mechanical power which is independent of the host installation s power supplies When the mode selector is in the position for emergency evacuation the following applies Before any movement of the lifeboat can be initiated the securing arrangement in A 1 12 need to be removed A 3 4 2 Launch devices The emergency evacuation shall be activated from within the lifeboat by the simultaneous operation of two control devices named launch The launch devices shall be placed such that one operator can Aetcannot activate both control devices simultaneously The control devices must return to neutral position when released Activation of the launch devices shall initiate the lowering motion A duplicate launch device may also be arranged outside the lifeboat for remote operation for test purposes only The launch devices shall be protected against inadvertent operation Any lashing systems for stowing the lifeboat must prevent the launch devices from being activated until lashing systems have been removed A 3 4 3 Loweri
234. ope Polyamid in accordance with EN 1492 4 NOTEOther rope constructions may also be considered but at the time of publication of this NORSOK lt Formatert Normal standard this is the most commonly used rope construction for this purpose and other constructions are not considered sufficiently qualified Other rope constructions must be qualified in accordance with 4 15 The sling shall have spliced eyes with thimbles and permanent fittings in both ends Consideration shall be given to the weight of end connections and risk of entanglement and harm to personnel operating the equipment Links rings etc used as means of connection shall be in accordance with A 1 8 3 using factors from load combinations described in A 7 6 2 Means of connection in the lower end of the pennant shall be designed such that incorrect attachment and snagging hazards are avoided The sling length shall be calculated by taking into account the maximum allowable dynamic factors and safety factors given in A 7 4 3 However sling length shall not be less than 8m It is assumed that the offshore crane is designed with sufficient hoisting lowering velocity to avoid re entry in the LS life saving condition Formatert Normal Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp 1 5 cm Left A 7 4 2__ Working load limit WLL Formatert Normal Mellomrom F r 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp 1 5 cm Left The wor
235. ope at the outermost layer on the winch drum If the winch is equipped with both primary and secondary brakes for the purpose of lifting lowering persons both brakes shall be applied during this load test For winches equipped with primary and secondary brakes for the purpose of lifting lowering persons the following test shall be performed in addition a load equal to 150 of the rated capacity for lifting persons see A 2 3 shall be suspended from the means of connection forming part of the hoist rope of the winch The load shall be applied with the hoist rope at the outermost layer on the winch drum The test shall be applied for the primary brake with the secondary brake disabled and the secondary brake with the primary brake disabled separately The tests are considered successful if the brakes are able to hold the load either separately or in combination as tested Test No A14 Dynamic overload test winches A load equal to 110 of the rated capacity of the secondary means of launching shall be suspended from the means of connection forming part of the hoist rope when the winch is installed in the main structure The load shall be hoisted and lowered repeatedly at full soeed and it shall be demonstrated that the winch is capable of hoisting lowering stopping and holding the load without sag The load shall be lowered at full speed starting from the uppermost position of the lifeboat The lowering motion shall be stopped b
236. or and handling of temporary company provided and hired equipment g lifting areas including sketches which are not visible from the crane cabins h weather constraints waves and wind i definition of largest heaviest item to be handled per area including description of transportation route and type of handling equipment j deck load ground capacities on all areas in the installation Both loading areas transport routes and areas between equipment The deck load ground capacities shall include allowable evenly distributes load point loads drop loads and forklift truck capacities see also B 3 3 k evaluation of concurrent crane operations on pipe deck can be verified and documented by 3D design tool requirements for dropped object protection m goods handling to from helideck n load categories for monorailsrunway beams hoists and pad eyes 0 requirements for use of rigging equipment and loose lifting equipment at the installation p material handling through shafts and hatches q standardization of the lifting equipment limiting the number of different types of equipment B 6 Offshore crane study Engineering phase An offshore crane study document based on the principles of the material handling philosophy shall be prepared and maintained throughout the engineering phase The feasibility of the material handling by means of the offshore crane shall be verified and documented by use of 3 D design tools Th
237. or deck on which the life saving equipment is located given by equation A 6 Vo is the vertical velocity in m s of the lifting appliance due to wave motions given by expression A 7 If the actual velocity for the host installation in question is known and less than vc given by expression A 7 the acixuatactual velocity may be used instead provided that value can be documented K H Vp A 6 H K Vo K H A 7 where H is the significant wave height for the operational limitation in m K 5 3 m s K2 5 5 m Ks 0 for bottom fixed installations s NORSOK standard Page 53 of 182199 Ks 0 25 for semi submersible installations s Ks 0 50 for monohull installations FPSO etc s The stiffness C of the launching and recovery appliance shall be calculated taking into account all elements from the means of connection via the ropes through to the support structure Elastic pennant if installed may also be taken into consideration R Stiffness may be calculated according to C SAL N m A 8 n where XAL is the sum of all the contribution to the total hook deflection in m For steel wire ropes the elastic deflection may be taken from the following equation Elastic deflection of rope m R Ly f 7 E A 10 where m A 9 Lw is the rope length in mm NOTE 1 For recovery pick up operations the rope length shall be calculated with the means of connection at 1 m above
238. or level recommended size of letters are minimum 50 mm H 5 8 Standardised dimensions informative The standard dimensions are intended for fixed installation and horizontal loads of 10 Special considerations should be given to runway beams on floating installations or for applications with horizontal loads above 10 Runway beams of SWL 3 tonnes and above shall be designed with arrangements for installation and removal of trolleys and hoists A typical design of installation arrangement on runway beams is given in Figure H 1 NORSOK standard Page 177 of 182199 SWL Tonnes Beam size Maximum recommended span m oa Formatert Venstre 1 HEB 100 4 1 2 HEB 160 6 1 5 3 HEB 200 8 2 6 HEB 300 10 3 8 HEB 360 10 3 10 HEB 400 10 3 12 HEB 450 10 3 16 HEB 500 10 2 5 20 HEB 650 10 2 5 115 _ 400 PLO4 PL 12 50 060 Figure H 1 FypicaHinstalation _ Example of arrangement for installation of hoists and trolley with lt Formatert Venstre Innrykk Venstre self weight up to 500 kg Special consideration of instaHaticn nstallation arrangement 0 cm Hengende 2 cm geome ane or trolley and beamshoist is to be marked with farge SWL_and tested accordingly ref H 6 H 5 9 Documentation and testing H 5 9 1 Load test requirements Each runway beam shall be subjected to a proof load test according to Table H 4 The test load sh
239. or use The corresponding design temperature shall be determined by the manufacturer Lifting equipment designed to operate in cold climate where snow and ice may occur shall be designed for minimum snow and ice accumulation and the instruction for use shall state any operational limitations caused by snow and ice NORSOK standard Page 24 of 182199 5 5 2 Atmosphere Lifting equipment shall be designed for operation in a marine atmosphere with 100 relative humidity unless otherwise agreed 5 5 3 Radiation Lifting equipment intended to be used in areas where it may be exposed to heat radiation from flares or burner booms etc shall be fitted with heat radiation shielding and any operational limitations shall be stated in the instructions for use Wire ropes sheaves etc which are exposed to heat radiation shall be fitted with facilities for lubrication Replacement intervals shall be compatible with local radiation levels Lifting appliances shall be designed to limit radiation generation in accordance with EN 12198 2 5 5 4 Wind Where applicable for lifting appliances wind loads shall be specified for both in service and out of service Reference is made to specific requirements given in annexes for the equipment groups Where no specific wind loads are specified the requirements stated in EN 13001 2 4 2 3 1 and 4 2 4 2 apply 5 5 5 Waves sea induced motions and inclinations Where applicable lifting equipment
240. ork including top drive DDM Group D 2 In addition to the general requirements given in D 1 the following requirements apply Cylinder operated drawworks are defined as complex lifting appliances ref main part of this NORSOK standard NORSOK standard Page 134 of 182199 For a cylinder operated hydraulic drawwork the components directly controlling the load shall be regarded as main load path components Typical examples are pressurized valve block units controlling the cylinders These components shall be designed as if the components were a part of the hydraulic cylinder regarding material selection safety factor and pressure test requirements These main components of the cylinder operated drawwork shall be thoroughly considered in the safety analysis D 6 Vertical pipe handling VPH machines Group D 3 D 6 1 Dynamic factor For vertical pipe handling VPH machines the dynamic factor shall reflect the actual working condition of the handling machine and shall not be less than 1 3 independent of type of installation fixed or floating The dynamic factor to be used for each individual machine depends on the stiffness of the load handling system A machine with a flexible jib or a wire suspended load may be calculated using the minimum value of 1 3 A stiffer system e g where the tubulars are handled directly by a gripper claw and driven vertically e g bya rack and pinion drive and supported to a rigid structure the dynamic
241. ormatert USA z Skrift 8 pkt Engelsk NORSOK standard Page 183 of 182199 Table H 36 Informative Foundation interface comparison table INFORMATIVE FOUNDATION INTERFACE COMPARISON TABLE LIFTING APPLIANCES STANDARDS NORSOK N 001 STRUCTURAL DESIGN STANDARD FOR EN 13001 2 EN13852 1 EN 15011 etc ACTIONS ON FOUNDATION AND SUPPORTING STRUCTURE Load Description Partial Conseq NORSOK Perma Variable Environ Conseq Cases of safety Factor N 001 nent Actions mental Factor Comments from Crane load factor Ye action actions Yc fr rel t standards some loa Yo s G Q E relevant cases Regular For local foundation LCA working Z ME f nvironmental actions ici EIk 1 34 1 25 ULS a 1 3 1 3 1 25 may be ignored if crane actions working at maximum capacity E g Operational wind F limits for offshore cranes LCB Occasional Working with 1 22 1 25 fursa 13 13 0 7 1 25 a m s 3 sec LC II wind __ Operational Sign wave height limits Typ 6 m Exceptional E g Environmental Lec pena wina 1 16 aar uring stowing uring out o and out of service cei service and i 1 0 fULSb 1 0 i 1 3 1 0 Annual probability of stowed exceedance position 10 Exceptional Extreme wind E g Extreme LCC during out of environmental actions service and 1 1 1 0 ALS 1 0 1 0 1 0 during stowing out of LC III stowed service position
242. otection against horizontal and vertical loads shall be provided where necessary in the working and lay down areas where lifting equipment is used The impact protection shall have a design able to absorb the energy induced by the lifting appliances and their loads without being NORSOK standard Page 94 of 182199 damaged in a way that causes unacceptable risk and or possible harm and shall facilitate means for personnel escape in danger zones Bumpers shall preferable be made of vertical elements facing the load handling area to prevent loads from snagging the bumper Bumpers should have a conspicuous colour distinguished from the surrendingssurroundings Suitable protective structures for swinging loads shall be provided for protection of escape routes lighting fixtures instrumentation piping and other equipment near the working and storage areas On floating installations working and lay down areas shall be equipped with reinforced impact protection designed to take up the loads induced by the installation s motions and the motions induced by the lifting appliances Protective structures should be coloredcoloured in accordance with local colercolour coding schedule for cordon off at the installation B 3 3 Lifting zones The term dropped object in this subclause means the load parts of the load any lifting accessories or crane booms which have the potential of being dropped or moved unintentionally within the lifting area a
243. own and stop of relevant motions should be installed G 11 18 Subsea operations Offshore cranes intended for handling of loads sub sea shall be specially designed for such operations and shall fulfil the requirements of G 12 4 G 11 19 Rescue boat lifting operations Offshore cranes intended for rescue boat lifting operations shall have hoisting speed not less than required in G 11 16 for rated capacity when lifting goods with single fall reeving The hoisting speed shall be available for the actual weight of the rescue boat intended to be lifted For offshore cranes intended for rescue boat lifting operations the requirements of 5 8 610 2 in EN 13852 1 are to be replaced by the requirements of 5 15 and G 4 The dynamic load chart shall include rescue boat operations from Hs 0 m to Hs 6 m The dynamic load chart for training and maintenance operations shall be calculated for sea states from Hs 0 m to Hs 3 musing load effects in accordance with EN 13001 2 Such operations are considered as load combinations A and B ref Table 10 of EN 13001 2 taking into account partial safety factors yp 1 34 and 1 22 respectively a dynamic coefficient 2 2 5 and a risk coefficient y 1 5 The dynamic load chart for emergency real rescue operations shall be calculated for sea states from Hs 3 m to Hs 6 musing load effects in accordance with EN 13001 2 Such operations are considered as load combination C see Table 10 of EN 13001 2 taki
244. pers e g indicators warning devices or devices for two action control shall fulfil a required performance level C in accordance with ISO 13849 1 Grippers may be equipped with means for emergency operation in case of power failure Such means shall require the use of external tools or power source e g hydraulic hand pump to open the grippers C 12 5 3 2 Information for use and maintenance The geometrical shape and range of sizes intended to be lifted with the mechanical gripper shall be described in the user instructions In addition a clear warning shall be stated not to lift other shapes or sizes than those described in the instructions In case grippers are equipped with means for emergency operation clear instructions must be given to off load the grippers and secure the load from falling or uncontrolled movements prior to opening the grippers C 13 Load carriers Group R6 C 13 1 Baskets for onshore plants and onboard lifting on offshore installations C 13 1 1 General requirements Baskets shall be designed in accordance with Annex F of this NORSOK Standard For baskets made from aluminium proof of competence shall be performed in accordance with the requirements given in the following references EN 1999 1 1 Eurocode 9 Design of aluminium structures Part 1 1 General structural rules NORSOK standard Page 111 of 182199 C 13 1 2 Complementary requirements for baskets C 13 1 2 1 Design The proof of competence
245. pkt aw a Mungy ua i p requirements of DNV Standard for Certification No 2 7 3 Clause 3 11 Subsea Application gae Formatert Innrykk Venstre 0 cm If the requirements in F 1 could not be fully met risk reducing measures to protect the lifting set from eee Oem damage should be described in instructions for lifting Instructions should be provided to ensure that Formatert Skrift 8 pkt portable units with protruding parts are placed with some open space gt 1 5 m around the load or by use of Formatert Skrift 8 pkt bumpers and guides to minimize risk of entanglement with other loads or structures Formatert Skrift 8 pkt In cases where the lifting set may be damaged by catching its lifted object the lifting set should be designed Formatert Skrift 8 pkt or equipped to enable securing the lifting set Such securing may be temporary such as e g ropes plastic strips etc The instructions shall describe proper securing NORSOK standard Page 144 of 182199 F 7 Lifted objects Group F5 F 7 1 General Group F5 includes objects and lifting sets that do not belong in any of the groups F1 to F4 This group of lifts often have typical characteristics e g e permanent structure or equipment to be installed as a new part of the installation or moved removed Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 as part of platform modification or removal Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved
246. pliances for the lifting of personnel shall be equipped with additional safety features see 5 9 5 15 and the relevant annexes 5 1 3 Mechanical interference Lifting appliances shall be arranged and located with the aim not to interfere with other machinery or equipment Warning signals and anti collision systems shall be provided on lifting appliances where mechanical interference with other machinery or equipment represents an unacceptable risk If so such equipment shall be specified by customer 5 2 Materials and products Materials and products used to construct lifting equipment or products contained or created during the use of lifting equipment shall not cause harm The use of toxic or harmful liquids and substances shall be minimised 5 3 Fire and explosion 5 3 1 Fire prevention and protection Fire prevention and protection of lifting appliances shall be in accordance with applicable parts of EN 3463 NORSOK S 001 and EN 13478 Fire prevention and protection shall be marked in accordance with ISO 7010 5 3 2 Hazardous areas Lifting equipment shall be compatible with the classification of the area in which it is intended to be installed or used Explosion protection shall be in accordance with applicable parts of IEC 60079 series All types of lifting aeptiancesequipment fixed mobile or temporary electrical and non electrical installed or used in hazardous areas shall comply with ATEX requirements i e Zone 0 Zon
247. ppliance b stop device to disable power supply to the launching and recovery appliance c emergency stop for emergency purposes to stop all motions d movement control devices for hoisting and lowering and if applicable any other movements All movement control devices shall be of the holt to run type i e return to neutral position when released NORSOK standard Page 82 of 182199 All movements shall have variable speed control either stepless variable speed or variable speed in 2 more defined steps e control devices for emergency operation system EOS f operating and indicating devices for rope tensioning system if provided The control station must be located so that the operator has a clear view to the rescue boat during all movements A 7 2 4 Gravity lowering In case of gravity lowering the lowering speed shall be controlled by two independent constant speed control devices The speed control devices shall be able to control the lowering motion within the speed limit given in A 1 6 In case of failure in one of the speed control devices the speed should not exceed 1 5 m s A 7 2 5 Secondary independent power and conirol system In case of unintended stops as result of power failure or failure in the control system secondary independent power and control systems in accordance with A 1 11 shall be provided The secondary independent power and control system shall be operable within 1 min after an unintended stop
248. pressions for dynamic coefficient 02 C l k v A 3 A A R g R F ra p R A 4 where C is the stiffness in N m weight of hoist load divided by the corresponding hook deflection Ra is the rated capacity in N static weight of the hoist load i e the life savinglifesaving equipment Vr is the relative velocity in m s between the load and hook at the time of pick up g is the gravity acceleration 9 81 m s Fora is the maximum rope force in N at emergency braking during lowering at full speed in the upper position ka is a reduction factor depending on the shape of the particular life savinglifesaving appliance e g rescue boat life boat life raft to be lifted out of the sea water taking into account that lift off from water gives a gradually increased dynamic load compared to an immediate load lift off from e g a boat deck The value of this factor is to be set to 1 0 by default unless a lower value has been demonstrated by tests Vg Shall be calculated as follows Vp Vy tava v A 5 where VH is 0 5 Vumax for pick up in waves with stepless variable speed control VH iS 1 0 Vimax for pick up in waves with variable speed in 2 or more steps VH iS 1 0 Vumax for re entry during hoisting VH is 1 0 Vimax for re entry during lowering Vumax is the maximum steady state hoisting or lowering velocity in m s for the rated capacity to be lifted or lowered Vp is the vertical velocity in m s of the sea surface
249. quipment Part 2 Non electrotechnical equipment e EN 13001 1 Cranes General design Part 1 General principles and requirements e EN 13001 2 Cranes General design Part 2 Load actions e EN 13001 3 1 Cranes General design Part 3 1 Limit states and proof of competence of steel structures e CEN FSEN 13001 3 2 Cranes General design Part 3 2 Limit states and proof of competence of wire ropes in reeving systems e CEN TS 13001 3 5 Cranes General design Part 3 5 Limit states and proof of competence of forged hooks Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 C 16 9 2 Complementary requirements for pulley blocks and hook blocks single and multiple sheaves C 16 9 2 1 Design Hook blocks pulley blocks deflection pulleys and sheaves sheave houses to be used as integral parts of powered lifting appliances shall be designed for the dynamic load effects specified by the manufacturer of the powered lifting appliance For single sheave blocks the rated capacity shall be understood as half the maximum head pull For blocks without becket this equals maximum line pull For multi sheave blocks the rated capacity shall be understood as maximum head pull NORSOK standard Page 117 of 482199 Pulley blocks that are separable for the purpose of easy assembly shall be designed to prevent unintentional separation opening that can lead to falling objects both
250. quipped with a visual indication of the actual load during lifting operation NOTE An analogue pressure gauge may satisfy this requirement The accuracy of the indicating device may be within 10 of the rated capacity for winches with rated capacity less than 20 tonnes For winches with rated capacity of 20 tonnes and more the tolerance may be within 15 NORSOK standard Page 171 of 182199 If the winch operator is unable to see the winch from the operator position a drum motion indicator shall be arranged at the operator position Power driven winches where there i isa hazard of incorrect wire rope s ooling onto the drum shall be ensure correct Winches intended for sup seasubsea operations shall comply with G 12 4 NOTE Power driven winches in crane assemblies are covered by the applicable crane standards G 13 2 Design of power driven hoists Power driven hoists shall be in accordance with EN 14492 2 using the design criteria given in G 3 and with the additional requirement that rated capacity limiters and indicators described in clause 5 2 2 in EN 14492 2 shall be provided regardless of rated capacity of the hoist G 13 3 Design of man rider winches Man rider winches shall be designed in accordance with DNV Offshore standard DNV OS E101 Ch 2 Sec 5 using the design criteria given in G 3 except for risk coefficient yn 1 5 The following requirements apply in addition a the wire rope shall have
251. r shall ensure that interfaces regarding operational and technical aspects between launching and recovery appliances the installation and the lifesaving equipment are in compliance with this NORSOK standard The structural strength of launching and recovery appliances for lifesaving equipment shall comply with the requirements of this NORSOK standard Dynamic coefficients and risk coefficients shall be applied in accordance with A 1 4 A 1 5 and A 1 6 Launching and recovery appliances shall be in accordance with NMD Regulation 4 July 2007 No 853 concerning evacuation and life saving appliances on mobile offshore units section 8 In addition other specific sections from said NMD Regulations as referred to in this annex apply Certain requirements from the LSA Code become applicable through references in the said NMD Regulation In case of conflicting requirements in this NORSOK standard and said NMD Regulation the following applies s otherwise the requirements of this NORSOK standard apply s NOTE NOTE 1 _ Required rated capacity in said NMD Regulations may is in some cases different from required rated capacity in this standard In such cases checking the strength according to NMD Regulations shall be done with reference to rated capacity required by those Regulations whereas checking the strength according to this standard shall be done with reference to the rated capacity required by this standard NOTE 2 _ Whenever referenc
252. railing due to deflected skidding tracks The deflection criteria should be obtained from the lifeboat manufacturer The SLS shall be proven for load combinations A1 and B1 in Table A 3 When performing proof of competence for the SLS the partial safety factors and risk coefficients given in Table A 3 shall be applied A 2 5 Marking Means of retrieval and secondary means of launching shall be clearly marked to advise the user if the lifting or lowering of lifeboat with persons inside is allowed or not Marking shall be provided in both cases e g e This winch means of retrieval secondary means of launching is intended for lifting lowering the lifeboat lt Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 with persons inside during installation maintenance or training Maximum number of persons is Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved lt number of persons gt or 0 75 cm e Lifting lowering of persons is NOT ALLOWED with this winch means of retrieval secondary means of launching This marking shall be provided at the operator station A 3 Appliances for lifeboats launched by falls and a winch Group A 2 A 3 1 General The requirements in this subclause come in addition to the requirements in A 1 for launching and recovery appliances of Group A 2 The requirements listed in A 3 2 to A 3 8 describe an acceptable design Alternative designs are acceptable if the risk assessment see 4 11 proves that the alternative design resul
253. rane rigging configuration An EOS system shall be provided in accordance with clause G 4 in Annex G K 5 Information for use The information for use shall specify in detail the following operational precautions for high risk applications e Requirements for skills and training of personnel involved in high risk operations e Requirements for operation inspection and maintenance of non redundant and duplicated components and their control and safety systems including checks and tests to be performed prior to high risk operations NORSOK standard Page 209 of 482199 e Requirement to perform a specific operational risk analysis whenever the crane is going to be used in high risk applications e Requirement to minimize exposure of hazardous situations by detailed planning of lifting routes including o Minimize kinetic energy of the load and the crane by using low speed and limited speed changes during all operations o Minimize potential energy by keeping the potential falling height of the load crane components and the overturning moment at a minimum at all operations e Operational limitations due to the environment such as sight wind wave heights etc e Provisions to mechanically protect critical equipment in the working area or vicinity of the lifting equipment against collision with load or parts of lifting equipment as far as practically possible before lifting operations are carried out e Requirements for any lifting ac
254. rd Page 157 of 182199 e manufacturers name and address e identification of the lifted object and its lifting points NORSOK R 002 F5 Offboard Lift when applicable NORSOK R 002 F5 3 e maximum gross mass of the lifted object in kg e reference to a rigging design drawing with specified sling angles for the lift e asentence declaring that the lifted object and its lifting points are designed manufactured and inspected for lifting any limitations related to lifting operation e name and position of person authorisedauthorized to sign the statement e date and signature e NORSOK standard Page 158 of 182199 Annex G Normative Cranes G 1 General Group G The requirements of this annex apply in addition to the requirements stated in Clause 1 to Clause 5 G 2 Group overview An overview of the crane groups is presented in Table G 1 Table G 1 Crane overview Group no Group G1 Mobile cranes 2 G Tower cranes G3 Slewing jib cranes G4 Bridge and gantry cranes G5 Offshore cranes G6 Floating cranes 7 Winches and hoists Power driven winches Power driven hoists Manrider winches G8 Loader cranes G9 Cable cranes G10 Hand powered hoists and trolleys G20 Other cranes G 3 Design criteria G 3 1 Design loads Design loads for cranes shall be applied in accordance with 5 7 and standards referred to within this annex whichever gives the most stringent requi
255. re cranes Offshore cranes in accordance with Annex G shall be located in places which give the best combination of crane coverage and a clear view of the handling areas and supply vessels from the operator cabins The offshore cranes shall cover the deck area and lay down storage and handling areas including the entire pipe deck installations with drilling or work over facilities only For offshore installations with more than one offshore crane common lay down areas that are reachable by two offshore cranes shall be provided Lay down areas close to the crane pedestals i e at shorter radius than miniumaminimum working radius shall be avoided The offshore cranes shall have the outreach necessary to avoid offlead in conjunction with handling of loading hoses to from supply vessels The offshore cranes including crane hooks shall not be planned used as hang off points for other material handling equipment Offshore crane boom rests shall be provided A dedicated area with access for maintenance e g replacement of crane hooks and steel wire ropes with an arrangement for storage of main load and whip line hooks shall be provided The need for a separate working platform for this purpose shall be considered A device for load testing of the main cranes should be installed in the deck structure if specified by the crane manufacturer B 3 Working areas B 3 1 General Main lay down areas for regular material handling shall be cl
256. re rope When a rope with specified characteristics is selected the minimum and maximum WLL can be presented in curves or tables Using the example in 1 3 a rope with the following specified characteristics has been selected e Rope construction 8 strand plaited e Rope material Polyamide e Rope diameter 52mm e Minimum breaking load MBL 480 kN e Static stiffness K 1 8 NB Static stiffness K and minimum breaking load MBL have to be documented by type testing as described in A 7 5 The maximum WLL is given by the required static safety factor SF ta gt 10 WLLmax 4 4 tonnes The minimum WLL is depending on the applicable service and will vary according to the curves shown in figures 1 4 1 5 and 1 6 Example If a rescue boat with gross mass of 3 6 tonnes is to be lifted by an offshore crane located on a bottom fixed unit with a maximum steady state hoisting speed of 2 2 m s using the curves in figure 4 will return a minimum length between splices of 11 5m Calculations are not shown here only results It is recommended that manufacturers create their own curves based on the specifications for the applicable ropes to be used in order to enable easy selection of pennant length for the requested service WLLyiy Bottom Fixed Unit s V 1 6 m s V 1 8 m s V 2 0 m s V 2 2 m s V 24 m s WLhlmax a v
257. rement The design load shall be established reflecting the maximum operating load both static and dynamic to be applied for design calculations For load combinations reference is also given to DNV Standard for certification No 2 22 Lifting Appliances G 3 2 Operating temperature limits and inclination angles Cranes shall be designed to operate in a minimum operational temperature of 20 C unless otherwise agreed or specified in standards referred to in this annex The minimum and maximum operating temperature Tomin and Tomax is the minimum and maximum environmental temperature for normal operation of the crane where all effects of high and low temperatures have been taken into account G 3 3 Inclination angles Formatert Skrift Fet hse ce ee ne a a EA Cranes used onshore shall be designed for a minimum inclination from the horizontal of 1 in all directions NORSOK standard Page 159 of 182199 Cranes used offshore shall be designed for a minimum inclination from the horizontal according to Table G 2 Table G 2 Inclination angles Location Inclination angle Bottom fixed installations tension leg platforms jack ups and submersibles fixed Semi submersible jack up floating Barges of length less than 4 times breadth Ships and vessels having shipshape hull properties The resulting maximum inclination from heel and trim of the installation for which the crane is designed
258. requirements given in the references in general requirements and the following additional requirements e top link shall meet the material requirements given in DNV Standard for Certification No 2 7 1 aaa Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Containers clause 8 4 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e hooks shall be in accordance with DNV Standard for Certification No 2 22 Lifting Appliances 0 75 cm C 14 3 3 Information for use and maintenance The user manual must clearly state that forerunners shall be subjected to thorough examination by a qualified user every 14 day The method of inspection focus areas and discard criteria shall be described C 14 3 4 Marking The complementary requirements listed in C 10 2 4 also apply to forerunners pennants C 15 Elastic forerunner pennant for rescue MOB boats Group R8 C 15 1 General requirements The regeuirementsrequirements given in the following references apply e EN 1492 4 Textile slings Safety Part 4 Lifting slings for general service made from natural and man Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 made fibre ropes Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e EN 1677 4 Components for slings Safety Part 4 Links Grade 8 0 75 cm C 15 2 Complementary requirements for elastic forerunners pennants for rescue boats C 15 2 1 Design The requirements in A 7 4 and A 7 5 apply to elastic forerunners pennants for rescue boats Such elastic forerunners pennants are intende
259. rieval 1 1 x fully loaded lifeboat e hang off relief arrangement 1 1 x fully loaded lifeboat NOTE The factor 1 1 to calculate rated capacity for means of retrieval and hang off relief arrangement is introduced in order to have sufficient capacity to recover and stowe the lifeboat with 110 test loads without overloading the mechanism The factor 1 1 to calculate rated capacity for secondary means of launching is a natural consequence since it will normally be the same winch as the means of retrieval Fully loaded lifeboat means the gross mass of a fully equipped lifeboat when boarded with its full complements of persons crew and passengers Main structure shall be proved for the load effects resulting from applicable loads on all the mechanisms whichever gives the highest load effects If secondary means of launching and means of retrieval is intended to be used with persons inside the lifeboat the proof of competence shall also be performed with rated capacity for lifting persons Rated capacity for lifting persons with these mechanisms shall as a minimum be taken as empty fully equipped lifeboat with crew of 3 persons When performing proof of competence with rated capacity for lifting persons the risk coefficient given in A 1 7 shall be applied A 2 4 Functional and safety requirements A 2 4 1 Primary means of launching A 2 4 1 1 General The primary means of launching shall be capable of launching the lifeboat in an
260. rise of competence To be agreed with enterprise of competence Table C 3 Reduced test load over 25 t WLL tonnes Static test load tonnes WLL s 25 2 x WLL 25 lt WLL lt 30 55 30 lt WLL lt 35 65 35 lt WLL lt 40 70 40 lt WLL lt 45 75 45 lt WLL lt 50 85 50 lt WLL lt 55 90 55 lt WLL lt 60 95 60 lt WLL lt 65 100 65 lt WLL lt 70 110 70 lt WLL lt 75 115 75 lt WLL lt 80 120 80 lt WLL lt 85 125 85 lt WLL lt 90 130 90 lt WLL lt 95 135 95 lt WLL lt 100 145 100 lt WLL lt 110 155 110 lt WLL lt 120 165 120 lt WLL lt 130 175 130 lt WLL lt 140 190 140 lt WLL lt 150 200 150 lt WLL lt 160 215 160 lt WLL lt 170 230 170 lt WLL lt 180 240 WLL gt 180 1 33 x WLL C 7 2 Documentation In addition to the technical file required by 5 25 each lifting accessory shall be accompanied by a certificate issued by an enterprise of competence prior to use in accordance with Annex E of NORSOK R 003 or NORSOK R 005 as applicable The certificate shall state the applied test load in accordance with C 7 1 NORSOK standard Page 103 of 182199 C 8 Chain slings Group R1 C 8 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply Chains for chain slings See group R9 Lifting components Single leg and multi leg slings EN 818
261. rotected against external influence e g impacts that may affect their integrity The locking element s shall be designed according to a self closing principle i e when the load acts in the opening direction s the forces transferred to the locking element s shall act in the closing direction of the locking element s The securing device shall be a mechanical restraint device that prevents the locking element s to be opened unintentionally e g by external impacts It shall not be possible to unlock the locking element s when the securing device is engaged in the secured position It shall not be possible to disengage the securing device when the elevator is loaded The indication device shall positively indicate for visual observation on the elevator when the elevator is locked and secured The indication device shall indicate locked and secured by a positive mechanical action between the securing device and the indication device The indication device shall be mechanically restricted from indicating locked and secured when the securing device is not in the secured position The securing device and the indication device may be combined The indication device shall not depend on any manual intervention by the operator Whenever the elevator is unlocked or unsecured the indication device shall clearly and unambiguously indicate that the elevator is unlocked and unsecured C 17 3 2 3 Manually operated elevators
262. rt Skrift 8 pkt B 3 4 Shafts hatches Vertical handling of loads in shafts should preferably be by use of personnel and goods lift Shafts that will be used for lifting operations shall be designed in such a way that loads cannot get trapped or stuck Hatches that are opened and closed frequently should be hinged Hatches shall be designed with a dedicated system for closing opening and be arranged for securing in open position B 3 5 Lifting operations between installation and vessel Unprotected critical equipment that can be damaged by falling loads e g risers pipelines cables subsea wellheads and equipment shall not be installed in areas on and by the side of installations intended for loading and unloading of vessels There shall be no drain or liquid outlets in the area that can harm the vessel or persons on board There shall be no exhaust outlets in the area that can harm lifting appliance or lifting wire and reduce the view of the vessel The installation shall be designed without obstructions that reduce the view of the vessel from the lifting appliance B 3 6 Transportation routes PrimarlyPrimarily transportation of equipment on the installation shall be done by machine driven vehicles e g forklift trucks on offshore installations lorries at onshore installations or manually operated trolleys The main transportation routes on an offshore installation should be designed for forklift trucks with a minimum capacity
263. s A i 4 Formatert Engelsk Storbritannia 8 Wire line equipment Equipment used for well intervention Wire line cranes Yes lt SIMOPS crane unless Formatert tabell Wire line winch used for Wire line masts lifting solel within casings and risers in well centra Formatert Engelsk Storbritannia NORSOK standard Page 132 of 182199 9 Tong lift system Simple lifting device to keep rig tong in Tong lift system Yes correct height position during make Tong lift cylinder up break out Often consisting of a hydraulic cylinder wire wire sheave block and block suspension NOTE The tong itself is considered as a load and not lifting equipment 10 Escape line Means for evacuation from the derrick Yes Formatert tabell Formatert Engelsk Storbritannia 11 Miscellaneous slings Lifting accessories normally predefined fora Hang offline special task Master bushing lifting arrange Yes ments when vertical a o Formatert Engelsk Storbritannia Table D 8 Group D 7 DrilingSpecial designed lifting accessories SDLA Subgroup Equipment Main function Typical names Lifting description equip ment Yes No 1 One component Tools to connect the tubulars and equipment to the lifting Lifting nipples Yes miscellaneous appliance drilling machine for lifting in and out of the drilling Lifting caps lifting tools area Lifting adaptors Liftin
264. s NLS condition LS condition Max Max Max Max Max Max sign angle of offlead sign angle of offlead wave heel in sidelead wave heel in sidelead any angle in height any angle in direction any Hs direction any direction p direction 6 m 6 cranes used offshore Mean wind velocity v z at 10 m height above sea 10 min see EN 13001 2 4 2 3 1 Mean wind velocity shall be recalculated into 3 s gust winds at the actual height of the launching appliance above sea level Example 17 m s 10 min corresponds to 25 m s 3 s gust wind P The angle of heel for the damaged host facility shall be set to 17 unless other host facility specific values are known For damaged host condition of 17 or another known host specific value the actions from environmental loads may be reduced by 20 For intact host condition 0 heel environmental load shall be applied without reduction Max angle of heel is considered to include offlead sidelead d For the NLS condition maximum values are to be understood as design criteria and corresponding operational limit for this condition Higher values may be agreed for the NLS condition For the LS condition maximum values are to be understood as desingdesign criteria but not operational iimitslimits for Hfe savinglifesaving A 1 4 2 Rated capacity Unless otherwise stated in the subsequent clauses of t
265. s bolts and welds are checked against yield limits for steel in accordance with recommended Formatert Skrift 8 pkt standards Lifting accessories like slings shackles and rings are checked against minimum breaking load Thus the safety levels for all load bearings components are considered to be approximately equal Formatert Skrift 8 pkt F 7 2 3 8 Design factor DF The design factor DF is defined as DF Yp Yc F 3 where Yp partial load factor Yc consequence factor Fabel lTable F 45 Design factors DF ELEMENT CATEGORY Yp Ye T p C Lifting points including attachments to object ay i 1 34 1 25 1 68 Single critical elements supporting the lifting point Lifting equipment spreader bar shackles slings etc 1 34 1 25 1 68 Main elements which are supporting the lift point 1 34 1 10 1 48 Other structural elements of the lifted object 1 34 1 0 1 34 F 7 2 4 Lifting arrangement F 7 2 4 1 Lifting arrangement drawing A lifting arrangement in this context consists of the lifted load and its dedicated lifting set A lifting arrangement drawing shall be prepared The following information not limited to shall be stated on the lifting arrangement drawing e net gross weight of lifted object e GA drawing of the lifting arrangement showing the geometry of the load including location of centrecenter of gravity and the sling assembly NORSOK standard Page 150 of
266. s welding details diagrams of power and control circuits calculations test reports etc e fabrication documentation e g material certificates fabrication procedures welding documentation e e tification reports e formal statements declarations and certificates e instructions for use including inspection and maintenance instructions including wear and tear tolerances non destructive examination NDE pregrammesfprograms as applicable and NDE ai Formatert liste bullet 5 25 3 Instruction for use The instruction for use shall be made available to the end user The instruction for use of lifting appliances shall be in accordance with EN 12644 1 The instruction for use of lifting accessories shall be in accordance with EN 13155 7 1 The maintenance instructions shall include a maintenance programme in accordance with 4 9 The maintenance instructions shall include information on training of operators and maintenance personnel NDE programs shall be made both for regular inspections if In the case of complex lifting appliances the information on training of operators and maintenance personnel shall take into account the local conditions on at the installation and its location NORSOK standard Page 32 of 182199 Instruction for use shall include foundation reaction forces acting at the interface between the foundation and the lifting appliance The foundation reaction forces shall include the load effec
267. s a consequence of a mechanical or system failure All areas within the working area of lifting appliances shall be evaluated and classified according to the consequences of dropped objects and this shall be reflected in the lifting restriction charts for the installation see B 5 and table B 2 Table B 2 Classification of lifting areas Areas where the consequence of dropped object is unacceptable to the installation or to personnel and lifting is not permitted Typical examples are areas with process equipment containing pressurised hydrocarbons or flammable or toxic gas liquids normally manned areas and areas with essential for safety electric equipment or cables In red areas such equipment or normally manned areas are not protected against dropped objects Areas where the consequence of dropped objects is serious for the installation and for personnel A risk assessment shall be performed and lifting shall be according to strict procedures only Typical examples are areas with process equipment containing pressurised hydrocarbons or flammable or toxic gas liquids normally manned areas and areas with essential for safety electric equipment or cables In yellow areas such equipment or normally manned areas are protected against dropped objects The dropped object protection has defined limits regarding its protective effect such as e g allowable lifting height size shape or weight of load etc Areas planned and la
268. s function of pendant length Length of elastic pennant Numbers in brackets exceed the acceptance criteria The dynamic factor and the dynamic safety factor SFdyn are plotted against corresponding length of the elastic pennant in Figure 1 2 Applying the acceptance criteria in A 7 4 3 for dynamic factor and dynamic safety factor there are 4 criteria to be checked 1 Dica 2 5 Returns a length of L 2 9 1m 2 Dicc lt 3 0 Returns a length of L 2 9 6m 3 SFdynica SFstat Returns a length of L 210 7m 4 SFdyn cc lt SFstat Returns a length of L210 7m The plot shows that the minimum required length is Lmin 10 7 m length between splices In this example criteria 3 and 4 return approximately the same length 10 7m read off from criteria 3 and 4 NB It is always the criterion that returns highest value for length that that gives the minimum required pennant length as a shorter pennant will fail on another criterion Summary of parameters for the selected elastic pennant e Rope construction 8 strand plaited e Rope material Polyamide e Rope diameter 52mm e Pennant length between splices L 10 7 m e Minimum breaking load MBL 480 kN e Service o Host installation Semisubmersible unit o Max crane hook velocity 2 m s e Working load limit WLLRoo2a 4 Tonnes
269. s in this annex In case of conflicting requirements between this annex and DNV OS E406 the requirements of this annex prevail The requirements listed in A 2 2 1 to A 2 5 describe an acceptable design Alternative designs are acceptable if the risk assessment see 4 11 proves that the alternative design results in an equal or better safety fitness for use reliability and availability than the requirements in this annex The following requirements from NMD Regulation 4 July 2007 No 853 apply for launching and recovery appliances of free fall lifeboats e section 11 1st paragraph de Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e section 11 3 paragraph eee ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved A cm A 2 2 Limits of the launching and recovery appliances for free fall lifeboats A 2 2 1 General Launching and recovery appliances of Group A 1 consist of the parts and sub systems in A 2 2 2 to A 2 2 4 A 2 2 2 Main structure The main structure of the launching and recovery appliance for free fall lifeboats is the structure that is directly loaded by the weight of the lifeboat when it is suspended from its primary or secondary means of launching its means of retrieval or its hang off relief arrangement This includes foundation for mechanical equipment e g winches sheaves etc A 2 2 3 Primary means of launching The primary means of launching is the main lifeboat launching system normally based on gravity free fall or skidding combined with fr
270. s of attachment to the sling assembly should have a mass of less than 70 g The ferrules in one end of the steel wire ropes forming part of a sling assembly shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the sling manufacturer s name symbol or mark and the traceability code identifying the sling assembly with the certificate When marking is on a load bearing ferrule or the master link care must be taken to ensure that the mechanical properties of the ferrule or link are not impaired C 11 Loose lifting components Group R4 C 11 1 Shackles C 11 1 1 General requirements The minimum requirements given in the following referencesreference apply EN 13889 Forged steel shackles for general lifting purposes Dee shackles and bow shackles Grade 6 Safety RR C 271 U S Federal Specification NOTE For offboard lifting of objects offshore the requirements of F 3 and F 7 2 4 4 apply in addition For launching and recovery appliances for lifesaving equipment the requirements of A 1 8 3 3 apply in addition C 11 1 2 Complementary requirements for shackles C 11 1 2 1 Design Shackles shall be a type with double locking e g nut plus split pin NORSOK standard Page 106 of 182199 Formatert kke Hevet Senket Formatert Engelsk USA Formatert nnrykk Hengende 0 25 cm Formatert Skrift Ikke Fet C 11 2 Eye bolts nuts C 11 2 1 General requirements The requirements
271. s shall be checked with 4 misalignment out of plane fleet angle The load shall be calculated for the following conditions NORSOK standard 482199 Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm e 180 degrees wrap around angle acting perpendicular to SS the foundation plate Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm e 90 degrees wrap around angle acting perpendicular and parallel to the base plate Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e 180 degrees wrap around angle parallel with the foundation reduced A reduced rating is permitted for this load case provided the limitation is clearly documented 0 75 cm Flag blocks shall be designed for symmetric angular load as shown f P Supplier shall clearly state the angular limitations and range of i p sideways movement The limits of operation shall be clearly stated in the documentation 4 K 7 Typical sheave bracket design load for a lifting appliance with a given line pull SWL P Vector sum of line pull forces i e max 2 x SWL x DAF x DF and DF 1 68 as defined in H 3 H 7 3 Painting and marking Sheave brackets shall be painted yellow RAL 1003 and permanently marked with a unique identification H 7 4 Documentation and testing The following documentation shall be available e drawings eas Formatert Punktmerket Ni
272. savinglifesaving equipment to the launching and recovery appliance NOTE The term means of connection covers both those parts which are integral to the life savinglifesaving equipment and those parts which are integral to the lifting appliance 3 1 30 offboard lift lifting operation between the offshore installation and a floating unit or the sea 3 1 31 offlead angle angle from the vertical at which the hoist rope or chain leaves the lifting appliance measured in the plane described by the vertical and the radial direction of the last sheave or drum whichever is the last contact point with the structure of the lifting appliianceappliance Offlead angle is caused by the radial displacement of the hook load 3 1 32 offshore crane crane performing offboard lifting operations 3 1 33 onboard lift lifting operation within the offshore installation 3 1 34 operating temperature limits the operating temperature limits are the minimum and maximum environmental temperatures for normal operation of the lifting equipment where all effects of high and low temperatures have been taken into account 3 1 35 NORSOK standard Page 12 of 182199 personnel transfer carrier basket suspended on cranes used for transfer of personnel between installations and ships 3 1 55 proof load proof force specified load force to which a lifting component or lifting accessories are to be subjected during proof load test NOTE In this sta
273. sea or alternatively back to the storage position by means of an emergency lowering system in accordance with 5 15 2 A 2 4 4 Hang off relief arrangement Hang off relief arrangement is the system required by DNV OS E406 sec 7 C102 The hang off relief arrangement shall be designed to keep the lifeboat in the stowed position when it is disconnected from the primary and secondary means of launching Suspension points and means of connection for the hang off arrangement forming integral parts of the lifeboat shall have easy access so that it is possible to connect without entering the lifeboat The hang off relief arrangement shall be designed so that it is not possible to attach any of its components to the wrong suspension points or means of connection A 2 4 5 Skidding systems In addition to the limit states described in A 1 8 the proof of compentencecompetence shall be performed for the serviceability limit state SLS for the skidding tracks The verification of serviceability limit state shall be based on deflection criteria for the skidding tracks NORSOK standard Page 76 of 182199 Formatert Annex head4 Formatert Skrift Trebuchet MS 9 pkt Skriftfarge Svart Formatert ngen punktmerking eller nummerering In plane and out of plane deflection criteria for the skidding tracks shall be established with the aim to obtain the predicted trajectory in air during launching and to avoid lifeboat de
274. sets As an alternative to detailed calculation and certification of lifting sets according to the requirements stated in this standard wire rope slings according to EN 13414 1 or chain slings according to EN 818 4 grade 8 or other recognised standards can be used for offshore lifting of group F5 items by applying a dynamic reduction factor Ropar to the lifted weight Roar 0573 0 27 a0 Lifted weight F 12 NORSOK standard Page 156 of 182199 Table F 5 can be used for determination of the minimum working load limit WLLmin of the lifting set for the lifted object FabellTable F 56 Enhancement factor Lifted weight Dynamic reduction Min required working tonnes factor load limit WLLmin Roar F 7 7 Materials and fabrication Materials selection and fabrication shall be performed in accordance with 5 22 F 7 8 Testing and documentation of lifted obectsobjecis Lifted objects need not be tested Fixed or detachable dedicated lifting points mounted on an object e g machines unit structures etc are not subject to certification by an enterprise of competence according to NORSOK R 003 Annex H or R 005 Annex E unless they are intended for repeatedly detachment and reuse Lifted objects shall be accompanied by a statement for lifting issued by the manufacturer of the lifted object The statement for lifting shall contain at least the following information NORSOK standa
275. shall be designed for dynamic impacts load offsets and inclinations of the installation on which the lifting equipment is located that may occur when such equipment is in or out of service Reference is made to requirements in annexes for the equipment groups 5 6 Operational loads Lifting equipment except lifting accessories shall be designed for the in service and out of service operational loads including the environmentally induced loads that may occur at on the installation The operational limitations shall be stated in the instructions for use and in rated capacity information e g load indicators load tables marking etc for the equipment 5 7 Strength and stability structure and mechanisms 5 7 1 General The strength and stability of lifting equipment shall be calculated and documented in accordance with recognised international standards and design codes If design standards are not specifically listed in the annexes the method described in 5 7 2 to 5 7 6 shall be used 5 7 2 Principles for proof of competence Structural and mechanical strength of structural members and their connections ropes rope reeving components and load holding devices and other lifting components shall be documented by performing proof calculations in accordance with the principles of the limit state method described in EN 13001 1 5 7 3 Loads load actions load combinations and load effects Loads shall be selected calculated amplified
276. sign rope force Fras expressed as NORSOK standard Page 57 of 182199 Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift Fet Ingen understreking Formatert Normal Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Fras A 13 where Fy is the design rope force according to CEN FSEN 13001 3 2 clause 5 as resulting from the load combinations in this NORSOK standard Fras is the limit design rope force F isthe minimum breaking force as specified by the rope manufacturer Ya isthe minimum rope resistance factor according to CGENAFSEN 13001 3 2 5 4 minimum 2 0 The proof of static strength of steel wire ropes shall be as follows Fas S Fras A 14 NOTE Proof of fatigue strength in accordance with CEN FSEN 13001 3 2 clause 6 is not considered necessary for group A For these appliances corrosion will normally be the governing replacement criterion Bending diameters The bending diameter ratio D d on rope sheaves and drums shall be minimum 16 Terminations of wire ropes Terminations of wire ropes shall be in accordance with the following standards e Ferrules and ferrule securing EN 13411 3 eee Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e Metal and resin socketing EN 13411 4 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e Asymmetric wedge sockets EN 13411 6 0 75 cm e Symmetric wedge sockets EN 13411 7 A 1 8 3 3 Chains m
277. so made to relevant parts of Annex C and Annex D for lifting accessories man riding harness etc G 14 Loader cranes Group G8 Loader cranes shall be in accordance with EN 12999 using the design criteria given in G 3 Motion limiters in accordance with EN 12077 2 shall ensure that overload of winch and or wire rope is avoided Winches ontoadercranes shall bein accordance j wit E i 4492 G 15 Cable cranes Group G9 NORSOK standard Page 172 of 182199 Formatert Engelsk USA l Formatert Engelsk USA Formatert Engelsk USA l Formatert Engelsk USA Cable cranes shall be in accordance with this NORSOK standard G 16 Hand powered hoists and trolleys Group G10 Hand powered hoists and trolleys shall be in accordance with EN 13157 using the design criteria given in G 3 The safe functioning of hand powered hoists shall not be dependent upon the hoist being subjected to a minimum load Hand powered hoists shall have an overload protection device Brake padsThe brake shall be applied by two independent mechanisms pawls to ensure brake function is activated Each mechanism shall be able to transfer the forces necessary to stop and hold the load The mechanism shall be protected against corrosion The chain end connection shall withstand the minimum breaking load of the chain Trolleys intended for floating installations shall have braking system to prevent unintended longitud
278. ss otherwise specified in standards referred to in this annex Bolts used in lifting accessories shall as a principle be secured with two mechanisms Ref 5 4 9 C 6 Materials and fabrication No material grades other than those mentioned in the references listed in general requirements for specific groups and sub groups of this annex should be used unless explicitly stated in the complementary requirements in this annex Other material grades may be used when qualified for the specific application in accordance with 4 15 When complementary requirements for materials or fabrication are given under the specific groups or sub groups of this annex materials selection and fabrication shall be perfermedin accordancecomply with 5 22 C 7 Load testing and documentation C 7 1 Load test requirements Each manufactured lifting accessory shall be subjected to a proof load test Alternatively samples from production may be selected for break load testing or a design verificationdesignverification by an enterprise of competence may be performed One oreor more of the following methods are available and shall be selected in accordance with the test requirements shown in Table C 1 1 standard component tested during production in accordance with references listed in general requirements for specific groups and sub groups of this annex No additional test requirements 2 test load 2 x WLL or 2 x gross mass See Table C 2 for series and Table C 3 red
279. ssment was based 1 the data used and the sources e g accident histories experiences gained from risk reduction applied to similar lifting equipment 2 the uncertainty associated with the data used and its impact on the risk assessment 4 the objectives to be achieved by protective measures 5 the protective measures implemented to eliminate identified hazards or to reduce risk e g from standards or other requirements 6 residual risks associated with the lifting equipment 7 the result of the risk assessment 8 any forms completed during the assessment such as those given in ISO TR 14121 2 4 14 Verification Lifting equipment shall be subjected to internal verification by the manufacturer to ensure compliance with requirements Such internal verification shall be part of the technical construction file see 5 25 NORSOK standard Page 19 of 182199 Before being taken into use the lifting equipment shall be controlledsubjected to initial control by an enterprise of competence in accordance with NORSOK R 003 Annex E and H or NORSOK R 005 Annex E and H as applicable Devices for the lifting of persons or of persons and goods involving a hazard of falling from a vertical height of more than 3 m shall be subject to an involvement by a Notified Body if the Machinery Directive is applicable Formatert Engelsk USA upon dependent on the complexity of the tifting appliance risk DNV OSS 308 or equi
280. statements of possibility and capability whether material physical or casual 3 1 7 complex lifting appliances power driven lifting appliances with high capacity and or high risks NOTE Complex lifting appliances include but are not limited to offshore cranes BOP cranes drawworks launching appliances for lifeboats tower cranes mobile cranes etc 3 1 8 crane lifting appliance whereby the load can be moved horizontally in one or more directions in addition to the vertical movement 3 1 9 design temperature design temperature is a reference temperature used as a criterion for the selection of materials The design temperature is the lowest mean daily temperature which is the lowest point on the mean daily temperature curve over the year for a specific area The mean daily temperature is the statistical 24 hour mean temperature for a specific calendar day based on and averaged over a number of years of observation 3 1 10 extended harm damage to material assets or the environment in addition to harm physical injury or damage to health 3 1 11 fail safe component component where the predominant failure mode is known in advance and which is used such that the effect of such failure is less critical 3 1 12 harm physical injury or damage to health NORSOK standard Page 10 of 182199 3 1 13 inherently safe design measure protective measure which either eliminates hazards or reduces the risks associated with hazards b
281. steel quality and maximum thickness for resistance to brittle fracture for lowest working temperature 20 C in accordance with EN 13155 Table A 3 For equipment intended to be used at lower operating temperatures than 20 C materials shall be selected in accordance with C 6 For plates or flanges transferring forces in the thickness direction materials with documented through thickness properties shall be used Bolts shall have grade 8 8 NORSOK standard Page 109 of 182199 C 12 2 2 3 Fabrication The fabrication requirements in C 6 apply Pad eye shall be welded to the flange by use of full penetration welds Fillet weld shall not be used A static load test shall be performed on each unit with a test load equal to 2 WLL The test load shall be applied in all directions for which the pad eye flanges are intended to be oriented during normal use C 12 2 2 4 Information for use and maintenance Instructions should be given to prevent rotation of the flange and load when lifting with single leg wire rope sling Instructions should be given regarding necessary pretension of the bolts needed to ensure metallic contact between flange and load during lifting and to ensure evenly distribution of load in the bolts C 12 3 Magnet lifter C 12 3 1 Introduction Magnet lifters are normally designed as lifting beams Reference is made to section C 5 1 for requirements for the lifting beam The following subsections describe the requiremen
282. stic tensile load corresponding to 200 of the rated capacity of the hang off relief arrangement may be applied NORSOK standard Page 68 of 182199 Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm the attachment point s for the hang off relief arrangement without loading the skidding track The test is considered successful if there is no damage or permanent deformation to the main structure skidding track or means of connection after the test Test No A12 Static overload test main structure for secondary means of launching and means of Fetdadatqual to 220200 of the fully loaded titeboatrated capacity shall be suspended from the main structure of the appliance for secondary means of launching and means of retrieval respectively without loading winches The load shall be applied in the most unfavourable position of the launching appliance or means of retrieval simulating a realistic load path for the weight of the lifeboat The tests are considered successful if there is no damage or permanent deformation to the main structure Test No A13 Static overload test winches A load equal to 150 of the rated capacity see A 2 3 of the means of retrieval or secondary means of launching shall be suspended from the means of connection forming part of the hoist rope of the winch for the means of retrieval and secondary means of launching respectively The load shall be applied with the hoist r
283. sts shall be performed with a load equal to a fully equipped lifeboat without persons The tests are considered successful if the launching appliance is able to perform the required motions for both loading conditions and there is no damage or permanent deformation after the tests NOTE Ifthe host facility specific value for angle of heel for the damaged host facility is known this test may be performed at the host specific angle of heel in steadinstead of 17 Reference is made to Table A 2 Test No A9 Means of launch testing by simulation The means of launch testing by simulation as required by DNV OS E406 Sec 11 A500 shall be demonstrated in accordance with a prescribed procedure describing a realistic functional test s to positively confirm that the activation system is working properly and the release mechanism is fully opened and unloaded The test of a system using skidding tracks is considered successful if the lifeboat has moved min 100mm along the skidding track after the release mechanism is fully opened and unloaded For the purpose of this test the lifeboat shall be suspended in the primary means of launching with two loading conditions one with loads corresponding to 110 of the rated capacity see A 2 3 of the primary means of launching and one corresponding to empty lifeboat The two independent activation systems as required by A 2 4 1 2 shall be tested separately for both loading conditions In order to avoid exposin
284. t This is a different approach compared to the definition of Rated capacity used in this NORSOK standard For lifting accessories see Annex C D 3 2 Environmental conditions To obtain a safe design the buyer of the lifting equipment shall give information regarding the environmental conditions for the installation at the elevation level where the lifting equipment shall be located Wind forces horizontal and vertical accelerations are important basic information for the calculation of realistic forces acting on the equipment both during operational non operational and accidental conditions D 3 3 Loading and utilization data The buyer shall in agreement with the supplier decide the required service lifetime load spectrum and utilization data to be applied for the calculations For further information regarding group classification of lifting appliances see DNV Standard for Certification No 2 22 Lifting appliances and FEM1 001 Rules for the Design of Hoisting Appliances Booklet 2 Some guidance data will be given for the selection of appliance group and dynamic factor for different type of equipment see D 6 to D 7 D 4 Conventional drawwork including top drive DDM Group D 1 In addition to the general requirements given in D 1 the following requirements apply Conventional drawworks are defined as complex lifting appliances ref main part of this NORSOK standard D 5 Cylinder operated hydraulic draww
285. t performed for groups of sizes The manufacturing test specified in EN 1492 4 6 5 shall be performed on at least one sample of elastic pennant made from the same rope drum NOTE The test sample need not have the same length as the final delivered elastic pennant as long as the distance between the tails of splices on the test sample is not less than 15 times the nominal rope diameter ref EN 1492 4 clause 6 3 2 The force elongation curve for the particular rope construction and nominal rope size shall be documented by type testing following the procedure of chapter 9 in ISO 2307 with the following additional hara continuous recording of the force and elongation coordinates during tensile test up to 50 of MBL in accordance with chapter 9 6 of ISO 2307 A 7 4 67 Marking In addition to the marking specified in EN 1492 4 clause 7 the sling shall be labelled R 002A Elastic pennant The label shall also be marked with the alsa Seno oh EG cca elastic pennants intended toiftthe rescue boatservice for which it is designed see A 7 4 1 A 7 4 78 Certificate The manufacturer s certificate for the elastic pennant shall be labelled R 002A Elastic pennant in addition to the information required in EN 1492 4 clause 8 The working load limit WLLrooza as calculated according to this standards shall be stated instead of the working load limit according to EN 1492 4 The certificate shall state the pennantWLLaroosn is tend
286. t i e an external force from an actuator shall be necessary to open the release mechanism The actuator and release mechanism shall be interconnected in the positive mode in accordance with ISO 12100 6 2 5 It shall be possible to visually check that means of connection are fully engaged and that the release mechanism is secured NOTE Shackles and hooks in accordance with Annex C clause C 11 1 and C 16 3 respectively are considered to comply with the above requirements A 2 4 3 Means of retrieval A 2 4 3 1 General The means of retrieval shall be capable of hoisting the rated capacity given in A 2 3 from sea surface to the stowed position NOTE The requirements for means of retrieval given in this clause are based on means of retrieval combined with secondary means of launching utilising a winch and falls Other solutions may also be considered but at the time of publication of this NORSOK standard no other solutions are considered sufficiently qualified Other solutions must be qualified in accordance with 4 15 Some of the requirements given in the subsequent subclauses are given based on the assumption that the means of retrieval is intended to hoist the lifeboat with a crew of three If hoisting the lifeboat with persons NORSOK standard Page 75 of 182199 inside is not part of the intended use the requirements in A 2 4 3 2 3 do not apply see also A 2 4 3 4 for emergency operation A 2 4 3 2 Hoisting mechanism A
287. tainers FIBCs for non dangerous goods IMO SOLAS Life savingLifesaving appliances LSA Code adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee by resolution MSC 48 66 concerning evacuation and life saving appliances on mobile offshore units Electrical systems Surface preparation and protective coating Design of steel structures Safe use of lifting equipment Safe use of lifting and transport equipment in onshore petroleum plants Technical safety Working environment Mechanical completion and commissioning Risk based maintenance and consequence classificationclassification US Federal Specification FF T 791 B Turnbuckle US Federal Specification RR C 271 Chain and attachments welded and weldless 2 2 Informative references DNV OS C501 DNV OSS 308 DNV RP A203 DNV RP C203 EN 1993 6 DNV Offshore Standard Composite Components Verification of lifting appliances for the oil and gas industry Qualification of New Technology Fatigue Design of Offshore Structures Eurocode 3 Design of steel structures Part 6 Crane supporting structures NORSOK N 001 Integrity of offshore structures 3 Terms definitions and abbreviations For the purposes of this NORSOK standard the following terms definitions and abbreviations apply 3 1 Terms and definitions 3 1 1 activation system interconnected parts necessary for powered or manual opening of the release mechanism including the power supply and control system or manual control d
288. tem Test No A2 Tensile test means of connection Means of connection for which breaking force is the characteristic resistance ref A 1 8 3 3 shall be subjected to a tensile test load to verify that the breaking force is equal to or greater than the breaking force specified in A 1 8 3 3 The direction of the test load shall reflect the final installation of the host facility without heel or trim The test load shall be gradually increased to a value of at least the breaking force specified in A 1 8 3 3 The test is considered successful if there is no failure to the means of connection or release mechanism at a load less than the breaking force In this context the term failure means the means of connection do not disconnect due to breakage or elastic or permanent deformation Test No A3 Tensile test means of connection anchorage in hull Means of connection shall be subjected to a tensile test load when they are fixed to their anchorage in the lifeboat hull The direction of the load shall reflect the final installation of the host facility without heel or trim The test load shall be gradually increased to a value corresponding to at least 250 of the rated capacity of the corresponding mechanism ref A 2 3 for the means of connection The test is considered successful if there are no damage or permanent deformations that reduce the structural strength in the hull material Test No A4 Actuator force primary means of laun
289. tems shall where fitted as a minimum comply with ISO 13849 1 required performance level d G 12 4 9 Subsea operation mode The control station shall include a manually operated mode selection switch for sup seasubsea operations NORSOK standard Page 170 of 182199 While sub seasubsea operation mode is selected the ELRS MOPS AOPS and the rope tensioning heave compensation systems shall be operative While the subsea operation mode is deactivated AOPS and the rope tensioning heave compensation system shall be deactivated Subsea operation mode shall be inhibited whenever the hooks are positioned over the installation deck 4 4 10 Automatic overload protection system AOPS The crane shall be equipped with an automatic overload protection system AOPS that automatically protects the crane from overload during subsea operations AOPS may be combined with heave compensation system rope tensioning system NOTE Overload may occur due to relative motions between the crane and the load entanglement of hooks to adjacent equipment or hook fixed to the seabed etc G 12 4 11 Instruction for use for subsea operations The instruction for use shall include detailed instructions for subsea operations In particular the following shall be addressed a each subsea lifting operation shall be separately risk assessed and planned As a minimum the following shall be taken into consideration weather conditions lift off and landing areas lifti
290. tert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 In addition to the marking required by EN 13411 4 Clause 7 the socketed medium shall be marked with a unique identification for traceability to the certificate issued by the socketing manufacturer The marking shall be performed in accordance with EN 13411 4 Clause 7 C 16 5 2 4 Information for use and maintenance The socket and socket resin system shall be accompanied with instructions issued by the socket manufacturer and socket resin system manufacturer as applicable covering all necessary instructions as foreseen in EN 13411 4 C 16 5 2 5 Fabrication manufacturing processes The socketer s competence shall be documented C 16 6 Wedge sockets C 16 6 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply EN 13411 6 Terminations for steel wire ropes Safety Part 6 Asymmetric wedge socket EN 13411 7 Terminations for steel wire ropes Safety Part 7 Symmetric wedge socket C 16 6 2 Manufacturer s certificate In addition to the information required by EN 13411 6 and 7 the manufacturer s certificate shall contain the following in formationinformation e Minimum breaking load Serene e Manufacturing proof test load Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 C 16 7 Swivels C 16 7 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following refere
291. th only one suspension rope one top link is to be attached directly to the crane hook and the other top link shall be attached above any swivelling elements of the hook For aluminium work baskets the resistances and resistance factors for materials members and connecting devices shall be taken from EN 1999 1 1 Work baskets shall have a roof in accordance with EN 14502 1 The anchorage points for personal protective equipment against fall from a height shall be located above the persons in the baskets Work baskets shall have anchorage points for evacuation equipment e g descending devices The number of anchorage points shall be equal to the number of persons allowed in the work basket The work basket shall be designed to withstand impact forces corresponding to a horizontal impact against a rigid structure at a horizontal speed of 1 m s Permanent deformations are acceptable but it shall be demonstrated by calculations that no load bearing members will suffer loss of load bearing capacity For the purpose of performing the proof of competence for the work basket floor the payload of the platform shall be distributed according to EN 280 5 2 3 1 in the most unfavourable way in terms of stresses When the work basket is suspended without persons or other loads there shall be no inclination The work basket shall be designed to limit the inclination to maximum 7 from the horizontal when an inclination test load as described in C 18 1
292. the sea surface where supply vessels are likely to be positioned If necessary the height of the crane and crane cabin above the loading areas shall be increased in order to ensure optimal working conditions for the crane and the operator It is essential for safe operation of an offshore crane that the selected size provides safe working conditions regarding loads and radius for all operations In particular the radius for operation of offshore lifts shall be NORSOK standard Page 163 of 182199 sufficient to ensure sufficient horizontal clearance between the loading area at sea level and the structure of the installation G 11 2 Design General purpose offshore cranes shall be in accordance with EN 13852 1 taking into account the additional design criteria given in G 3 and the following subclauses Offshore cranes shall be designed for 20 years of service life minimum NOTE Reference is made to 5 8 Typical service hours for offshore cranes on installations without drilling 500 h year to1000 h year Typical service hours for offshore cranes on installations with drilling 2000 h year to 4000 h year Service hours include idle running Typical number of lifts is 10 lifts per hour G 11 3 Access Offshore cranes shall be equipped with a main access route and a separate alternative escape route from the cabin machinery house and to the deck of the installation The main access route shall have stairway faddersstairs between d
293. tical reaction Pip in heaviest loaded point B may be found by equilibrium as follows NORSOK standard Page 152 of 182199 Figure F 5 3 point lift Vertical design reaction Pp WLL B Wcoc SKL DAF 2 point lift For a 2 point non symmetrical lift with L4 lt L as illustrated in Figure F 6 the vertical reaction P p in heaviest loaded point B may be found by equilibrium as follows NORSOK standard Page 153 of 182199 WLL Wcoc SKL DAF L he a ao 1 point lift For a 1 point pon symmetrical lift the vertical reaction P_p may be found as follows NORSOK standard Page 154 of 182199 Figure F 7 1 point lift Vertical design reaction P p Pip WLL DAF F 7 F 5 3 2 Required Shackle Size Determination of required shackle F 7 3 2 Required shackle size Determination of required shackle Pip Yam DF MBLsyackte 2 F 8 COS ag where Yrm 1 8 for shackles The rated WLL for the shackle will then be WLL hackle 2 MBL ghackle SFm where SF is the safety factor as specified by the shackle manufacturer The WLL of shakclesshackles marked on the shackle shall not be less than the static sling force in each leg of a lifting set resulting from the weight of the lifted object F 7 3 3 Required slings The sling leg s shall be selected on the basis of minimum breaking load MBL in F 9 Pip Yam DF NORSOK ee Lp Yr Phge F 9 99 COS as Y
294. ting Appliances Ch 2 Sec 5 B200 to withstand the additional forces on flanges and drum due to long lengths of hoisting rope used for subsea lifting for the load effects due to weight of hoisting rope rope tension and the maximum number of windings of the rope onto the drum G 12 4 4 Rated capacity indicator The rated capacity indictor shall continuously compensate for the net submerged weight of the rope and lifting accessories suspended by the crane G 12 4 5 Tensioning and compensation systems A rope tensioning and or heave compensation system shall be installed The chosen system s shall be designed for the specific subsea operations the crane is designed for Tensioning and compensation systems shall include wire rope heat and low cycle fatigue monitoring system due to kinetic energy G 12 4 6 Rope tensioning system A rope tensioning system shall reduce the dynamic loads occurring during subsea operations enable smooth landing and lift off from the seabed and avoid the hoisting ropes becoming slack G 12 4 7 Heave compensation system A heave compensation system shall compensate relative motions between the crane and the seabed by automatically controlling the hook position relative to the seabed and enable smooth landing and lift off from the seabed and avoid the hoisting ropes becoming slack G 12 4 8 Performance level Safety related parts of control systems for any active or passive rope tensioning or heave compensation sys
295. ting appliances the relevant means addressed in clause 5 12 3 of EN13135 2 for high risk applications and the risk coefficient specified in EN13001 2 shall be evaluated and implemented without causing additional risks In addition Annex K informative describes means and methods to achieve an adequate level of safety for lifting appliances for high risk applications Development of new technology shall be subject to the requirements of Clause 4 15 As a general rule the risk coefficient for lifting of persons by using lifting appliances shall be taken as Yn 1 5 As a general rule the risk coefficient for lifting of persons by using lifting accessories shall be taken as Yn 2 0 unless the dynamic amplification factor has been determined for the particular case A verification level corresponding to at least Medium according to DNV OSS 308 or equivalent should be applied ref 4 14 Lifting appliances for high risk applications shall as a general rule be fitted with an EOS system in accordance with 5 15 3 Other requirements for the high risk applications may be stated in the annexes NOTE Equipment for lifting of persons which is supplied with an EC Type examination certificate to the Machinery Directive is lt Formatert Innrykk Venstre 0 cm considered to have an adequate level of safety for that purpose provided that this high risk application is confirmed by the F rste linje 0 cm manufacturer in the informat
296. ting lug plate thickness te cheek plate thickness J 2 5 6 Weld strength for Type 3 Weld limit design stress should be assessed to satisfy the following condition _ fy ieee J 12 NORSOK standard Page 204 of 182199 Weld between boss and plate shall have full penetration Figure J 11 Horizontal loaded boss Figure J 12 Vertical loaded boss Maximum stress op at point A and point B for horizontal load 2 p m Ry t J 13 Maximum stress Op for vertical load at point C 2 P a lt ih t J 14 These formulas may be used to check stress magnitudes from the horizontal and vertical forces of the lifting lug design force P NORSOK standard Page 205 of 182199 K 1 General Annex K Informative High risk application Lifting appliances for high risk applications shall be designed and have means to reduce the probabilities and consequences of possible harm A possible method and applicable means are described in this annex The extent of high risk applications can be divided into classes of high risk ref Table K 1 Table K 1 Classes of high risk Risk class Description Exposure High risk Consequences of failure are limited to the Personnel class vicinity of the lifting equipment with considerable economic social and Dangerous materials e g explosives environmental consequences or potential flammables and dangerous for loss of human lives withi
297. ting movements due to wire rope elasticity Deadline wheel Travelling block Multi sheaved wire block suspended in the drilling line wire rope parts Travelling block Drilling line Wire rope pulled by draw work Drilling line Drill line Deadline anchor Anchorage unit for the dead end of the drilling line Often combined with a load cell to indicate and record variation of hook load and weight on bit during drilling Deadline anchor Derrick drilling machine DDM A machine that turns the drill string It consists of one or more motors electric or hydraulic connected with appropriate gearing to the main shaft The DDM is suspended from the travelling block so the rotary mechanism is free to travel up and down the derrick guided in vertical guide rails Drill string load is transmitted through the main shaft swivel sennectionconnecting links to the travelling block DDM Top drive Other equipment shown in drawing but not included in Group D 1 Derrick Drilling tower structure for suspension of crown block drill string load Support for derrick mounted equipment Derrick Drilling tower Drill line drum Storage drum for excessive length of wire rope drilling line used during cut and slip operation Drill line drum Slips A wedge formed device used to grip the drill string ina relatively non damaging manner and suspend it in the rotary table Slips Rotar
298. ting out the unit transporting it to its destination and replacing it The document shall be part of the operational documentation for the installation Equipment of more than 25 kg and that requires regular maintenance according to B 2 Table B 1 or replacement during the design life of the installation shall be included in the document When modifying the installation the material handling plan shall be revised to reflect any changes made to areas systems equipment or lifting transport facilities The material handling plan shall as a minimum contain the following a description of all material handling equipment e g main cranes personnel and goods lift fork lift trucks trolleys air film transporters elephant cranes A frames mobile cranes lorries with cranes etc including tag numbers when required sizes and capacities b description of standardized sizes of foundations and suspensions for lifting equipment as applicable see Annex H requirements for certification and marking of foundations and suspensions d description of the main material handling philosophy for internal transport on the installation description of function size and location of lay down and storage areas including areas for and handling of temporary company provided and hired equipment f description of all items of more than 25 kg to be handled including identification numbers location weight size expected maintenance replacement interv
299. tion C y 1 5 is the risk coefficient as described in 5 9 Y 2 3 is the rope resistance factor for fibre ropes The dynamic factor at pick up from sea is given by the following expression V K 1 WLL is the dynamic factor for pickup of rescue boat from sea A 20 amp R002A NOTE The dynamic factor is only dependent on the characteristics of the fibre rope used in the elastic pennant in addition to the lt Formatert Normal relative velocity and WLL For the pur f calculating th namic f r the crane i m indefinitely sti Formatert nnrykk Venstre 0 cm where F rste linje 0 cm Vp 0 5x Vy V V A 21 eas Vpr m s is the relative velocity in m s between rescue boat and crane hook at pick up Feltkode endret V m s is the maximum steady state hoisting velocity the crane is able to lift the gross mass of the rescue Feltkode endret boat REE Vp m s is given by expression A 6 in A 1 5 7 Feltkode endret Vo m s is given by expression A 7 in A 1 5 7 Kis the static stiffness in kN m for the elastic pennant as described in A745 Feltkode endret A Formatert Normal Mellomrom F r A 7 4 5 Static stiffness 6 pkt Etter 6 pkt Tabulatorstopp Elastic pennants shall be designed with a sufficiently low static stiffness K kN m necessary for obtaining 1 5 cm Left the
300. tions from wind snow ice or temperature variations B1 ULS Pick up of lifeboat from sea in NLS conditions in combination with environmental actions B3 ULS Acceleration of hanging lifeboat at start of descent or start of hoisting in NLS conditions with environmental actions from wind snow ice and temperature variations C3 ULS Static and dynamic overload testing in NLS conditions with a the following test loads 2 2 times rated capacity for static load testing of structure 1 5 times rated capacity for static load testing of winches and 1 1 times rated capacity for dynamic load testing The rated capacity for the particular mechanisms are specified in A 2 3C6 ULS Secondary means of launching with a test load equal to 1 1 times the rated capacity with and without persons see A 2 3 in combination with loads caused by emergency braking during lowering at full speed NORSOK standard Page 42 of 182199 Table A 5 Load combinations for Group A 2 Launching appliances for lifeboats launched by falls and a winch Categories Loads Reference Load Load Load Formatert nnrykk Vens of loads combinations A combinations B combinations C cm EN NORSO Parti A1 A1 A Partial B1 B Parti 1 2 R 002 safet factor safet y S y facto facto rs Yp rs Yp Yp Regular Gravitatio Mass of the 4 2 2 1 oF 1 1 5 for 1 Q 1
301. to activate and operate The secondary independent power system shall have sufficient capacity to hoist and lower the same load as the primary power system A 1 12 Securing arrangement for training and maintenance For training and maintenance purposes when the life saving equipment is not intended to be launched a fail safe securing arrangement including an interlock system is to be provided to prevent unintended operation or release The securing arrangement may be such that launching is not physically possible when the securing arrangement is in place and that launching is only possible when the securing arrangement is removed The securing arrangement including attachments to structure shall be durably marked for identification and for prevention of misuse NORSOK standard Page 60 of 182199 Formatert Skrift 8 pkt f Formatert Skrift 8 pkt ALJ Formatert Skrift 8 pkt NOTE _ The securing arrangement as required by this clause is not intended for hang off purposes but hang off Formatert Skrift 8 pkt may be used for securing when the requirements for securing arrangement are fulfilled a Jai mee mg 7 ia Formatert Skrift 8 pkt A 1 13 Procedures Clear and unambiguous procedures shall be provided for primary means of launching lt Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 secondary means of launching Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved A cm maintenanc
302. torbritannia Rings shall be in accordance with C 16 4 1 and the following additional requirements for offboard lifts e Documented Charpy v notch tested to minimum 42 J at 20 C 27J at 20 C in fusion line e Other grades of similar or better quality may be used if they satisfy requirements of a recognized standard applicable for lifting equipment and with Charpy values as _specified herein Formatert Ingen understreking documented Charpy valuestemperature 42 d 42J at 20 2 C 2744 27J at 20 C in fusion line lt Formatert Ingen punktmerking eller nummerering F 7 3 Examples of calculations F 7 3 1 Lifting point load Heaviest loaded lifting point will normally be the point closest to COG This point will have a maximum vertical reaction for design Pp as illustrated by Figure F 4 4 part sling arrangement 3 part sling arrangement Figure F 4 Heaviest loaded lifting point B with vertical reaction P p 4 point lift For a 4 point simply symmetrical lift with b gt bz and a gt ap as illustrated in Figure F 4 the vertical reaction Pip may be expressed by the equilibrium equation as follows For a 4 point non symmetrical lift a more detailed analysis is recommended WLL b a1 Wcoc SKL DAF Pip z F 4 Las Lec 3 point lift For a 3 point non symmetrical lift with b gt bz and a gt a2 as illustrated in Figure F 5 the ver
303. ts for all groups are subject to the provisions for Enterprise of competence given in NORSOK R 003 Annex H or R 005 Annex H as applicable The portable units shall be designed to facilitate safe lifting The following requirements apply Some exceptions are specifically mentioned in the standard text for group F 4 and F 5 exceptions mentioned in referenced documents are not accepted e the envelope formed by the projected outline of the unit and its lifting set shall be smooth without Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 geometrical details giving risk of entanglement between lifted unit and surrounding or between lifted Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved and lifting set Examples of such envelopes are shown in Figure F 1 All groups of portable units shall 0 75 cm be free from protruding parts outside the envelope of the unit i e details and parts that may catch or damage other load load carriers or structures are not allowed Protruding parts representing a risk for overload to crane in case of entanglement to the vessels during lifting operation are not allowed e portable units with door handles hinges hatch cleats and similar details shall be arranged in a recessed or protected fashion to avoid becoming catch points or contacting points that may complicate lifting and handling operations Deflector plates should be designed such that the angle between the outer plane e g of bottom rail or wall and the free edge of the plate is
304. ts for magnet attachments used in magnet lifters C 12 3 2 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply EN 13155 Cranes Safety Non fixed load lifting attachments DNV OS E101 Drilling Plant In case of conflicting requirements given in the above references the most stringent requirement applies C 12 3 3 Complementary requirements for magnet lifters C 12 3 3 1 Design Safety related parts of control systems for operation of magnets e g indicators warning devices or devices for two action control shall fulfil a required performance level C in accordance with ISO 13849 1 For the purpose of complying with this NORSOK standard any exceptions for no go areas given in EN 13155 are not allowed C 12 3 3 2 Information for use and maintenance The geometrical shape and range of sizes intended to be lifted with the magnets shall be described in the user instructions In addition a clear warning shall be stated not to lift other shapes or sizes than those described in the instructions C 12 4 Vacuum lifter C 12 4 1 Introduction Vacuum lifters are normally designed as lifting beams Reference is made to C 12 1 for requirements for the lifting beam The following subsections describe the requirements for vacuum attachments in vacuum lifters C 12 4 2 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply NORSOK standard Page 110 of 182199 EN 13155 Cranes
305. ts from the most severe load combinations applicable to the foundation interface including dynamic factors and effects from environmental conditions and motions of the installation Any partial safety factors risk coefficients or consequence factors included in the given foundation reaction forces shall be clearly stated ref Annex H 25 45 26 Marking Formatert Ingen punktmerking eller nummerering Unless otherwise specified in the annexes to this standard or references given therein all lifting equipment shall have the following marking e the business name and full address of the manufacturer e designation of the lifting equipment e designation of series or type e serial number e the year of construction that is the year in which the manufacturing process is completed e any legal marking e g CE marking if applicable Lifting equipment designed and constructed for use in a potentially explosive atmosphere must be marked accordingly Lifting appliances shall be marked with their rated capacity SWL Safe Working Load For cranes such marking shall be in accordance with EN 12644 2 Lifting accessories shall be marked with their working load limit WLL Lifting equipment must also be marked with full information relevant to its tyoe and essential for safe use as identified in the risk assessment Parts of lifting equipme
306. ts in an equal or better safety fitness for use reliability and availability than the requirements in this annex NOTE The requirements in this subclause of Annex A apply to launching appliances for lifeboats with two suspension points i e one fore and one aft with single fall or multiple falls at each suspension point Other solutions e g one suspension point may also be considered but at the time of publication of this NORSOK standard such solutions are not considered sufficiently qualified Other solutions must be qualified in accordance with 4 15 The following requirements from NMD Regulation 4 July 2007 No 853 apply for launching and recovery appliances of Group A 2 e section 11 1st paragraph eae Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e section 11 2 paragraph including subclauses a through d and g through h ee ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved M cm A 3 2 Mode selector Launching and recovery appliances of Group A 2 shall have a control device mode selector for manual selection of two distinguished different operational modes i e mode for installation and maintenance and mode for emergency evacuation The mode selector shall be protected against unintended use The mode selector shall be located at the control station outside the lifeboat Clear indication of the selected mode shall be provided The indication shall be visible both from the lifeboat captains position inside the lifeboat and at the control station outside the
307. uced test load over 25 t For assembled slings the test shall be performed either for each assembly or each individual leg Spreader beams lifting beams and lifting frames with a W Lt gt 20t shall be tested with test loads according to ILO Form No 3 Spreader beams lifting beams and lifting frames with a WLL gt 20t intended to be used with a particular lifting appliance may be tested together with that lifting appliance with test loads according to ILO Form No 2 Single and multi sheave blocks with 2 WLL gt 20 shall be tested with test loads according to ILO Form No 3 Sheave blocks intended to be used with a particular lifting appliance may be tested together with that lifting appliance with test loads according to ILO Form No 2 3 breaking load test on a sample length from each coil of rope with actual type of end terminations see Table C 2 for series 4 design verification efby enterprise of competence A verification level corresponding to at least Medium according to DNV OSS 308 or equivalent should be applied 5 according to ISO 13535 API Spec 8C NORSOK standard Page 102 of 182199 Table C 2 Test load 2 x WLL for series Total number of units ina Proof load test number of units Breaking load test number of series to be tested from each series units to be tested from each batch 1to5 1 1 6 to 10 2 1 11 to 20 3 1 21 to 40 4 1 gt 40 10 unless otherwise agreed with gt 1 enterp
308. uctions must clearly state that the work basket is only intended to be used with lifting appliances designed and manufactured for the purpose of lifting persons The instructions must describe how the top links shall be attached to the crane A statement shall be given to inform that no other lifting accessories e g forerunners shall be used between the crane hook and the lifting set of the work basket C 18 2 Stretcher intended for lifting of personnel using lifting appliances TO BE DEVELOPED C 18 3 Personnel transfer carrier Personnel transfer carriers are intended for both onboard and offboard lifting Requirements for such carriers are given in Annex A C 18 4 Man riding harness C 18 4 1 General requirements The requirements given in the following references apply e EN 813 Personal fall protection equipment Sit harnesses Seona Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm C 18 4 2 Complementary requirements Man riding harnesses shall be equipped with shoulder straps and attachment point in front The attachment point shall be located at a height to avoid contact between the face and means of attachment and to avoid instability of personnel NORSOK standard Page 124 of 182199 Annex D Normative Lifting equipment in drilling area D 1 General Group D Lifting equipment in the drilling area shall ia additionte fulfil the requirements stated in Clause4 to Clause
309. ufacturer s certificate The socketing manufacturer shall issue a certificate based on the original rope manufacturer s and socket manufacturer s certificates containing the following details NORSOK standard Page 115 of 182199 socketing manufacturer s name and address aaa reference to unique identification mark on the socketed medium that gives traceability to the certificate statement that the socketing process is performed in accordance with EN 1341 1 4 rope details from original rope manufacturer s certificate reference to the original rope manufacture s name and certificate no reference to the original socket manufacturer s name and certificate no Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 The socket shall be accompanied by a certificate issued by the socket manufacturer containing the following details socket manufacturer s name and address iesse model or type designation of socket serial no or other unique identification of the socket minimum breaking load of socket Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 C 16 5 2 3 Marking on socket and socketed medium The socket shall be marked with the following details socket manufacturer s unique identification res model or type designation of socket serial no or other unique identification of the socket minimum breaking load of socket Jus
310. uirement in 4 8 shall be documented by calculations showing that the launching appliance will not be detached from the installation before other load bearing parts have collapsed A 1 9 Motion limiters For all groups except A 5 a motion limiter in accordance with EN 12077 2 shall be provided for the hoisting motion and any other recovery motions to prevent hoisting or moving the e savinglifesaving equipment beyond the stowed position Brakes shall be applied when the motion limiter is activated NORSOK standard Page 59 of 182199 Means shall be provided to prevent excessive pulling forces in the hoist rope s caused by hoisting the life saving equipment against an obstruction in the event of failure of the motion limiter for the upper position This may be achieved by use of one of the following measures a backup motion limiter in accordance with EN 12077 2 or limiting the pulling force in the winch rope e g by limiting hydraulic pressure For all groups except A 5 a motion limiter in accordance with EN 12077 2 shall be provided for the lowering motion to prevent rope pay out after the life saving equipment is been seaborne Brakes shall be applied when the motion mimterlimiter is activated A 1 10 Backup brake Mechanisms on launching and recovery appliances for life saving equipment shall be equipped with a backup brake in addition to the brake as required by 5 7 6 primary brake when specified for the particular equipment
311. um and natural gas industries Drilling and production equipment Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 Hoisting equipment Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved e ISO 10423 API Spec 6A Petroleum and natural gas industries Drilling and production equipment 0 75 cm Wellhead and christmas tree equipment e ISO 11961 API Spec 5D Petroleum and natural gas industries Steel drill pipe e ISO 13628 1 Petroleum and natural gas industries Design and operation of subsea production systems Part 1 General requirements and recommendations e ISO 13628 4 Petroleum and natural gas industries Design and operation of subsea production systems Part 4 Subsea wellhead and tree equipment e ISO 13628 7_ API RP 17G Petroleum and natural gas industries Design and operation of subsea production systems Part 7 Completion workover riser systems C 17 3 Complementary requirements C 17 3 1 Design SDLAs shall comply with the requirements given in the references in general requirements as applicable Although not mentioned in the scope of ISO 13535 API Spec 8C the requirements given in that standard apply to all types of SDLAs unless stricter requirements are given in the other references in general requirements All types of SDLAs shall be designed for one or more specified working load limit s WLL eg ge Rc cc es er sass lt Formatert J Formatert nnrykk Venstre 0 cm NORSOK standardsub group ini NOT
312. um dynamic force at hook with shock absorber Fo Static force at hook Es Force when shock absorber stroke motion starts 0 Hook unloaded t time ts time when the shock absorber stroke motion starts ty time at manimum dynamic force at hook without shock absorber t2 k k2 time at maximum dynamic force at hook with shock absorber stiffness at hook without shock absorber Stiffness at hook with shock absorber The effect of shock absorber may be taken into consideration in the calculations of the dynamic factor rovided that test results from representative testing at realistic conditions indicate that the maximum dynamic forces at hook are significantly and durably reduced Such calculations may be done by computer simulations and the teory of logaritmic decrement The reliability of shock absorbers shall be ensured by maintenance programs and condition monitoring lt E Hook Crane force shock absorber NORSOK standard Page 52 of 482199 f Formatert kke juster avstand mellom asiatisk og latinsk tekst Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk tekst og tall Formatert kke juster avstand mellom asiatisk og latinsk tekst Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk tekst og tall Formatert Normal Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk og latinsk tekst Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk tekst og tall Tabulatorstopp Ikke pa 15 25 cm A 1 5 7 Ex
313. uring records Foundations shall be tested together with the complete lifting appliance before taking into operation NORSOK standard Page 186 of 182199 NORSOK standard Page 187 of 182199 Annex Informative Selection of elastic pennant calculation example 1 1 General This annex serves as an example of how to select appropriate dimensions for an elastic pennant in accordance with A 7 4 1 2 Input parameters Required capacity Gross mass of rescue boat W 4 tonnes fully equipped with full complement of persons Required service Crane hoisting speed with load 4 tonnes Vy 2 0 m s Host installation type Semisub Where Vi is the maximum steady state hoisting speed at which the offshore crane at the host installation is able to lift the gross mass of the rescue boat 1 3 Rope selection 1 3 1 Data for fibre rope given by rope manufacturer Rope construction 8 strand plaited polyamide rope Table 1 shows MBL minimum braking load for different nominal rope diameters information taken from rope manufacturer s data sheets or cataloques Table I 1 Rope minimum breaking load Diameter NORSOK standard Page 188 of 182199 Curve for dimensionless static stiffness K taken from rope manufacturer s data sheet or catalogue is shown in Figure I 1 Static stiffness curve
314. va 1 e calculations Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm e manufacturing records NORSOK standard Page 181 of 182199 Sheave brackets shall be tested together with the complete lifting appliance before taken into operation The test load requirements for the lifting appliance shall be applied H 8 Foundations Group H 4 H 8 1 General Actions from lifting appliances shall be determined with due account of dynamic effects and if applicable the motions of the installation The design shall be based on the loads and load effects which are described by the manufacturer of the specific lifting appliance that is to be installed ref 5 25 3 Care should be taken to ensure correct application of partial safety factors on loads transferred from the lifting appliance to the foundation If the foundation reaction forces given by the manufacturer includes partial safety factors the partial safety factor Yp given in Table H 2 need not be applied The consequence factor Yc is intended to account for the strength proportion as required by clause 4 8 and should always be applied However it must also be checked that the foundation is not the first element to fail For Additionally for offshore ensure thatthe ratio between crane foundations the failure loads analysis required by EN 13852 1 ref Annex G of this standard performed and documented for the pedestal and its supporting structures Elastic deflections an
315. valent should be _ Formatert Engelsk USA as a reference Verification reports from third parties shall form part of the final documentation and made available to the end user 4 15 Qualification of new technology The solutions described in this NORSOK standard are generally accepted as qualified at the time of publication of this NORSOK standard Other solutions may also be applied provided they are sufficiently qualified in accordance with recognised methods The procedures and principles in DNV RP A203 may be used for qualification of new technology 5 Common requirements 5 1 Suitability 5 1 1 General At the time of contract for the delivery of lifting equipment parameters essential to ensuring that the lifting appliance is suitable and fit for use shall be exchanged and agreed upon Such design parameters shall include but not be limited to e location of installation Formatert Nummerert Niv 1 e type of installation Nummereringsstil Punkt Start pa 1 e area of installation arrangement lay out and load handling areraarea Ree ania e environment including temperatures radiation wind and other weather conditions if relevant e criticality of the loads to be lifted and the importance of the lifting operation e rated capacity e specification of interface between lifting appliance and its foundation e specification of foundation reaction forces acting at the interf
316. ve to be balanced against the actual conditions and the probability of a successful rescue operation G 11 21 Emergency operation system EOS All offshore cranes shall have an emergency operation system in accordance with G 4 regardless of installation or duty The EOS shall be activated and operated from the crane cabin The EOS system shall be available for operation at all times unless confirmed gas has been detected at the crane NORSOK standard Page 168 of 182199 G 11 22 Interface to installation emergency systems The crane shall be connected to the PA system emergency alarm system and the fire and gas detection system on the installation A PA loudspeaker shall be located in the crane cabin An indicator panel for the fire and gas status on the crane and its surrounding shall be installed in the crane cabin A single fire or gas detection shall give an alarm at the indicator panel in the crane cabin Installation emergency alarms shall be installed in the machinery house Fire andgas Gas detectors shall be installed in or atthe air inlets to the crane cabin and combuston engines ance _ Formatert Engelsk USA l Formatert Engelsk USA l Formatert Engelsk USA Combustion engines shall be equipped with inlet air shut down valve to prevent engine over speeding A Formatert Engelsk USA inletsystemsAir vents on tanks containing diesel shall be equipped with flame arresters Exhaust systems shall be equippe
317. vironmental actions from wind snow ice or temperature variations B1 ULS Pick up of lifeboat from sea in NLS conditions in combination with environmental actions B3 ULS Acceleration of hanging lifeboat at start of descent or start of hoisting in NLS conditions with environmental actions 1 ULS Re entry during launching in LS conditions 2 ALS Lifeboat in the stowed position ready for launching in combination with loads from extreme wind conditions corresponding to wind speed with 10000 year return period C3 ULS Static and dynamic load testing in NLS conditions with a the following test loads 2 2 times rated capacity for static load testing of structure 1 5 times rated capacity for static load testing of winches and 1 1 times rated capacity for dynamic load testing The rated capacity is specified in A 1 4 2 6 ULS Launching appliance with a test load equal to 1 1 times the rated capacity ref A 1 4 2 in combination with loads caused by emergency braking during lowering at full speed in mode for maintenance and installation C7 ULS Dynamic impact in hang off relief arrangement in case of testing the function of release mechanism by dropping the lifeboat into the hang off relief arrangement c8 ALS Launching appliance with hoist load in combination with loads due to external excitation of the foundation At the time of publication of this NORSOK standard hoisting lowering is the only motion of a typical launching and recovery
318. wering in deep water to landing on seabed Lifted objects This group includes any loads not belonging to Lifting set only the other groups which are not in themselves lifting equipment but fitted with attachment points for lifting accessories for lifting onshore internally on an offshore installation or between installation and vessel Lifted objects also inclucesinclude objects with detachable transport skid cradle Examples of lifted objects may be e machines components or equipment with 4 fixed or detachable dedicated lifting points modules or structures with lifting point for s intended for lifting during installation maintenance and decommissioning Typical unit weights from 2 tonnes to 50 tonnes but may be used for lifts up to 100 tonnes F 3 Offshore containers Group F1 Offshore containers and their dedicated lifting sets shall be in accordance with DNV standard for certification No 2 7 1 April 2006 or EN 12079 1 and EN 12079 2 issan NOTE Certification requireme NORSOK standard NORSOK standard Page 143 of 182199 Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt In order to avoid mix of shackles of different specifications only grade 8 shackles shall be selected with safety factor in accordance with DNV Standard for Certification No 2 7 1 or EN 12079 2 Offshore
319. with equation A 4 If the value Fbra necessary for calculating 2 cs is not known by measurements gt cs may be calculated according to equation A 3 with VR Vumax Or vr Set to triggering speed for overspeed protection device when provided A 1 5 5 Dynamic coefficient 2 for load combination C7 test of release mechanism If the release mechanism of lifeboats is to be tested when the lifeboat is hanging in the stowed position with hang off relief arrangement connected the impact caused by sudden drop into the hang off relief arrangement shall be taken into account by applying a dynamic coefficient 2c7 The maximum dynamic force in the hang off relief arrangement shall be established based on an equation for energy conservation from kinetic to potential energy taking into account the stiffness of the hang off relief arrangement the possible drop height and pretension of the hang off relief arrangement The dynamic coefficient 27 is the ratio between the maximum dynamic force and the weight of the hoist load A 1 5 6 Use of shock absorbers lishockShock absorbers are neededmay be used to limit the dynamic force during any of the above 4 Formatert Ikke juster avstand j ions_the d i isientsh he ratio bety j mellom asiatisk og latinsk tekst Ikke juster avstand mellom asiatisk tekst og tall HAHO oS systems y a m ae ee es Se ten ae Formatert Skrift Arial 10 pkt F en Formatert Skrift Arial 10 pkt
320. with seat belts For the purpose of strength calculations the minimum dynamic coefficient 2 shall be no less than 1 5 in any load combinations between the hoist medium and means of connection passive shock absorbers forming integral part of the launching appliance its hoisting machinery or the means of connection either part of the launching appliance or part of the Hife savinglifesaving equipment A 1 5 2 Dynamic coefficient 2 for load combination A1 and B1 pick up from sea Offshore there will be relative motions between the base of the lifting appliance and the life savinglifesaving equipment lifted from or lowered to the sea For calculation of inertial and gravity effects NORSOK standard 2 5 for life saving equipment where personnel is standing nal additional elastic elements to reduce the total system stiffness e g an elastic pennant placed neal Page 49 of 182199 Formatert Standardskrift for avsnitt i Formatert Standardskrift for avsnitt 7 l Formatert Standardskrift for avsnitt Formatert Standardskrift for avsnitt Formatert Standardskrift for avsnitt oa Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm seas Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm acting on the hoist load at the time of pick up from sea in load combinations A1 and B1 the dynamic coefficient 24
321. y The release mechanisms connecting the wire rope falls to the lifeboat shall operate at all possible rope fleet angles with and without tension in the wire rope falls when the boat is seaborne A 3 4 7 Activation systems A 3 4 7 1 General The release system shall have two independent activation systems for opening the release mechanisms i e primary activation system and backup activation system Both activation systems shall be designed to open the release mechanisms under the load of a fully loaded life boat Both activation systems must be clearly marked with instructions for use A 3 4 7 2 Primary activation system The primary activation system consists of the following parts a power source i e stored potential energy for each release mechanism an actuator for each release mechanism a control system incorporating a detection system for detection of seaborne lifeboat one 1 manually operated mechanical locking device to prevent unintended opening of the release mechanism e g locking of the release mechanism the actuator or the element isolating the power source e o o The following requirements apply to the primary activation system e It shall not be possible to release the lifeboat from the means of connection prior to activation of the launch devices e A single failure in the control system or a common cause failure shall not lead to unintended release e The control system for detection of seaborne lif
322. y Table The revolving or spinning section of the drill floor that provides power to turn the drill string Often a backup system for rotating the drill string wnen a DDM is installed Rotary table Heave compensator Compensates for vertical rig movements to reduce the drill string movements relative to the sea bed Heave compensator Active heave compensator Used to further reduce drill string movements relative to the sea bed Active heave compensator Racker equipment See Group D 3 Tubular feeding machine TFM See Group D 4 Horizontal to vertical HTV arm See Group D 4 Elevators and elevator suspensions See Group D 7 Guide track and doll Dolly for guiding the DDM Guide track and doll NORSOK standard Page 127 of 182199 a Drawwork 2 Fastlinewheel 3 crownbliock 4 Deadlinewheel 5 Travellingbiock 6 _oriltingline wire Derrick drilling machine DDM DDM may comprise several units Main shaft Swivel Gearbox Lirk hanger Connectior links Pipe handler Wash pipe etc o peri 30 orilllinedrum a fsis o 12 Rotarytable 13 Heave compensator 15 Rackerequipment 16 Tubular feeding machine TFM 18 Elevator amp elevator suspensions Figure D 1 Conventional drawwork including top drive DDM NORSOK standard Page 128 of 182199 Table D 3 Group D 2 Cylin
323. y changing the design or operating characteristics of the machine without the use of guards or protective devices 3 1 14 installation facility plant or vessel involved in petroleum activities excluding ships that transport petroleum in bulk NOTE Reference is made to PSA regulations for definition of petroleum activities Examples of installations include fixed installations FPSO vessels rigs barges crane barges service vessels onshore plants etc 3 1 15 launching and recovery appliances lifting appliance for lifesaving equipment 3 1 16 lay down area deck area for temporary storage of loads and equipment 3 1 17 lifesaving equipment evacuation equipment and rescue equipment 3 1 18 lifting accessories components or equipment used between the lifting appliance and the load or on the load to grip it but which is not an integrated part of the lifting appliance NOTE The term lifting accessories equals lifting gear as defined by ILO Convention 167 and NORSOK R 003 R 005 and loose gear as defined by ILO Convention 152 3 1 19 lifting appliance machine or device used for vertical movement of a load with or without horizontal movement NOTE Include cranes hoists drilling hoisting equipment and launching and recovery appliances for life saving equipment etc 3 1 20 lifting components components used as integral parts of lifting appliances and or as part of lifting accessories NOTE In some cases lifti
324. y possible loading condition i e from empty lifeboat with crew of three persons to the fully loaded lifeboat The launching shall not depend upon external energy supply other than gravity or stored mechanical power which is independent of the host installation s power supplies A 2 4 1 2 Release system for the primary means of launching The release mechanism and activation systems shall comply with the following clauses of DNV OS E406 in addition to the requirements of this subclause Formatert Punktmerket Niva 1 Justert ved 0 25 cm Innrykk ved 0 75 cm Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt Formatert Skrift 8 pkt e Sec 7 C101 Ae Formatert Punktmerket Niv 1 e Sec 11 A400 e Sec 11 A500 The release mechanism and activation systems shall be capable of operating in all specified environmental conditions including icing The release mechanism shall be designed in such a way that it will not be forced open by the self weight of the lifeboat i e an external force from an actuator shall be necessary to open the release mechanism The actuator and release mechanism shall be interconnected in the positive mode in accordance with ISO 12100 6 2 5 The two independent activation systems for the release mechanism as required by DNV OS E406 Sec 7 C101 may consist of manually operated or powered actuators NORSOK standard Page 73 of 182199 Justert ved 0
325. y the most severe method e g sudden application of winch brakes or emergency stop immediately after the lowering speed has reached its maximum If the winch is equipped with both primary and secondary brakes for the purpose of lifting lowering persons both brakes shall be applied simultaneously during this load test For winches with lowering speed 0 5 m s or higher the maximum dynamic peak force on the test load corresponding to F ra in equation A 2 shall be recorded during the stop The instruments used for measuring the peak load shall be able to record load samplings at a rate of 200 samplings second and have an accuracy within 5 The test is considered successful if both of the following acceptance criteria are met e the brakes brings the winch movement to a complete stop e the recorded peak force is equal to or less than the force Fy used in equation A 2 to calculate the dynamic coefficient M2 cs as defined in A 1 5 4 for load combination C6 For winches equipped with primary and secondary brakes for the purpose of lifting lowering persons the following tests shall be performed in addition a load equal to 110 of the rated capacity for lifting of persons see A 2 3 shall be suspended from the means of connection forming part of the hoist rope when the winch is installed in the main structure The load shall be lowered at full speed starting from the uppermost position of the lifeboat The lowering motion shall be stopped by
326. ystem should be installed for access to condition monitoring recorder files monitoring of control system update and backup of control system software a b c d Data should be continuously collected processed and stored A back up copy of the data should be stored independently It should be possible at any time for user to download status and report for condition monitoring of the crane G 11 9 Wind speed indicator NOTE Clause removed requirement covered in EN 13852 1 G 11 10 Warning horn NOTE Clause removed requirement covered in EN 13557 which is referred to in EN 13852 1 G 11 11 Hook and block protection device Where there is a hazard of hooks or hook blocks to come into contact with the crane boom due to wind oscillations etc the boom shall be provided with buffers or similar protection device to prevent damage to the boom structure NORSOK standard Page 165 of 182199 Hooks hook blocks and ball weight swivel weight shall be coloured with an easily visible colour G 11 12 Rigging detection system Cranes with the option for various rigging of the load hoist i e single and multiple fall shall be provided with an automatic detection system which give feedback to the control and safety system of the rigging configuration The automatic detection system shall ensure that the setting of the control and safety system comply with the actual crane configuration G 11 13 Location of

Main Power Generation and Distribution - Low Voltage

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents